Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 124

Sectional Catalog 2013 - 2014

Economics, Finance & Real Estate

CENGAGE LEARNING ASIA | www.cengageasia.com

TRANSFORMING LEARNING THROUGH

DIGITAL SOLUTIONS

DIGITAL

Engage. Retain. Succeed.


Students expect to learn digitally. With CourseMate, you can easily integrate interactive content like quizzing, videos, games while also tracking student engagement.

eBook

Quizzing

Videos

Game

More!

CourseMate breaks down concepts so you can apply them.

I am more of a hands-on learner, and the interactive tools on the site help me out tremendously when it comes to taking tests or just reviewing the chapter.

94%

Students appreciate and use se the CourseMate resources. In a recent study, 94% of students said they were very satised with CourseMate.* Mate Ma te.* *

*Data is from a joint study in Fall 2010 hosted by Cengage Learning and ODonnell & Associates ciates to measure the effectiveness of CourseMate. 17 instructors and 584 students were surveyed, yed, and their names were anonymous.

www.cengage.com/coursemate

Contents
Economics
Comparative Economics ....................................................... 2 Econometrics ............................................................................3 Economic Development ........................................................4 Economic Issues .......................................................................5 Economic Methodology ........................................................ 7 Economic Policy ...................................................................... 8 Environmental/Natural Resources ..................................... 9 Forecasting ...............................................................................11 Health Economics ..................................................................12 History of Economic Thought ............................................. 15 Intermediate Macroeconomics ..........................................17 Intermediate Microeconomics ...........................................19 International Economics ..................................................... 25 Labor Economics ................................................................... 28 Managerial Economics ........................................................ 29 Mathematical Economics.....................................................35 Money and Banking ............................................................. 36 Principles of Economics ...................................................... 38 Public Finance........................................................................ 62 Survey of Economics ............................................................64

Finance
Bank Management ............................................................... 67 Behavioral Finance ...............................................................68 Corporate Finance / Financial Management..................69 Entrepreneurial Finance ......................................................84 Financial Markets and Institutions ...................................86 Financial Services .................................................................88 International Finance...........................................................89 Investments ...........................................................................90 Personal Finance ................................................................... 97 Survey of Finance ...............................................................100

Real Estate
Real Estate Appraisal ......................................................... 102 Real Estate Economics ........................................................103 Real Estate Finance ............................................................104 Real Estate Investment...................................................... 106 Real Estate Law ................................................................... 107 Real Estate Principles .........................................................110 Combined Author/Title Index ........................................... 112

Prices
Order form/pricelist is available upon request through Cengage Learning Representative. Special prices are available for class adoption. Please contact your Cengage Learning Representative, listed in the inside backcover of this catalog for information on class adoption. Prices are subject to change without prior notice.

ECONOMICS
Comparative Economic Systems

COMPARATIVE ECONOMICS

THE GLOBAL ECONOMY AND ITS ECONOMIC SYSTEMS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION


Paul R. Gregory, University of Houston, German Institute for Economic Research (DIW Berlin); Robert C. Stuart, Rutgers University

Since the first edition of this book in 1975 (previously titled Comparing Economic Systems in the TwentyFirst Century), this market-leading title has examined different economies in theory and practice. This edition represents a complete revision and a significant expansion of the previous (2004) edition. The authors have completely rewritten and reorganized the 21 chapters of the previous edition and included a new chapter (Chapter 12, The Europen Model). NEW TO THIS EDITION This edition represents a complete revision of the previous 2004 edition. The Table of Contents has been completely reorganized and renamed. Chapters have new titles, and the topics and content have been completely rearranged and expanded from the previous edition. Twenty-one chapters have been expanded to twenty-two. FEATURES Since the first edition of this book in 1975 (previously titled Comparing Economic Systems in the TwentyFirst Century), this market-leading title has examined and compared different economies in theory and practice. Part One, Introduction: Definition and Measurement contains five chapters starting with an historical
2

overview of economic systems, then moving on to definitions and classifications, systems and outcomes, how systems change, and the broader settings of economic systems. Part Two then discusses the three major Economic Systems in Theory: capitalism, planned socialism, and market socialism. Part Three, Economic Systems in Practice, discusses the three main models of capitalism, examines the differences in the Anglo-Saxon model as practiced in England and the United States, discusses the European model of capitalism, the Soviet command economy, and Chinese system of market socialism. Part Four, Systemic Change: Contemporary Global Perspectives, treats transitions within and between economic systems, transition economies, privatization and the decline of government, macroeconomics, international trade and finance, and transition and the safety net. Part Five, Assessing the World Economies in a New Era: Performance, provides two forward-looking chapters, one on economic growth and performance in differing economic systems and the other on prospects for the world economy through 2050. CONTENTS

Part I. 1. Economic Systems in Historical Perspective. 2. Definitions and the Classification of Economic Systems. 3. Economic Systems and Economic Outcomes. 4. How Economic Systems Change. 5. The Setting of Economic Systems. Part II. 6. The Theory of Capitalism. 7. The Theory of Planned Socialism. 8. The Theory of Market Socialism. Part III. 9. Introducing Three Models of Capitalism. 10. The Anglo-Saxon Model England and the Industrial Revolution. 11. The Anglo-Saxon Model the United States Economy. 12. The European Model. 13. The Society Command Economy. 14. China: Market Socialism. Part IV. 15. System Change in a Global Perspective: Transition. 16. Transition Economies: Output Patterns and Measurement Issues. 17. Introducing Markets: Privatization and the Decline of Government. 18. The Macroeconomy: Fiscal and Monetary Issues. 19. Transition and the Global Economy: International Trade and Finance. 20. Transition and the Safety Net. Part V. 21. The World Economies: Economic Growth and Performance in Differing Economic Systems. 22. Prospects for the World Economy Through 2050.
2014, 586pp, Paperback, 9781285167015, South-Western College

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

ECONOMETRICS

INTRODUCTORY ECONOMETRICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 5E


Jeffrey M. Wooldridge, Michigan State University

Unlike traditional texts, this books unique presentation demonstrates how econometrics can be used to empirically study and answer questions across a variety of disciplines. A reflection of how econometric instruction has evolved, this edition is organized around the type of data being analyzed with a systematic approach, where assumptions are introduced only as they are needed to obtain a certain result. This approach simplifies the exposition and makes the texts material easier for students to comprehend. Packed with timely, relevant applications the text emphasizes examples that have implications for policy or provide evidence for or against economic theories. More than 100 intriguing data sets are now available in six formats for your teaching flexibility. A wealth of new and revised instructor resources, written by the author, are provided at no cost to the instructor. NEW TO THIS EDITION UP-TO-DATE COVERAGE HIGHLIGHTS THE LATEST EMERGING DEVELOPMENTS IN THE FIELD. Updated examples throughout this edition and coverage of the latest developments from the field clearly illustrate how chapter concepts apply to actual practice in todays business world. NEW, ADDITIONAL DATA SET FORMATS INTRODUCE STUDENTS TO DATA SETS IN SIX DIFFERENT FORMATS. This edition adds the R data set as an additional format for viewing data. In response to popular demand, this edition also provides the Minitab format. With close to 100 data sets in six

different formats, including R, Stata, Minitab, Microsoft Excel, Text and EViews, instructors have the flexibility and instant access needed to present the formats preferred while teaching. NEW ROBUST TEST BANK BY AUTHOR CLOSELY REFLECTS STRENGTHS IN LATEST TEXT. Author Jeffrey M. Wooldridge created Test Bank questions from actual tests developed for his own courses. Youll find a wealth and variety of problems, ranging from multiple-choice to questions about basic terminology. NEW CONTENT FOR DATA SETS PROVIDES VARIETY OF ENGAGING STATISTICS. New sets highlight productivity and salary statistics for economics professors in the Big Ten. This edition also includes a large data set on womens labor supply and fertility decisions; a current data set on elementary school teacher salaries and benefits as well as studentteacher ratios and spending; and time series data sets on economic activity, the Federal Funds rate, and minimum wages. NEW POWERPOINT SLIDES BRING LECTURES TO LIFE WHILE VISUALLY CLARIFYING CONCEPTS. Exceptional new PowerPoint presentation slides, created specifically for this edition, help you create engaging, memorable lectures. NEW UPDATED DATA SET HANDBOOK MAKES USE OF EXTENSIVE DATA SETS SIMPLE AND CONVENIENT. This unique handbook, created by author Jeffrey M. Wooldridge, lists all data sets in the latest edition of the text for quick reference. Each data set entry indicates the original source, when possible; lists where it appears in the text; and when applicable. FEATURES

COMPREHENSIVE COVERAGE ENSURES UNDERSTANDING IN CRITICAL AREAS OF ECONOMETRICS. This edition continues to offer trusted, comprehensive coverage with expanded discussions of both the basics and advanced applications of dummy variables; material on prediction after retransformation; expanded discussions of influential observations, weighted least squares, and least absolute deviations; and coverage of weak instruments. PRACTICAL APPLICATION PREPARES STUDENTS TO USE ECONOMETRICS IN BUSINESS TODAY. This unique, comprehensive text applies econometrics to actual real business problems, demonstrating
3

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

how each method answers a particular issue facing researchers who are analyzing non-experimental data. CONTENTS 1. The Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data. Part I: REGRESSION ANALYSIS WITH CROSS-SECTIONAL DATA. 2. The Simple Regression Model. 3. Multiple Regression Analysis: Estimation. 4. Multiple Regression Analysis: Inference. 5. Multiple Regression Analysis: OLS Asymptotics. 6. Multiple Regression Analysis: Further Issues. 7. Multiple Regression Analysis with Qualitative Information: Binary (or Dummy) Variables. 8. Heteroskedasticity. 9. More on Specification and Data Problems. Part II: REGRESSION ANALYSIS WITH TIME SERIES DATA. 10. Basic Regression Analysis with Time Series Data. 11. Further Issues in Using OLS with Time Series Data. 12. Serial Correlation and Heteroskedasticity in Time Series Regressions. Part III: ADVANCED TOPICS. 13. Pooling Cross Sections across Time: Simple Panel Data Methods. 14. Advanced Panel Data Methods. 15. Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares. 16. Simultaneous Equations Models. 17. Limited Dependent Variable Models and Sample Selection Corrections. 18. Advanced Time Series Topics. 19. Carrying out an Empirical Project.
2013, 912pp, Paperback, 9781111534394, South-Western College

analysis of current economic trends and policy issues in the countries that comprise developing Asiaa vast region extending from the Indian subcontinent to China and Japan. Each chapter begins with a theoretical foundation that provides the basis for a detailed discussion of major micro- and macroeconomic developments and policy issues in these Asian developing countries. Country and regional examples, along with summaries of empirical studies, are introduced to illustrate different points of view regarding the development experience. FEATURES UNIQUE ASIAN DEVELOPMENT PERSPECTIVE. Offers an exclusive look at economic growth and development from the viewpoint of Asian developing countries, and the authors own critical interpretation of the issues involved. UPDATED DATA AND DEVELOPMENTS. Explores recent developments in the global economic crisis of 2008/2009 and their impacts on Asia. It includes recent data and developments in agriculture, industry, finance, international trade, poverty, environment, health, and education. COMPREHENSIVE. The text is based on an extensive review of key contemporary issues in economic development in Asia. Material covers a wide range of topics such as macroeconomics, microeconomics, international trade, human resources and poverty. SUPPORTING COUNTRY CASE STUDIES. Extensive use of specific country studies with supporting current empirical data from databases from the Asian Development Bank, United Nations, and World Bank. FIRM THEORETICAL AND EMPIRICAL GROUNDING. Careful adaptation of theoretical and empirical materials has been made to reflect and explain economic developments in the Asian region from both micro and macroeconomic point of view. REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ADDITIONAL READINGS. A section of review questions and list of further readings are provided at the end of each chapter. CONTENTS 1. Introduction and Overview 2. Growth and the Asian Experience 3. The Asian Crises and Recent Developments 4. Agriculture 5. Industrialization and Structural Change 6. International Trade and Investment 7. Savings and the Financial System 8. Population 9. Poverty and Income Distribution 10. Human Resource Development: A Focus on Education and Health 11. Globalization and the
International Edition

ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT

ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT IN ASIA, 2E


John Malcolm Dowling, University of Hawaii; Maria Rebecca Valenzuela, University of Melbourne

<i>Economic Development in Asia, 2e </i> provides the reader with an in-depth theoretical and empirical

www.cengageasia.com

New Economy 12. The Environment and Sustainable Developments in Asia 13. The Political Economy of Developments in Asia
2010, 452pp, Paperback, 9789814272933, Cengage Learning Asia

ECONOMIC ISSUES

and Stability Issues, and You and the World Around You. Students will appreciate the logic and continuity of topics. Reflecting current events -- especially the recent financial crisis and policies of the Obama Administration -- the new edition includes significant updates to the chapters on housing, market power, unemployment, macroeconomic policy, world poverty, global agriculture, and international trade, among others. Virtually all data tables and related discussions have been updated. FEATURES Appropriate Technical Level: Economic tools used are carefully chosen as those appropriate for an issues course with no prerequisites. Complex topics more appropriate for the Principles course (i.e. marginal analysis) are left out of this text or relegated to appendices. Graphical analysis concentrates on two basic models: production possibilities and demand/ supply. Balanced Policy Perspectives: Viewpoint: Conservative vs. Liberal sections in each chapter present diverse policy perspectives, giving students a framework within which to understand their own economic philosophies. The economic definitions of conservative and liberal are carefully laid out to help students differentiate them from their more familiar political/social definitions. Discussion Questions: End-of-chapter Discussion Questions include Internet activities that introduce the student to key economic Web sites. Global and Multicultural Icons: Icons appear adjacent to material about international issues and diversity. As the nation becomes more diverse and the world more internationally connected, students increasingly need this information. CONTENTS SECTION I: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS, SCARCITY, PUBLIC GOODS, AND SPILLOVERS. 1. Introduction. 2. Crime and Drugs. 3. The Environment. 4. Education. SECTION II: THE ECONOMICS OF SOCIAL ISSUES. 5. Discrimination. 6. U.S. Poverty. 7. Housing. 8. Health Care. 9. Social Security. SECTION III: GLOBAL POVERTY, AGRICULTURE, AND TRADE. 10. World Poverty. 11. Global Agriculture. 12. International Trade.
5

ECONOMIC ISSUES AND POLICY, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH INFOAPPS 2-SEMESTER PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 5E
Jacqueline Murray Brux, University of Wisconsin, River Falls

Significantly revised in light of sweeping changes in the economy and government, this book provides students with a grasp of basic economic tools through the analysis of important economic issues and their related policy perspectives. Economic theory is presented in a simple, market-oriented framework at a level of technicality that is deliberately appropriate for a basic first course in economics directed at non-majors. Complex topics more appropriate for a Principles of Economics course are left out or contained in appendices. In analyzing economic situations and the implications of policies, liberal and conservative viewpoints are effectively balanced. The text also encourages students to get involved in the issues discussed. NEW TO THIS EDITION For the new edition, the author has greatly improved the table of contents, reordering several of the chapters and organizing them into five sections: Introduction to Economics, Scarcity, Public Goods, and Spillovers, The Economics of Social Issues, Global Poverty, Agriculture, and Trade, Efficiency

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

SECTION IV: EFFICIENCY AND STABILITY ISSUES. 13. Market Power. 14. Unemployment and Inflation. 15. Government Macroeconomic Policy. 16. Taxes, Borrowing, and the National Debt. SECTION V: YOU AND THE WORLD AROUND YOU. 17. Globally Free Markets for the Twenty-First Century? Epilogue You and the World around You.
2011, 480pp, Paperback, 9780538753838, South-Western College

headlines. The authors connect todays issues to key economic principles and applications with captivating insights and a solid international perspective. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW MODULAR CONTENT ALLOWS MAXIMUM FLEXIBILITY: You can now easily customize your course to align with todays most current events or topics of special interest to you and your students with this editions new modular format. Simply present this editions 18 chapters seamlessly in the order that best fits your needs. THE LATEST CONTENT AVAILABLE ON KEY ECONOMIC TOPICS KEEPS YOUR COURSE ON THE CUTTING EDGE: Count on this new edition to keep you and your students up to date with the latest information and developments on important economic topics, including health economics, inefficiency, education, unemployment, the budget deficits, and Social Security. This current, topical resource will enhance classroom discussion and assist with homework and research projects. FEATURES THE LATEST CONTENT ON GLOBALIZATION PREPARES STUDENTS FOR TODAYS GLOBAL ECONOMY: The new edition carefully examines and expands coverage of the outsourcing of service jobs and use of cheap labor in developing countries. This more thorough coverage allows you and your students to intelligently discuss the current nature of todays global economy. FOCUS ON THE BASICS ENSURES THOROUGH UNDERSTANDING OF THE MOST IMPORTANT ECONOMIC CONCEPTS: Supply-demand analysis thoroughly examines economic issues. Frequent use of the concept of opportunity cost conditions students to think of costs as alternatives foregone and to apply the concept to their own decisions. Numerous applications of the aggregate supplyaggregate demand model ensure students closely examine unemployment and inflation. BALANCED COVERAGE ENSURES EQUAL TREATMENT OF MICROECONOMIC AND MACROECONOMIC ISSUES: After discussing economic growth in Chapter 1 and economic systems in Chapter 2, five of the 16 remaining chapters cover macroeconomic issues, including unemployment, inflation, the federal budget, and balance of payment deficits. The book also closely examines the microeconomic aspects
International Edition

ECONOMICS AND CONTEMPORARY ISSUES (WITH ECONOMIC APPLICATIONS AND INFOTRAC 2-SEMESTER PRINTED ACCESS CARD), INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 9E
William McLean, Oklahoma State University; Michael Applegate, Oklahoma State University

ECONOMICS AND CONTEMPORARY ISSUES, 9E, International Edition examines major economic issues related to education, health care, Social Security, unemployment, inflation, and international trade. This edition also examines social and political phenomena throughout the world, such as the collapse of communism and central planning, the role of government in todays economy as well as crime and poverty. Captivating insights, intellectual challenges, and a solid analytical framework strengthen your students critical thinking skills while the books proven approach helps build a strong foundation in core economic principles. The authors clearly connect todays issues to key economic principles and applications, while providing an unmatched international perspective. Students develop a stronger appreciation and interest in contemporary economics as they see its importance in understanding both issues that affect them personally as well as todays news
6

www.cengageasia.com

of agriculture, monopoly power, health care, crime, pollution, education, Social Security, and poverty. CONTENTS 1. Economic Growth: An Introduction to Scarcity and Choice. 2. An Introduction to Economic Systems and the Workings of the Price System. 3. Competitive Markets and Government Policy: Agriculture. 4. Efficiency in Resource Allocation: How Much Do We Have? How Much Do We Want? 5. Market Power: Does It Help or Hurt the Economy? 6. Air Pollution: Balancing Benefits and Costs. 7. Health Care: How Much? For Whom? 8. Crime and Drugs: A Modern Dilemma. 9. College Education: Is It Worth the Cost? 10. Educational Reform: The Role of Incentives and Choice. 11. Poverty: New Approaches to an Old Problem. 12. Tracking and Explaining the Macroeconomy. 13. Unemployment: The Legacy of Recession, Technological Change, and Free Choice. 14. Inflation: A Monetary Phenomenon. 15. Sustained Budget Deficits: Is This Any Way to Run a Government? 16. Social Security: Leading Issues and Approaches to Reform. 17. International Trade: Beneficial, but Controversial. 18. Financing Trade and the Trade Deficit.
2013, 456pp, Paperback, 9781133607526, South-Western College

answers, the book discusses how to conduct economic research in a creative manner and construct ones own theoretical framework and model based on an in-depth analysis of phenomena. The author also emphasizes the importance of economists in China adopting internationally accepted norms in their research and focusing their topics on indigenous problems and reflects critically on the limitations of the existing neoclassical theories for interpreting the development and transition of developing countries. FEATURES Authored by one of the best-known Chinese economists Written in a simple format of questions and answers between the professor and his students Discusses how to conduct economic research in a creative manner and construct ones own model based on an in-depth analysis of phenomena Reflects critically on the limitations of the existing neoclassical theories for interpreting the development and transition of developing countries Authored by one of the best-known Chinese economists CONTENTS 1. Mainstream Principles and Premises. 2. (In) applicability to China. 3. Theoretical Innovations in Economics. Appendix 1. Indigenization, Normalization, and Internationalization: Celebration of the 40th Anniversary of Economic Research. Appendix 2. Economic Research Methodology and the Development of Economics in China. Appendix 3. Viability, Economic Transition, and Reflections on Neoclassical Economics.
2012, 150pp, Hardback, 9789814384216, Cengage Learning Asia

ECONOMIC METHODOLOGY

BENTI AND CHANGWU


DIALOGUES ON METHODOLOGY IN ECONOMICS
Justin Yifu Lin

This book is a collection of Professor Lins dialogues with his postgraduate students during a course on transition economics conducted in 2003 and 2004 at Peking University, and it also includes three journal articles as appendices. Taking the form of questions and
International Edition
www.cengageasia.com

ECONOMIC POLICY

ECONOMIC POLICIES AND SOCIAL WELFARE IN THE 21ST CENTURY


CHALLENGES AND RESPONSES FOR CHINA AND THAILAND
Peter Wilson

along the path of rapid growth and development. Firm theoretical grounding. Each chapter is rooted in a sound methodological framework, reflecting the authors particular areas of expertise and their extensive use of relevant empirical evidence. Multi-disciplinary. Insights are drawn from the whole spectrum of the social sciences to provide a broader historical and institutional approach to social policy. Supporting country case studies. The analysis is country-focused and incorporates case-study material from national and international sources to support the analysis and policy recommendations. Policy-oriented. Economic policies are important for the overall welfare of a population and are reassessed here in the context of the challenges facing China and Thailand as they undergo growth and development in a rapidly globalizing world. CONTENTS Part I Globalization: Challenges and Responses 1. The Development Experiences and Integration of Newly Industrializing Economies: Lessons for China and Thailand 2. The Multinationalization of Firms and the Transfer of Technology 3. The Institutional Dollarization of Asian currencies 4. Extremes in Exchange Rates and Macroeconomic Fundamentals: Some Evidence from Asia-Pacific Countries 5. The Export Competitiveness of the East Asian NIEs: How Real is the China Threat? Part II The Economics of Transition 6. Chinas Tax Revenue, Public Goods, and Economic Transition 7. Chinas Institutional Progress during the Transition 8. The Location Decisions of Foreign Logistic Firms in China: Does Transport Network Capacity Matter? 9. Financial Integration and Chinas Stock Market 10. Chinas Telecommunications Industry: Transformation and Challenges 11. Opening Up the Banking Sector in China: Progress, Barriers, and Further Steps Part III Social Policy 12. The Role of Value Judgments in Public Policy Choice: Some Observations in the Asian Context 13. The Impact of Social Policy on the Thai Economy 14. The Value of Nature in Thailand: Implications for Social Policy 15. Married Womens Labor Supply, Child Rearing, and Public Policy in Thailand 16. The Thai Health System in Transition: The Challenge of Mutual Responsibilities
2009, 344pp, Hardback, 9789814239189, Cengage Learning Asia

In the last three decades, China and Thailand have undergone rapid economic growth and social change. Using theory, institutional analysis, and case studies, Economic Policies and Social Welfare in the 21st Century explores the challenges faced by the two countries during this period, such as how to compete in a world of volatile exchange rates and capital flows, how to open up the banking and communications sectors, environmental issues, and how to deal with social problems, such as health care and child rearing. Their responses through social and economic policies are then examined, including the transfer of technology, and fiscal and public policies. Social science students, teachers, and researchers, in both the government and private sectors, will find this book particularly relevant for understanding the process of growth and development in two of the most successful developing countries in the Asian region. FEATURES Asian perspective. Provides an in-depth look at two of the most dynamic Asian countries from an Asian perspective based on the authors unique experience of living in Asia and researching Asian issues in an Asian context. Topical. Thailand is a giant economy in Southeast Asia, and a success story as far as economic growth and development is concerned, while China has already become the workshop of the world in lowcost manufacturing and is widely expected to continue
8

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

ENVIRONMENTAL/ NATURAL RESOURCES

ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS AND MANAGEMENT, 6E


THEORY, POLICY AND APPLICATIONS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION
Scott J. Callan, Bentley University; Janet M. Thomas, Bentley University

Provide your students with an applied, practical approach to environmental economic theory that is accessible to both students who have minimal exposure to economics, and students with an advanced understanding of economics. With a strong focus on policy and realworld issues, Callan/Thomass ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS AND MANAGEMENT: THEORY, POLICY AND APPLICATIONS, 6E, International Edition does not compromise economic theoretical concepts, but it does complement economic theory with timely, real-world applications. Your undergraduate or MBA students will gain a clear perspective of the relationship between market activity and the environment. The text integrates a strong business perspective into the development of environmental decision making for a vantage point often overlooked in more conventional approaches. The book emphasizes the use of economic analytical tools, such as market models, benefit-cost analysis, and risk analysis, to assess environmental problems and to evaluate policy solutions. With a proven, modular structure, this edition provides a wellorganized presentation with the flexibility to easily tailor the order of presentation and content of the course to your individual teaching needs. NEW TO THIS EDITION Fresh new Applications boxes place more emphasis on international policies: new Applications boxes place additional focus on international or global environmental policies in this edition. Applications
International Edition

highlight recent issues that have affected or continue to influence policy decisions and todays business practices. Updated policies and examples reflect the most current developments: All the policies, data, applications, and examples in this edition highlight the most current information at the time of publication. The latest data ensures tables and figures remain up to date: Numerous tables and figures throughout this edition clarify concepts at a glance with the most current economic and financial information available. Quantitative environmental economics tools help students refine skills: Proven quantitative environmental economics tools throughout this applied practical text, such as benefit-cost analysis and risk analysis, give your students numerous opportunities to develop and hone their professional quantitative and analytical skills. Integrated quantitative problems and models provide valuable practice: A wealth of quantitative problems and models throughout every chapter in this edition provide opportunities to apply the texts concepts. End-of-chapter Review Questions feature at least one problem using algebra or a graphical analysis. Corresponding solutions appear in the Instructors Manual for your convenience. Contemporary boxed Applications demonstrate theory in action in todays business world: Your students see concepts actually applied in real business today as Applications integrated throughout the text highlight how theories are used to confront real present-day challenges. FEATURES

New Topics, New Applications, and Other Updates. As in previous editions, we searched diligently for updates on all the policies, data, applications, and examples used in the book to ensure that instructors and students have access to the most current information. CONTENTS MODULE I: MODELING ENVIRONMENTAL PROBLEMS. 1. The Role of Economics in Environmental Management. 2. Modeling the Market Process: A Review of the Basics. 3. Modeling Market Failure. MODULE II: MODELING SOLUTIONS TO ENVIRONMENTAL PROBLEMS. 4. Conventional Solutions to Environmental Problems:
9

www.cengageasia.com

The Command-and-Control Approach. 5. Economic Solutions to Environmental Problems: The Market Approach. MODULE III: ANALYTICAL TOOLS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING. 6. Environmental Risk Analysis. 7. Assessing Benefits for Environmental Decision Making. 8. Assessing Costs for Environmental Decision Making. 9. Benefit-Cost Analysis in Environmental Decision Making. MODULE IV: THE CASE OF AIR. 10. Defining Air Quality: The StandardSetting Process. 11. Improving Air Quality: Controlling Mobile Sources. 12. Improving Air Quality: Controlling Stationary Sources. 13. Global Air Quality: Policies for Ozone Depletion and Climate Change. MODULE V: THE CASE OF WATER. 14. Defining Water Quality: The Standard-Setting Process. 15. Improving Water Quality: Controlling Point and Nonpoint Sources. 16. Protecting Safe Drinking Water. MODULE VI: THE CASE OF SOLID WASTES AND TOXIC SUBSTANCES. 17. Managing Hazardous Solid Waste and Waste Sites. 18. Managing Municipal Solid Waste. 19. Controlling Pesticides and Toxic Chemicals. MODULE VII: GLOBAL ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT. 20. Sustainable Development: International Environmental Agreements and International Trade. 21. Sustainable Approaches: Industrial Ecology and Pollution Prevention.
2013, 624pp, Paperback, 9781133584728, South-Western College

environmental carrying capacity for future generations will be seriously compromised. Despite the increasing environmental pressure arising from economic growth, it is only through economic growth that the nations of the region can reduce poverty and improve environmental management. Therefore, the challenge is not to limit economic growth but to convert it into an environmentally sustainable form. In other words, the region has to turn away from the conventional Grow First, Clean Up Later paradigm and move towards the green growth paradigm which harmonises economic growth with environmental sustainability. The book aims to develop the new paradigm for environmentally sustainable economic growth or green growth in Asia and the Pacific. Firstly, it discusses the present status of environmental sustainability, especially the issue of eco-efficiency of consumption and production patterns. Secondly, it looks at the challenging issues of environmental sustainability including the problem of sustainable resource-based development, the controversial relationship between economic growth and environmental sustainability and the relationship between environmental regulation and competitiveness. Finally, it looks at how to make markets work for green growth, utilising public policy to stimulate eco-efficiency, the role of economics and regional cooperation to achieve green growth. FEATURES Discussion and illustration of key green growth concepts such as sustainable development, ecological efficiency and resource productivity Inclusion of more than 150 figures and sets of numerical data to complement analysis of conceptual and technical issues Comparative discussion of Asian-Pacific countries with European ones where appropriate Global perspectives from academics, environmental economists and researchers based in the United States, United Kingdom, France, Korea, Japan, Singapore and New Zealand CONTENTS Part I State of Environmental Sustainability in Asia and the Pacific 1. Prospects for environmental sustainability in Asia and the Pacific 2. Eco-efficiency and resource productivity: Concepts, indicators and trends in AsiaPacific Part II Challenging Issues of Environmental Sustainability in Asia and the Pacific 3. Sustainable resource-based development in Asia and the Pacific: Overcoming the problem of dualism within dualism
International Edition

PURSUING GREEN GROWTH IN ASIA AND THE PACIFIC


Rae Kwon Chung; Euston Quah, Nanyang Technological University

The Asia-Pacific region is experiencing the fastest economic growth among the regions of the world. Yet, economic growth in its current form is placing enormous pressure on the environmental carrying capacity of the region. Unless this is properly checked, the

10

www.cengageasia.com

4. On the relationship between economic growth and environmental sustainability 5. Pursuing green growth: Some conflicts and necessary conditions for a pragmatic environmental policy 6. Environmental regulation and its effects on competitiveness: The case of Korean industries 7. The value of nature in economic growth: A case-study of Australia Part III New Paradigm for Green Growth in Asia and the Pacific 8. Concept and system change in the Asian and Pacific region 9. Making markets work for sustainable development: The OECD approach 10. Stimulating eco-efficiency in Asia and the Pacific: The role of public policy 11. Green growth through green accounting and policy reform 12. Achieving green growth: The role of economics 13. Beyond green growth: Sustainable development in East Asia
2010, 318pp, Hardback, 9789814253925, Cengage Learning Asia

been expanded to include a review of basic statistics that will allow students to start the course at a level of similar quantitative understanding. FEATURES Modern Coverage: Although the book uses only elementary mathematics, it conveys a strong feel for the important advances made since the work of Box and Jenkins more than thirty years ago. Selective Coverage: The book des not attempt to be exhaustive in coverage. Instead, the coverage is intentionally selective, focusing on the core techniques with the widest applicability. Applications-Oriented: This book is extremely applications-oriented with detailed, real-world examples. Many of the applications have been chosen from a variety of fields (including economics, public policy, and engineering) to illustrate all methods. Graphics and Forecasting Chapters: This text offers full chapters on Statistical Graphics (chapter 3) and Evaluating and Combining Forecasts (chapter 12). Standard and Modern Topics: This text offers a nice blend of traditional and modern topics. You will find the traditional topics (trend, seasonality, and cycles) as well as more modern topics such as model selection, volatility models, unit roots and stochastic trends, vector autoregressions, and cointegration covered. Modern Modeling Software: This text is in touch with modern modeling and forecasting software. Many of the data and Eviews programs used in the text are included on downloadable Excel templates available at the text Web site. CONTENTS 1. Introduction to Forecasting: Applications, Methods, Books, Journals, and Software. Appendix: The Linear Regression Model. 2. Six Considerations Basic to Successful Forecasting. 3. Statistical Graphics for Forecasting. 4. Modeling and Forecasting Trend. 5. Modeling and Forecasting Seasonality. 6. Characterizing Cycles. 7. Modeling Cycles: MA, AR, and ARMA Models. 8. Forecasting Cycles. 9. Putting it All Together: A Forecasting Model with Trend, Seasonal, and Cyclical Components. 10. Forecasting with Regression Models. 11. Evaluating and Combining Forecasts. 12. Unit Roots, Stochastic Trends, ARIMA Forecasting Models, and Smoothing. 13. Volatility Measurement, Modeling and Forecasting.
2007, 458pp, Casebound, 9780324323597, South-Western College

FORECASTING

ELEMENTS OF FORECASTING, 4E
Francis Diebold, University of Pennsylvania

ELEMENTARY FORECASTING focuses on the core techniques of widest applicability. The author illustrates all methods with detailed real-world applications, many of them international in flavor, designed to mimic typical forecasting situations. NEW TO THIS EDITION Expanded Cointegration Coverage: At the suggestion of reviewers, new material on the topic of cointegration has been added to the fourth edition. New Short Exercises: Short, drill-type exercises that follow the examples and concepts presented in the text have been added to the end of each chapter. Statistical Review: The appendix to Chapter 2 has
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

11

PRINCIPLES OF BUSINESS FORECASTING, INTERNATIONAL EDITION


Keith Ord, Georgetown University; Robert Fildes, Lancaster University

3-6), Statistical model building (Chapters 79), and Advanced methods and forecasting practice (Chapters 10 13). The authors illustrate forecasting techniques in a variety of software environments including Excel, Minitab, and SSPS so that users can apply the methodology that best fits their available resources. Discussion Questions are placed throughout each chapter for students to think beyond technical issues. End-of-chapter Principles reinforce a consistent foundation of good forecasting practices End-of-chapter Exercises help students consider the role of the practicing forecaster. Students and instructors can conveniently access the text data sets on their companion sites. CONTENTS

Ord/Fildes PRINCIPLES OF BUSINESS FORECASTING, 1E, International Edition is designed for both students and current practitioners in a variety of fields. The authors motivation for writing this book is to give users the tools and insight to make the most effective forecasts. Ord/Fildes PRINCIPLES OF BUSINESS FORECASTING, 1E, International Edition is designed for users who have taken a first course in applied statistics or have an equivalent background and provides an introduction to both standard and advanced forecasting approaches. This new, first edition text presents general principles that are the basis of forecasting practice. The information and data used are from actual government and business sources wherever possible. Forecasting techniques are shown in a variety of software platforms and the chapter organization provides an overview of forecasting in a variety of situations using time series and cross-sectional data. The focus then shifts to using extrapolative methods in forecasting, followed by statistical model-building. Finally, the authors cover more advanced techniques in the latter chapters, including the selection of the best forecasting method based on available data and the construction of a forecasting system with an organization. FEATURES An emphasis on incorporating the latest research in forecasting methodology helps students prepare for a managerial or analytic career and to help current practitioners make more effective forecasts. The authors base their approach to forecasting on a series of stages: Purpose, Horizon, Information, Value, and Evaluation. The chapter organization is flexible and designed for students or current practitioners: Introduction (chapters 1-2), Extrapolative methods (Chapters
12

1. Forecasting, the Why and How. 2. Basic Tools for Forecasting. 3. Forecasting Trends: Exponential Smoothing. 4. Seasonal Series: Forecasting and Decomposition. 5. State-Space Models for Time Series. 6. Autoregressive Integrated Moving Average (ARIMA) Models. 7. Simple Linear Regression for Forecasting. 8. Multiple Regression for Time Series. 9. Model Building. 10. Advanced Methods of Forecasting. 11. JudgmentBased Forecasts. 12. Putting Forecasting Methods to Work. 13. Forecasting in Practice.
2013, 528pp, Paperback, 9781133584407, South-Western College

HEALTH ECONOMICS

HEALTH ECONOMICS, 6E
THEORY, INSIGHTS AND INDUSTRY STUDIES, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH ECONOMIC APPLICATIONS AND INFOTRAC 2-SEMESTER PRINTED ACCESS CARD)
Dr. Rexford E. Santerre, University of Connecticut; Dr. Stephen P. Neun, Anna Maria College

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

Equip your students with a solid understanding of the costs and benefits associated with todays health care choices using the current, comprehensive coverage found only in Santerre/Neuns HEALTH ECONOMICS: THEORY, INSIGHTS, AND INDUSTRY STUDIES, 6E, International Edition. Students develop a practical, powerful knowledge of todays health care systems as the text builds upon only the core foundation of economic theory, making this an ideal choice for students with either extensive or limited economic background. This new edition reflects the latest updates and contemporary developments in insurance and health care reform, including a thorough update of the Nyman Theory. A new appendix covers the Grossman Model. NEW TO THIS EDITION THE LATEST UPDATES AND COVERAGE REFLECT TODAYS MOST CURRENT DEVELOPMENTS IN THE FIELD. New and expanded coverage of key topics, trends and advancements, including the most recent insurance and health care reforms, ensure this revision and your course remain as accurate and current as possible. NEW APPENDIX DETAILS THE GROSSMAN MODEL. Now you have the choice of thoroughly introducing your students to this critical model of that has formed the framework for so much of todays economic study and research related to health behavior with this editions new Appendix on the Grossman Model. ALL-NEW TEST BANK OFFERS VARIET Y OF QUESTIONS TO SAVE YOU TIME WHILE ENSURING STUDENT COMPREHENSION. Now you can save time in preparation while testing your students comprehension of the text material with this editions new Test Bank. Your selection of more than 300 new questions, including multiple-choice and true/false, allow you to easily create tests that are perfect for your course. NEW COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW MATERIALS OFFER MORE OPPORTUNITIES FOR HANDS-ON PRACTICE. This editions new review questions and problems give your students more opportunities to prepare for exams as well as more practical experience in applying chapter concepts to real-world issues.

FEATURES BASIC ECONOMICS FORM THE FOUNDATION FOR STUDYING TODAYS EVER-CHANGING FIELD OF HEALTH CARE. The authors very carefully use only the core foundations of economics as they thoroughly examine todays health care industry. EXTENSIVE COVERAGE INTRODUCES VARIETY OF INDUSTRY PERSPECTIVES. Packed with practical applications, this dynamic, hands-on text exposes students to institutional arrangement, operation, and performance of a large number of health care markets, including long-term care. EMPHASIS ON COST-BENEFIT ANALYSIS HELPS STUDENTS BET TER UNDERSTAND HEALTH ECONOMICS. Throughout the text, the authors continue to stress the importance of cost-benefit analysis while demonstrate how this basic microprinciple is critical to understanding health economics. COVERAGE OF REGRESSION ANALYSIS WITHIN AN EARLY APPENDIX OFFERS YOU FLEXIBILITY IN DEPTH OF STUDY. An appendix on regression analysis at the end of Chapter 1 gives you the option of introducing a more in-depth treatment of this important topic. CONTENTS 1. Introduction. 2. Health and Medical Care: An Economic Perspective. 3. Cost and Benefit Analysis. 4. Health Care Systems and Institutions. 5. The Demand for Medical Care. 6. The Demand for Medical Insurance: Traditional and Managed Care Coverage. 7. Medical Care Production and Costs. 8. Structure, Conduct, Performance, and Market Analysis. 9. Government, Health, and Medical Care. 10. Government as Health Insurer. 11. The Private Health Insurance Industry. 12. The Physician Services Industry. 13. The Hospital Services Industry. 14. The Pharmaceutical Industry. 15. The Long-Term Care Industry. 16. Health Insurance Reform.
2013, 576pp, Paperback, 9781133584360, South-Western College

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

13

cost and outcomes data, which encourages more thoughtful analysis of the topics. FEATURES Perspective-Enhancing Issues: Special features called Issues in Medical Care Delivery appear in every chapter, and summarize critical studies in medical research, epidemiology, public health, and other fields to help students see the far-reaching impact of health care economics. Key Contributors in Health Care: These fascinating profiles of real-life individuals show students how doctors, economists, and other stakeholders can have a profound impact on health care economics and policy. Stimulating Global Comparisons: Compare and contrast the U.S. and its lifestyle, cultural, and economic characteristics to those of six other developed countries to help students challenge their assumptions about health care. Clearly Defined Core Focus: Ten key concepts introduced in the first chapter set a unifying theme for the text, while icons in the margins throughout the text remind students how each subject relates to one of the key concepts. CONTENTS Part I: THE RELEVANCE OF ECONOMICS IN HEALTH AND MEDICAL CARE. 1. U.S. Medical Care: Crisis or Conundrum. 2. Using Economics to Study Health Issues. 3. Analyzing Medical Care Markets. 4. Economic Evaluation in Health Care. Part II: DEMAND-SIDE CONSIDERATIONS. 5. Demand for Health and Medical Care. 6. The Market for Health Insurance. Part III: SUPPLY-SIDE CONSIDERATIONS. 7. Managed Care. 8. The Physicians Services Market. 9. The Hospital Services Market. 10. The Market for Pharmaceuticals. 11. Confounding Factors. Part IV: PUBLIC POLICY IN MEDICAL CARE DELIVERY. 12. Policies that Enhance Access. 13. Policies to Contain Costs. 14. Medical Care Systems Worldwide. 15. Medical Care Reform in the United States. 16. Lessons for Public Policy.
2012, 512pp, Paperback, 9781111823719, South-Western College

HEALTH ECONOMICS AND POLICY, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 5E


James W. Henderson, Baylor University

The 5th Edition of HEALTH ECONOMICS AND POLICY (WITH ECONOMIC APPLICATIONS), International Edition thoroughly demonstrates how microeconomic principles apply to health care delivery and its policies. The text explores the changing nature of health care, as well as the social and political sides of issues, and teaches students to analyze public policy from an economic perspective. Written for non-economics majors, HEALTH ECONOMICS AND POLICY (WITH ECONOMIC APPLICATIONS), 5e, International Edition delivers significant economic content and is also appropriate for economics majors. NEW TO THIS EDITION Expanded Pharmaceuticals Coverage: An all-new chapter discusses the pharmaceuticals market, including a new section on obesity, which addresses this growing problem and its medical consequences. NEW Confounding Issues: This completely revised chapter addresses socio-cultural considerations, the aging population, the U.S. legal system, and technology in medicine, and compares these issues to those of other developed countries. Market-driven Health Care: A new section on the Swiss health care system shows students how reform of another countrys health care system affects the marketplace. Modern Health Care Alternatives: New sections on consumer-directed health plans and the new Massachusetts health care plan highlight the discussion on market alternatives and ignite classroom debate on this hot current topic. Updated Graphics and Data: Charts and tables throughout the text reflect the latest in health care
14

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT

a section on Amartya Sen and his contributions to social choice theory and the economics of inequality. New Past as Prologues: These sections have been updated to reflect developments and/or recognition in the field since the last edition. They include: Franklin and Bastiat on Opportunity Cost (Chapter 13), Rational Economic Behavior and Prospect Theory (Ch. 15), Advances in Econometrics (Ch. 18), The MundellFleming Contribution to IS-LM (Ch. 22), and Human Capital Formation? Or Signaling and Screening? (Ch. 24). FEATURES Five Major Questions: Each important school of economic thought is introduced with Five Major Questions that when answered provide a concise summary of each school. This presentation of economic thought helps students retain the information. The book maintains a strong treatment of economic theory while offering a liberal arts approach to expanding students historical understanding. Past as Prologue: Pedagogical elements like Past as Prologue boxes involve original ideas and their impact on subsequent economics theory, issues or events and offer students thought-provoking interpretations of their own knowledge. Study Questions: Found at the end of each chapter, these questions review the chapter content, entice students to stretch their understanding, and interconnect past, present, and upcoming material. CONTENTS 1. Economic Growth: An Introduction to Scarcity and Choice. 2. An Introduction to Economic Systems and the Workings of the Price System. 3. Competitive Markets and Government Policy: Agriculture. 4. Efficiency in Resource Allocation: How Much Do We Have? How Much Do We Want? 5. Market Power: Does It Help or Hurt the Economy? 6. Air Pollution: Balancing Benefits and Costs. 7. Health Care: How Much? For Whom? 8. Crime and Drugs: A Modern Dilemma. 9. College Education: Is It Worth the Cost? 10. Educational Reform: The Role of Incentives and Choice. 11. Poverty: New Approaches to an Old Problem. 12. Tracking and Explaining the Macroeconomy. 13. Unemployment: The Legacy of Recession, Technological Change, and Free Choice. 14. Inflation: A Monetary Phenomenon. 15. Sustained Budget Deficits: Is This Any Way to Run
15

EVOLUTION OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 8E


Randy Grant, Linfield College; Stanley Brue ,Pacific Lutheran University

In this scholarly and timely presentation of the history of economic thought, youll see how new ideas, evidence, problems and values can be used to reconsider basic disputes and major contributions of the past. THE EVOLUTION OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT, 8E, International Edition covers the history of economics, the philosophies that drive the economic way of thinking, the ideas of the great economic thinkers and their logical connections to the world. Youll see how Robert Solows pioneering model can be used to discuss recent renewed emphasis on growth theory and technological change and will explore antitrust perspectives and game theory. NEW TO THIS EDITION New Featured Economist: Chapter 20 now includes a section on Amartya Sen and his contributions to social choice theory and the economics of inequality. New Past as Prologues: These sections have been updated to reflect developments and/or recognition in the field since the last edition. They include: Franklin and Bastiat on Opportunity Cost (Chapter 13), Rational Economic Behavior and Prospect Theory (Ch. 15), Advances in Econometrics (Ch. 18), The MundellFleming Contribution to IS-LM (Ch. 22), and Human Capital Formation? Or Signaling and Screening? (Ch. 24). Product Web Site: A dedicated web site has been created for the 8th edition. Instructors will find bonus chapters on economic thought before 1500, new economic contributors, and links to other history of economic thought web sites. New Featured Economist: Chapter 20 now includes

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

a Government? 16. Social Security: Leading Issues and Approaches to Reform. 17. International Trade: Beneficial, but Controversial. 18. Financing Trade and the Trade Deficit.
2013, 560pp, Paperback, 9781133434900, South-Western College

and often mind-blowing statistics. Tracing the changes with such data as income per capita, average life span, time and money use, and even sports statistics, Walton and Rockoff create an exciting and motivational chapter that ties our past to the current age. PERSPECTIVES SET THE STAGE: A list of historical and economic perspectives precedes the beginning of every section to summarize and set the stage for that era. These Perspective boxes give particular focus to Americas minority voices and their role in the economic narrative. ECONOMIC INSIGHT: Economic Insight boxes use explicit economic analysis to show how economic forces are at work on the issues raised in each chapter. NEW VIEWS: New Views boxes connect historical experience with present-day economic issues. CONTENTS 1. Growth, Welfare, and the American Economy. PART I: THE COLONIAL ERA: 1607-1776. 2. Founding the Colonies. 3. Colonial Economic Activities. 4. The Economic Relations of the Colonies. 5. Economic Progress and Wealth. 6. Three Crises and Revolt. PART II: THE REVOLUTIONARY, EARLY NATIONAL, AND ANTEBELLUM ERAS: 1776-1860. 7. Hard Realities for a New Nation. 8. Land and the Early Western Movements. 9. Transportation and Market Growth. 10. Market Expansion and Industry in First Transition. 11. Labor During the Early Industrial Period. 12. Money and Banking in the Developing Economy. 13. The Entrenchment of Slavery and Regional Conflict. PART III: THE REUNIFICATION ERA: 1860-1920. 14. War, Recovery, and Regional Divergence. 15. Agricultures Western Advance. 16. Railroads and Economic Change. 17. Industrial Expansion and Concentration. 18. The Emergence of Americas Labor Consciousness. 19. Money, Prices and Finance in the Postbellum Era. 20. Commerce at Home and Abroad. PART IV: WAR, DEPRESSION, AND WAR AGAIN: 1914-1946. 21. World War I, 1914-1918. 22. The Roaring Twenties. 23. The Great Depression. 24. The New Deal. 25. World War II. PART V: THE POSTWAR ERA: 1946 TO THE PRESENT. 26. The Changing Role of the U.S. Government. 27. Growth and the Business Cycle after World War II. 28. Manufacturing, Productivity, and Labor. 29. Achievements of the Past, Challenges for the Future.
2014, 624pp, Paperback, 9781133585114, South-Western College

HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN ECONOMY, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 12E


Gary M. Walton, Foundation for Teaching Economics and University of California, Davis; Hugh Rockoff, Rutgers University

Tying Americas past to the economic policies of today and beyond, HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN ECONOMY, 12E, International Edition presents events chronologically for easy understanding. Get a firm foundation in the evolution of the American economy with this ever-popular classic. Few text packages have the staying power of HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN ECONOMY, 12E, International Edition the text that has helped generations of students understand how the American economy evolved. Completely updated, this classic text ties our past to the policies and debates of today and beyond. A variety of visual aids and provocative statistics encourage interest in the study of economic history. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW UPDATES: HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN ECONOMY, 12E, International Edition has been thoroughly updated, with content that addresses the 1980s, 1990s and the 21st century. FEATURES ILLUSTRATES HOW THE ECONOMY HAS CHANGED: Chapter 1 illustrates just how much America and its economy have changed over time, with provocative

16

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

INTERMEDIATE MACROECONOMICS

INTERMEDIATE MACRO (WITH PRODUCT WEB SITE PRINTED ACCESS CARD AND REVIEW CARDS)
Robert J. Barro, Harvard University

MACRO delivers a unified model of macroeconomics ideal for both economics majors and general business majors. The distinctive, magazine-style pages of Barros MACRO were inspired by feedback from students and refined by input from more than seventy of your teaching peers, who helped shape teaching solutions that would work best in todays classroom. The result is a brief paperback packed with current policy and data examples that reflect the authors extensive research in the field, as well as a suite of learning aids to accommodate the busy, diverse lifestyles of todays learners. Outstanding online resources, including downloadable flash cards, videos, and interactive graphing practice, are closely integrated with the book. Students can also access the Cengage Global Economic Watch, which connects readers to thousands of journal and news articles and videos using a simple search engine. FEATURES Back to Reality features exemplify macro theory at work in policy and history: Now you can make theory memorable and meaningful for your students as Back to Reality features present theory at work in the real world using historical and policy examples. Chapter 2, for instance, discusses controversy with the consumer price index and its ramifications (with entitlement programs, such as Social Security tied to CPI). Chapter 5 presents the author meeting U2s Bono and the rock stars perspective on debt relief and foreign aid. Extending the Model builds on chapter concepts:
International Edition

This effective learning feature helps to clarify and build on concepts presented in the chapter. For instance, Extending the Model shows how supply and demand curves are functions (Chapter 2) and explores endogenous population growth (Chapter 4). Do the Math helps ensure students grasp algebra steps: Now you can ensure your students understand the algebra behind the models as this helpful feature leads readers through the algebra required in careful, manageable steps. For example, when Chapter 4 explores working with the Solow Growth Model, numerous Do the Math boxes help students grasp concepts and work through the model as the theory is explained. By the Numbers clearly demonstrates how macroeconomists use empirical data: Show students the value and importance of empirical data as they clearly see how it is used in business by macroeconomists. For example, one By the Numbers box shows an overview of Gross State Products for the United States and examines how each state contributes to GDP (Chapter 2). Another box studies empirical evidence for the response of consumption to anticipated income changes (Chapter 7). CONTENTS Pa r t I : I N T RO D U C T I O N . 1 . T h i n k i n g a b o u t Macroeconomics. 2. National-Income Accounting: Gross Domestic Product and the Price Level. Part II: ECONOMIC GROWTH. 3. Introduction to Economic Growth. 4. Working with the Solow Model. 5. Conditional Convergence; Long-Run Economic Growth. Part III: ECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS. 6. Markets, Prices, Supply and Demand. 7. Consumption, Saving, and Investment. 8. An Equilibrium Business-Cycle Model. 9. Capital Utilization and Unemployment. Part IV: MONEY AND PRICES. 10. The Demand for Money and the Price Level. 11. Inflation, Money Growth, and Interest Rates. Part V: THE GOVERNMENT SECTOR. 12. Government Expenditure. 13. Taxes. 14. The Public Debt. Part VI: MONEY AND BUSINESS CYCLES. 15. Money and Business Cycles I: The Price-Misperceptions Model. 16. Money and Business Cycles II: Sticky Prices and Nominal Wage Rates. Part VII: INTERNATIONAL MACROECONOMICS (Online Chapter). 17. World Markets in Goods and Credit (Online Chapter). 18. Exchange Rates (Online Chapter).
2010, 336pp, Paperback, 9781439040096, South-Western College

www.cengageasia.com

17

MACROECONOMICS
A MODERN APPROACH, INTERNATIONAL EDITION
Robert J. Barro, Harvard University

Offering a uniquely modern presentation of macroeconomics, this brand-new text makes it easy for instructors to emphasize a solid microfoundations, real-business cycle approach. In the all-new MACROECONOMICS: A MODERN APPROACH, leading economist and proven author Robert J. Barro couples his extraordinary command of growth, equilibrium, and business cycles with a focus on microfoundations to create a groundbreaking new macroeconomics textbook steeped in real-world application. Accessibly written and extremely student friendly, the book is packed with current policy and data examples, reflecting the authors extensive research in the field. The book also includes captivating boxed features, challenging exercises, and innovative online resources like CengageNOW, which enables students to create personalized learning paths and equips instructors with tools to easily assign, grade, and record homework and quizzes. Covering growth theory more completely than any other text, MACROECONOMICS delivers a unified model of macroeconomics that serves well for economics majors and nonmajors alike. FEATURES Cutting-Edge Approach: By emphasizing growth and microfoundations -- rather than policy solutions for stabilizing the economy -- this text equips students with a uniquely modern presentation of real-world economics. MACROECONOMICS: A MODERN APPROACH begins with an introduction to macroeconomics and growth theory before advancing to the essential microfoundations, business cycles and fluctuations, prices and the difference between real and nominal variables, and ultimately the government
18

sector, taxes, and international macroeconomics. Research Based: Robert J. Barro is a leading researcher noted for his strengths in growth theory, microfoundations, and a concise yet elegant presentation of data. In this first edition, Barro presents growth theory more completely than any other textbook on the market -- delivering the detailed, empirically backed coverage of growth theory that is lacking in other macro texts. Reflecting Barros research, the book gives readers the most current coverage available. Student Friendly: Because the jumble of models and differing theories of macroeconomics presented in other texts often confuse students, Barro builds the model from solid microfoundations with a clear, thorough exposition of growth theory. This gives students access to a cohesive, clearly explained model of macroeconomics, which helps them understand how macro models serve to explain and predict movements in real economies. Barro builds on microfoundations explicitly so that students see how what theyve already learned about economics is built upon in macroeconomic models of the economy. Comprehensive Coverage: With MACROECONOMICS, instructors who prefer to cover growth with solid attention to theory, thorough coverage, and realworld and historical examples no longer have to supplement their text. Likewise, those who emphasize microfoundations will find complete coverage in this book. Rather than detailing each of the various models -- IS/LM, AD/AS, growth, real business cycles -- Barro formulates a unified model of macroeconomics that serves as an excellent building block for those who go on to major in economics as well as students who pursue other fields of study. Real-World Emphasis: Three exciting boxed features support the books modern, accessible approach to macro theory. Do the Math boxes ensure students fully grasp the algebra used. By the Numbers illustrates empirical data and how it is used in realworld practice by actual macroeconomists. Back to Reality features spotlight theory in action through intriguing historical and policy examples. CONTENTS Pa r t I . I N T RO D U C T I O N . 1 . T h i n k i n g a b o u t Macroeconomics. 2. National-Income Accounting: Gross Domestic Product and the Price Level. Part II.
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

ECONOMIC GROWTH. 3. Introduction to Economic Growth. 4. Working with the Solow Growth Model. 5. Conditional Convergence and Long-Run Economic Growth. Part III. ECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS. 6. Markets, Prices, Supply, and Demand. 7. Consumption, Saving, and Investment. 8. An Equilibrium BusinessCycle Model. 9. Capital Utilization and Unemployment. Part IV. MONEY AND PRICES. 10. The Demand for Money and the Price Level. 11. Inflation, Money Growth, and Interest Rates. Part V. THE GOVERNMENT SECTOR. 12. Government Expenditure. 13. Taxes. 14. The Public Debt. Part VI. MONEY AND BUSINESS CYCLES. 15. Money and Business Cycles I: the Price-Misperceptions Model. 16. Money and Business Cycles II: Sticky Prices and Nominal Wage Rates. Part VII. INTERNATIONAL MACROECONOMICS. 17. World Markets in Goods and Credit. 18. Exchange Rates.
2008, 512pp, Paperback, 9780324545678, South-Western College

study of microeconomics. It provides clear and accurate coverage of advanced microeconomic concepts and illustrates how the theory applies to practical situations. In addition, the texts aggressive effort helps build student intuition by including a new two-tier endof-chapter problem that begins with simple numerical/ mathematical exercises followed by more analytical, theoretical, and complex problems. NEW TO THIS EDITION Significant revision of the Uncertainty chapter, including an extensive new section on Methods for Reducing Uncertainty and Risk (including the flexibility of options). (Ch. 7). Extensive streamlining of the Game Theory chapter, providing a clearer focus on core topics. (Ch. 8). New section on the Relationship between profit maximization and cost minimization in Cost Functions. (Ch. 10). Expanded chapter on the general equilibrium models that introduce some elementary vector notation. (Ch. 13). Expanded chapter on the Labor Market, including a new Extension on labor supply. (Ch. 16). Behavioral economics is now covered throughout the book, and highlighted in end-of-chapter problems as relevant. FEATURES Student-friendly presentation combining expected calculus derivations used in advanced microeconomics with insightful graphical presentations. Visual learners are shown the connections between the calculus and the algebra/geometry of the same material. End-of-chapter Extensions present empirical studies of the topics as well as references to recent and classic related articles. The extensions illustrate how economic theory can be used to predict human behavior. CONTENTS Part I: INTRODUCTION. 1. Economic Models. 2. Mathematics for Microeconomics. Part II: CHOICE AND DEMAND. 3. Preferences and Utility. 4. Utility Maximization and Choice. 5. Income and Substitution Effects. 6. Demand Relationships among Goods. Part III: UNCERTAINTY AND STRATEGY. 7. Uncertainty. 8.
19

INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS

MICROECONOMIC THEORY, 11E


BASIC PRINCIPLES AND EXTENSIONS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH INFOAPPS)
Christopher Snyder, Dartmouth College; Walter Nicholson, Amherst College

This proven market leader is now even better. MICROECONOMIC THEORY: BASIC PRINCIPLES AND EXTENSIONS, International Edition delivers the most cutting-edge treatment of microeconomics in its new 11th edition. The text offers an ideal level of mathematical rigor for upper level undergraduate students and beginning graduate students. Students work directly with theoretical tools, real-world applications, and cutting edge developments in the
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

Game Theory. Part IV: PRODUCTION AND SUPPLY. 9. Production Functions. 10. Cost Functions. 11. Profit Maximization. Part V: COMPETITIVE MARKETS. 12. The Partial Equilibrium Competitive Model. 13. General Equilibrium and Welfare. Part VI: MARKET POWER. 14. Monopoly. 15. Imperfect Competition. Part VII: PRICING IN INPUT MARKETS. 16. Labor Markets. 17. Capital and Time. Part VIII: MARKET FAILURE. 18. Asymmetric Information. 19. Externalities and Public Goods.
2012, 768pp, Paperback, 9781111525514, South-Western College

NEW TO THIS EDITION LiveGraphs: Have you ever sliced an onion in class to demonstrate the three-dimensional nature of a utility function? Nechybas LiveGraphs put graphical analyses online, where students can play and replay animated figures with audio captions. Students can watch lines get plotted, see curves move, and in some cases, change variables to affect results. Everyday Applications: Rather than confining applications to static boxed features, Nechyba incorporates applications into end-of-chapter exercises. By working through exercises that exemplify key applications, students learn by doing and can apply their knowledge beyond the text. Business Applications: How does pricing of one product affect demand for another produced by the same business? How might a firm most efficiently use cap-and-trade pollution vouchers? What is the impact of a capital-gains-tax-induced increase in the rental price of capital on firms within an industry? By working through exercises in each chapter, students answer these and other questions, questions that business professionals must also answer. Policy Applications: How do private school vouchers affect tuition levels? How effective are anti-price gauging laws during times of supply disruption? How do governments consider policies for subsidizing saving vs. taxing borrowing? Each chapter includes relevant policy applications such as these in the exercises. Linked Graphical and Mathematical Analysis: By first exploring an intuitive and graphical approach to the topics, then linking the concepts with mathematical analyses, students build both mathematical skills and abstract thinking. The result is a better understanding of microeconomics foundations, and better preparation for further coursework in economics, business, or policy studies. CONTENTS 1. Introduction. Part I: CONSUMERS, WORKERS AND SAVERS/BORROWERS. 2. Choice Sets and Budget Constraints. 3. Choice Sets in Labor and Financial Markets. 4. Tastes and Indifference Curves. 5. Different Types of Tastes. 6. Doing the Best We Can. 7. Income and Substitution Effects in Consumer Goods Markets. 8. Wealth and Substitution Effects in Labor and Financial Markets. 9. Demand for Goods and Supply
International Edition

MICROECONOMICS WITH CALCULUS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH LIVEGRAPHS PRINTED ACCESS CARD)
Thomas Nechyba

Presenting microeconomic theory as a way of looking at the world, MICROECONOMICS: AN INTUITIVE APPROACH WITH CALCULUS, International Edition builds on the basic economic foundation of individual behavior. Each chapter is divided into two sections. The A sections introduce concepts using intuition, a conversational writing style, everyday examples, and graphs. The B sections cover the same concepts with precise, accessible mathematical analyses that pre-suppose one semester of single-variable calculus. The package offers unprecedented flexibility in terms of topical coverage and graphical analysis: each copy includes access to online LiveGraphs a suite of interactive, animated graphs that allows students to view dimensional graphs and functions illustrated in the book, as well as some additional graphs that are not in the printed text. Students can play and replay the LiveGraphs while listening to a brief explanation of the graphs.
20

www.cengageasia.com

of Labor and Capital. 10. Consumer Surplus and Dead Weight Loss. Part II: PRODUCERS (OR FIRMS). 11. Single Input Production. 12. Production with Multiple Inputs. 13. Production Decisions in the Short and Long Run. Part III: PRICES, MARKETS, AND THE FUNDAMENTAL WELFARE THEOREMS. 14. Competitive Market Equilibrium. 15. The Invisible Hand and Market Equilibrium. 16. General Equilibrium. 17. Risk and Uncertainty. Part IV: DISTORTIONS OF THE INVISIBLE HAND IN COMPETITIVE MARKETS. 18. Elasticities, Price Distorting Policies and Non-Price Rationing. 19. Taxes and Subsidies. 20. Interference with Trading Across Time and Space. 21. Production and Consumption Externalities. 22. Asymmetric Information (Insurance Markets, Discrimination). Part V: DISTORTIONS OF THE INVISIBLE HAND FROM NON-COMPETITIVE MARKETS. 23. An Introduction to Game Theory. 24. Market Power: Monopoly and Monopsony. 25. Innovation and Monopolistic Competition. 26. Oligopoly. 27. Public Goods. Part VI: MAKING THE WORLD A BETTER PLACE. 28. Governments and Politics. 29. What is Good? 30. Balancing Government, Civil Society and Markets.
2011, 1232pp, Paperback, 9780538750820, South-Western College

is built on an experimental economics framework that emphasizes game theory, strategic analysis, and organization of the firm. Each chapter and section builds on a unifying theme of how economic institutions develop to solve problems that arise in a society. Concepts are presented within the context of a society that starts out in a primitive state of nature and gradually develops the characteristics and institutions of a modern economy. NEW TO THIS EDITION Experimental Exercises: Throughout the text, the author presents the results of experiments that relate to the issues being discussed. They may form the basis for a consulting report, be cited as part of the critical analysis of a theory, or serve as subject to criticism so students can view conclusions drawn from empirical data with a critical eye, just as they do with theoretical ideas. Unifying Themes: MICROECONOMICS: A MODERN APPROACH, International Edition tells one continuing story that ties all of the chapters together. Rather than treating microeconomics as a series of unrelated topics, the textbook presents chapter concepts within the context of a society that starts out in a primitive state of nature and gradually develops the characteristics and institutions of a modern society. Unique Organization: The text introduces monopoly and oligopoly and then shows that perfect competition can be seen as their limiting cases. This approach fits well within the texts model because when production was first discovered in primitive societies, the earliest markets were likely monopolistic and oligopolistic rather than perfectly competitive. Critical Thinking: To help students see economics as a dynamic science, a considerable amount of space is devoted to criticizing theories. In some chapters, this is done through consulting reports, which suggest possible solutions to problems that the model society faces, such as how to regulate monopolies. FEATURES Game Theory & Strategic Analysis: One of the major analytical tools used in the book is game theory. Chapter 11 introduces the fundamentals of game theory, illustrating how it can serve as a tool for strategic business analysis. Throughout the remaining chapters, game theory is used as a means of
21

MICROECONOMICS
A MODERN APPROACH, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH INFOAPPS PRINTED ACCESS CARD)
Andrew Schotter, New York University

Professor Schotter believes the future of microeconomics will be heavily connected with the use of experimental tools. And with the exciting new MICROECONOMICS: A MODERN APPROACH, International Edition your students will be well prepared. Applying intermediate economics to everyday life, this innovative first edition

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

understanding the different strategies of the various parties to a situation. Nontraditional Chapters: Cutting-edge coverage includes several chapters not found in other texts, including the internal organization of the firm (Chapter 13), entry prevention (Chapter 20), and natural monopoly and the economics of regulation (Chapter 18). If these chapters do not fit the objectives of your course, you can skip them without hampering students understanding in future chapters. CONTENTS Section 1: INTRODUCTION. 1. Economics and Institutions: A Shift of Emphasis. Section 2: PREFERENCES, UTILITIES, DEMAND, AND UNCERTAINTY. 2. Consumers and Their Preferences. 3. Utilities--Indifference Curves. 4. Demand and Behavior in Markets. 5. Some Applications of Consumer, Demand, and Welfare Analysis. 6. Uncertainty and the Emergence of Insurance. 7. Uncertainty-Applications and Criticisms. Section 3: PRODUCTION AND COST. 8. The Discovery of Production and Its Technology. 9. Cost and Choice. 10. Cost Curves. Section 4: DECISIONS AND GAMES. 11. Game Theory and the Tools of Strategic Business Analysis. 12. Decision Making Over Time. 13. The Internal Organization of the Firm. Section 5: MARKETS. 14. Perfectly Competitive Markets: Short Run Analysis. 15. Competitive Markets in the Long Run. 16. Market Institutions and Auctions. 17. The Age of Entrepreneurship: Monopoly. 18. Natural Monopoly and the Economics of Regulation. 19. The World of Oligopoly: Preliminaries to Successful Entry. 20. Market Entry and the Emergency of Perfect Competition. Section 6: EXCHANGE AND GENERAL EQUILIBRIUM. 21. The Problem of Exchange. 22. General Equilibrium and the Origins of the Free-Market and Interventionist Ideologies. Section 7: BREAKDOWNS AND MARKET FAILURE. 23. Moral Hazard and Adverse Selection: Informational Market Failures. 24. Externalities: The Free Market--Interventionist Battle Continues. Section 8: INPUT MARKETS AND THE ORIGINS OF CLASS STRUGGLE. 25. Public Goods, the Consequences of Strategic Voting Behavior, and the Role of Government. 26. Input Markets and the Origins of Class Conflict.
2009, 768pp, Paperback, 9780324588576, South-Western College

MICROECONOMICS
AN INTUITIVE APPROACH, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH LIVEGRAPHS PRINTED ACCESS CARD)
Thomas Nechyba

Using intuition, a conversational writing style, everyday examples and outstanding graphs to present microeconomic theory as a way of looking at the world, MICROECONOMICS: AN INTUITIVE APPROACH, International Edition sets a new standard for clarity in the course and requires no prior background in calculus. It builds on the foundation of individual behavior, showing students the big picture of economic intuition while developing conceptual thinking skills with carefully written analysis. The first chapters establish a set of tools based on utility functions, so students learn about supply and demand in context, with a solid understanding of the underpinnings of those concepts. The package offers unprecedented flexibility in terms of topical coverage and graphical analysis. Each new copy of the text also includes access to a premium website featuring Nechybas LiveGraphs a suite of interactive, animated graphs that allows students to view dimensional graphs and functions illustrated in the book, as well as some additional graphs that are not in the printed text. Students can play and replay the LiveGraphs while listening to a brief explanation of the graphs. FEATURES LiveGraphs: Have you ever sliced an onion in class to demonstrate the three-dimensional nature of a utility function? Nechybas LiveGraphs put graphical analyses online, where students can play and replay animated figures with audio captions. Students can watch lines get plotted, see curves move, and in some cases, change variables to affect results. Everyday Applications: Rather than confining

22

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

applications to static boxed features, Nechyba incorporates applications into end-of-chapter exercises. By working through exercises that exemplify key applications, students learn by doing and can apply their knowledge beyond the text. Business Applications: How does pricing of one product affect demand for another produced by the same business? How might a firm most efficiently use cap-and-trade pollution vouchers? What is the impact of a capital-gains-tax-induced increase in the rental price of capital on firms within an industry? By working through exercises in each chapter, students answer these and other questions, questions that business professionals must also answer. Policy Applications: How do private school vouchers affect tuition levels? How effective are anti-price gauging laws during times of supply disruption? How do governments consider policies for subsidizing saving vs. taxing borrowing? Each chapter includes relevant policy applications such as these in the exercises. In-chapter Exercises: Each chapter is divided into digestible segments punctuated by learning exercises to help students check their understanding. Answers are available online. CONTENTS 1. Introduction. Part I: CONSUMERS, WORKERS AND SAVERS/BORROWERS. 2. Choice Sets and Budget Constraints. 3. Choice Sets in Labor and Financial Markets. 4. Tastes and Indifference Curves. 5. Different Types of Tastes. 6. Doing the Best We Can. 7. Income and Substitution Effects in Consumer Goods Markets. 8. Wealth and Substitution Effects in Labor and Financial Markets. 9. Demand for Goods and Supply of Labor and Capital. 10. Consumer Surplus and Dead Weight Loss. Part II: PRODUCERS (OR FIRMS). 11. Single Input Production. 12. Production with Multiple Inputs. 13. Production Decisions in the Short and Long Run. Part III: PRICES, MARKETS, AND THE FUNDAMENTAL WELFARE THEOREMS. 14. Competitive Market Equilibrium. 15. The Invisible Hand and Market Equilibrium. 16. General Equilibrium. 17. Risk and Uncertainty. Part IV: DISTORTIONS OF THE INVISIBLE HAND IN COMPETITIVE MARKETS. 18. Elasticities, Price Distorting Policies and Non-Price Rationing. 19. Taxes and Subsidies. 20. Interference with Trading Across Time and Space. 21. Production and Consumption
International Edition

Externalities. 22. Asymmetric Information (Insurance Markets, Discrimination). Part V: DISTORTIONS OF THE INVISIBLE HAND FROM NON-COMPETITIVE MARKETS. 23. An Introduction to Game Theory. 24. Market Power: Monopoly and Monopsony. 25. Innovation and Monopolistic Competition. 26. Oligopoly. 27. Public Goods. Part VI: MAKING THE WORLD A BETTER PLACE. 28. Governments and Politics. 29. What is Good? 30. Balancing Government, Civil Society and Markets.
2011, 800pp, Paperback, 9780538750806, South-Western College

New Edition Tentatively in July 2013

PRICE THEORY AND APPLICATIONS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH ECONOMIC APPLICATIONS, INFOTRAC 2-SEMESTER PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 8E
Steven Landsburg, University of Rochester

The exciting new eighth edition of PRICE THEORY, International Edition delivers a text that will both challenge and intrigue students as it equips them with the tools and skills to apply economic principles to the world around them. Inductive, hands on, and highly interactive, the book is intellectually rigorous yet student-friendly, with countless applications and resources to help readers fully understand concepts. Using the same humorous, easy-to-read approach as his popular The Armchair Economist, Steven Landsburg offers thorough coverage of traditional topics of intermediate price theory as well as emerging issues, such as the economics of information. Social welfare is a unifying concept throughout. NEW TO THIS EDITION The new edition contains a greatly expanded
23

www.cengageasia.com

version of indifference curves and budget lines, compares head taxes, income taxes, payroll taxes, and consumption taxes. An expanded and substantially rewritten treatment of income and substitution effects, giving even more emphasis than before to the mutual reinforcement between the economics and the geometry. The section on long-run supply curves and long-run competitive equilibrium is completely rewritten to put more emphasis on the intuition and how that intuition is reflected in the geometry. A new section on the crash of 2008-2009 emphasizes the possible role of adverse selection in the collapse of the financial markets. The material on externalities has been reorganized, putting more emphasis on practical policy issues. FEATURES

the Gains from Trade. 3. The Behavior of Consumers. Appendix: Cardinal Utility. 4. Consumers in the Marketplace. 5. The Behavior of Firms. 6. Production and Costs. 7. Competition. 8. Welfare Economics and the Gains from Trade. Appendix: Normative Criteria. 9. Knowledge and Information. 10. Monopoly. 11. Market Power, Collusion, and Oligopoly. 12. The Theory of Games. 13. External Costs and Benefits. 14. Common Property and Public Goods. 15. The Demand for Factors of Production. 16. The Market for Labor. 17. Allocating Goods Over Time. 18. Risk and Uncertainty. 19. What Is Economics?
2011, 720pp, Paperback, 9780538469487, South-Western College

Extensive sections are devoted to topics excluded from many standard intermediate textbooks, such as alternative normative criteria, efficient asset markets, contestable markets, antitrust law, mechanisms for eliciting private information regarding demand for public goods, human capital, increasing returns in economic growth, the Capital Asset Pricing Model, and the pricing of stock options. Price Theory includes an excellent assortment of both fictional and real-world examples. Many examples and exercises are based on fictional organizations. This encourages students to focus on the economic principle, application, and problem involved rather than the mechanics of a particular company. For instructors who prefer real-life situations, the seventh edition also includes 20 new real-world business examples, giving students an up-close view of microeconomics in the context of actual organizations. The cutting-edge seventh edition thoroughly develops the standard topics of intermediate price theory as well as such innovative topics as the economics of information, alternative normative criteria, efficient asset markets, contestable markets, antitrust law, human capital, and the demand for public goods. It also uses the timely topic of social welfare as a unifying concept throughout. CONTENTS 1. Supply, Demand, and Equilibrium. 2. Prices, Costs, and
24

THEORY AND APPLICATION OF INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH INFOAPPS 2-SEMESTER PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 11E
Walter Nicholson, Amherst College; Christopher Snyder, Dartmouth College

The Eleventh Edition of THEORY AND APPLICATION OF INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION provides an exceptionally clear and concise introduction to the economics of markets, with a managerial focus and using an algebraic approach. The authors have provided a complete range of highly relevant applications and appealing, current examples, filling this edition with strong examples and activities that engage students interest and encourage them to learn by doing. NEW TO THIS EDITION The authors have added or revised many applications to give them a strong managerial focus while illustrating key economic concepts in the context
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

of current high-interest topics, such as the highdefinition standards war and moral hazard in the financial crisis. Other applications include health care, the value of cell phones, a comparison of SUVs vs. minivans, insurance, Nash equilibrium, sports strategies, and terrorism. New Policy Challenges features at the end of many applications challenge students to consider how new or existing policies relate to the topics being explored, providing a useful real-world focus. Several chapters have been condensed or combined for a more streamlined presentation and focused discussion, offering an excellent balance between thorough, effective coverage of essential microeconomics topics and an appealing, studentfriendly format. A new chapter on behavioral economics provides a detailed introduction to this important topic, exploring the notion of price differentials that compensate for risk before covering finance-related issues such as diversifiable risk, risk premia, and options and hedging. FEATURES The text features a full complement of integrated pedagogical features to enhance student learning, including review checklists, an end-of-text glossary, solutions to odd-numbered problems, review questions, questions at the end of applications, numerical examples of major concepts, chapter summaries, and the new Policy Challenges features. MicroQuizzes within the chapters reinforce learning as key concepts are presented, enabling students to better absorb and retain the information, while endof-chapter problems provide a more thorough review of the material to help students succeed in the course. In addition to a strong managerial approach reflected throughout the text, the authors maintain an algebra focus in all mathematical presentations, making the material manageable for students without a strong foundation in calculus. Students receive access to Economic Applications resources including EconDebate Online, EconNews Online, EconLinks Online, and EconData Online, giving them a wealth of useful information and interactive learning tools to complement the text and help them succeed in class.

CONTENTS Part 1: INTRODUCTION. 1. Economic Models. Appendix: Mathematics Used In Microeconomics. Part 2: DEMAND. 2. Utility and Choice. 3. Demand Curves. Part 3: UNCERTAINTY AND STRATEGY. 4. Uncertainty and Expected Utility. 5. Game Theory. Part 4: PRODUCTION, COSTS, AND SUPPLY. 6. Production. 7. Costs. 8. Profit Maximization and Supply. Part 5: PERFECT COMPETITION. 9. Perfect Competition in a Single Market. 10. General Equilibrium and Welfare. Part 6: MARKET POWER. 11. Monopoly. 12. Imperfect Competition. Part 7: INPUT MARKETS. 13. Pricing in Input Markets. 14. Capital and Time. Part 8: ADDITIONAL TOPICS 15. Asymmetric Information. 16. Public Goods and Externalities. 17. Behavioral Economics.
2010, 688pp, Paperback, 9780324599497, South-Western College

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 14E


Robert Carbaugh, Central Washington University

Now in its Fourteenth Edition, this proven, marketleading text remains a favorite among students and instructors alike for its clear, concise treatment of international trade and finance theory. Using a wealth of contemporary examples and practical applications, INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS, 14E, International Edition vividly demonstrates the relevance of theory to real-world economic issues and policy questions. Discussions are presented both verbally and graphically, making the text highly accessible even for students with little economics background, and a flexible format

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

25

makes the text suitable for a wide range of course structures and subjects. As delighted students and instructors have discovered, if its clear, concise and contemporary, it has to be Carbaugh! NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW UPDATES: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS, 14E, International Edition has been thoroughly updated, with content that reflects the latest economic issues. New: A World Map, placed on the Front End Sheets of the book, easily show the location of countries described in the text. New: With the addition of The Global Economic Watch, access to current news, journal articles, videos, podcasts, PowerPoint slides, test questions and more is easy. Students can purchase The Watch standalone or it comes automatically with a CourseMate purchase. FEATURES A streamlined, concise presentation of essential economic theory allows you to provide a solid theoretical foundation for more in-depth explorations of contemporary issues such as wage insurance, foreign aid, and free trades impact on the environment. The text demonstrates the relevance of theory through a wealth of up-to-date, real-world examples and applications, including illustrations of the complex consequences of outsourcing, globalization, free trade, tariffs, and exchange rate adjustments. Six central themes are integrated through the text to provide a strong emphasis on issues at forefront of international economics today, including the global economic downturn, globalization, free trade and quality of life, trade conflicts between developing and industrial nations, trade liberalization, and the dollar as a reserve currency. CONTENTS 1. The International Economy and Globalization. Part 1. International Trade Relations. 2. Foundations of Modern Trade Theory: Comparative Advantage. 3. Sources of Comparative Advantage. 4. Tariffs. 5. Nontariff Trade Barriers. 6. Trade Regulations and Industrial Policies. 7. Trade Policies for the Developing Nations. 8. Regional Trading Arrangements. 9. International Factor Movements and Multinational Enterprises. Part 2. International Monetary Relations. 10. The Balance of Payments. 11. Foreign Exchange. 12. ExchangeRate Determination. 13. Mechanisms of International

Adjustment. 14. Exchange-Rate Adjustments and the Balance of Payments. 15. Exchange-Rate Systems and Currency Crises. 16. Macroeconomic Policy in an Open Economy. 17 International Banking: Reserves, Debt, and Risk.
2013, 576pp, Paperback, 9781285060316, South-Western College

New Edition Tentatively in April 2013

MANAGING IN A GLOBAL ECONOMY: DEMYSTIFYING INTERNATIONAL MACROECONOMICS


John E. Marthinsen ,Babson College

M a r t h i n s e ns M A N AG I N G I N A G LO BA L ECONOMY: DEMYSTIFYING INTERNATIONAL MACROECONOMICS is written specifically for MBA students and addresses important issues confronting business managers. This exciting new first edition presents macroeconomics in the context of real world decision-making, It helps students grasp practical big picture concepts, nurtures an understanding of what causes macroeconomic variables to change, and relates these changes to issues confronting managers. Marthinsen integrates the three major macroeconomic sectors (i.e., the real goods market, real loanable funds market, and foreign exchange market) in a userfriendly way with a minimum of math and only supply and demand analysis. Liberating readers from dry, overly complex macroeconomic models, Marthinsen uses theory only as a means to an end for practical understanding. Clear and concise, the book focuses on concrete business examples to show how economic shocks, such as monetary and fiscal policies or shifts in international capital flows, affect management decisions. The book was written for MBAs who were not necessarily economics majors, making it appealing to students with a variety of undergraduate backgrounds. Marthinsen keeps readers visually engaged with strategic use of figures, tables, charts, and illustrative

26

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

exhibits. MANAGING IN A GLOBAL ECONOMY offers a strategic focus, emphasizes the interaction among markets, and equips MBAs with a macroeconomic perspective that will last (and be used) for years. FEATURES MBA Specific: Unlike virtually every competing text on the market, the NEW MANAGING IN A GLOBAL ECONOMY was written especially for MBAs. Instructors no longer have to adapt an undergraduate text to the MBA level, while MBA students can enjoy a text that reflects their academic and professional experiences. Big-Picture Economics: Extremely practical, MANAGING IN A GLOBAL ECONOMY focuses on the interactions of the real goods, real loanable funds, and foreign exchange markets to emphasize the big picture. Using the unique three-sector model, students can perform country analyses, understand articles/editorials in the business media (such as Financial Times, The Wall Street Journal), better formulate financial statement projections, and contribute meaningfully to corporate strategy and planning discussions. Less Math, More Illustrations: Marthinsen uses minimal math (algebra) and instead keeps readers engaged with his strategic use of figures, tables, and charts. Clear and concise illustrative exhibits help readers thoroughly understand even the most challenging chapter concepts. This makes the book appealing to MBAs with a variety of undergrad backgrounds. Real-World Emphasis: While traditional texts are known for their complex expositions on theory, Marthinsen takes a more applied approach. He places theory in the context of how it affects real work and demonstrates how macroeconomics can help leaders make better decisions. Instead of imaginary widgets, the book is packed with focused examples and applications depicting actual business practices. Macro Memos: Providing additional examples -- and historical context for chapter concepts -- Macro Memos spotlight macroeconomic analysis and theory in action. Discussions include offshore outsourcing (Ch. 3), depreciation of the Thai Baht and Canadian expansionary monetary policy (Ch. 10), crowding out in Mexicos real loanable funds market (Ch. 11), potential effects of Mexico monetary policy on a multinational healthcare firm like Boston-based Fenway, Inc. (Ch. 16), and creating scenario planning frameworks at firms like Royal Dutch/Shell, General Electric, or Roche Holding (Ch. 18).
International Edition

Comprehensive Coverage: In addition to thorough coverage of chapter concepts, appendices cover more advanced or special topics in detail, such as Tracking Economic Conditions in Countries Around the World, The Gibson Paradox, Financial Assets included in U.S. M1 and M2 Money Supply Measures, and Foreign Currency Options. Thorough Review: Comprehensive end-of-chapter Review Questions enable readers to check their understanding of key concepts as they progress. Sparking lively classroom debate, end-of-chapter Discussion Questions raise the stakes by asking readers more challenging, open-ended questions that require internalizing and applying the concepts learned. The books supplemental materials also include test questions targeted at an MBA audience. CONTENTS 1. Introduction to International Macroeconomics. PART 1: UNDERSTANDING A NATIONS ECONOMIC CONDITIONS. 2. Taking an Economic Pulse: Measuring National Output. 3. Working for a Living: Monitoring Labor Market Conditions. 4. Wheres the Beef? Inflation, Real GDP, & Business Cycles. 5. Inflation: Who Wins, and Who Loses? PART 2: REAL LOANABLE FUNDS MARKET. 6. Monetary Aggregates: Measuring Money. 7. Pulling Rabbits from Hats: Financial Intermediaries and Money Creation. 8. Who Controls the Money Supply and How? 9. Interest Rates and Why They Change. PART 3: THE REAL GOODS SECTOR. 10. Price and Output Fluctuations. 11. Fiscal Policy & Automatic Stabilizers: What Managers Need to Know. PART 4: FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET. 12. Basics of Foreign Exchange Markets. 13. Exchange Rates: Why Do They Change? 14. Balance of Payments Fundamentals. PART 5: SHORTTERM & MEDIUM-TERM ECONOMIC CHANGES. 15. Putting It All Together. 16. Economic Shocks to Nations With Flexible Exchange Rates. 17. Economic Shocks to Nations with Fixed Exchange Rates. PART 6: LONGTERM ECONOMIC CHANGES. 18. Causes of Long-Term Growth and Inflation. 19. Long-Term Exchange Rate Movements & Comparative Advantage.
2008, 688pp, Casebound, 9780324395501, South-Western College

www.cengageasia.com

27

LABOR ECONOMICS

FUNDAMENTALS OF LABOR ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 2E


Thomas Hyclak, Lehigh University; Geraint Johnes, Lancaster University Management School; Robert Thornton, Lehigh University

Labor Economics, 2e, International Edition covers the essential aspects of modern labor economics from an international perspective, providing students with a comprehensive survey of economic theory and empirical evidence on purely competitive labor markets. In addition, the authors examine the impact of imperfect competition, incomplete information and uncertainty, and institutional factorsstemming from laws, unions, and human resource policieson wages and employment opportunities. NEW TO THIS EDITION Changes to Second Edition of Fundamentals of Labor Economics Expanded coverage of cyclical unemployment in light of the current slump. This entails substantial revision of Chapter 14, which previously focused on factors affecting non-cyclical unemployment rates. This also entailed inserting relevant discussion of current events in other chapters. For example, the book now provides coverage of the use of furloughs and pay cuts instead of layoffs in chapter 10 and the impact of the recession on migrant labor within the EU in chapter 8. Greater coverage of immigration, with emphasis on immigration theory, economic effects, and public policy. The focus is on both the U.S. and on other countries (particularly within Europe). Updated chapter on unionism (chapter 12) to incorporate latest developments in union membership, union wage policy in times of recession, economic effects, and public policy (e.g., the Employee Free
28

Choice Act). Added the topic of occupational licensing. Occupational licensing requirements now affect more than twice as many workers as do unions in the U.S.; and recent work by Kleiner, Krueger, and others has analyzed the growth and impacts of licensing. Yet other labor economics textbooks devote little or no attention to this increasingly important topic. Licensing is covered as an addition to the unionism chapter. Devoted more attention to on-line instructor support materials, including an instructors manual, test questions and links to data sets that can be used by students for class projects. This is an important text selection feature that stood out in the survey of labor economics instructors. Extended coverage of personnel economics, including aspects of labor turnover not covered in the chapter on job search (e.g., duration models), impact on company performance of various HRM methods, in addition to the existing material on remuneration and incentive mechanisms. Systematic increase throughout in references to recent empirical work that places emphasis on difference-in-difference methods and natural experiments. FEATURES Devoted more attention to on-line instructor support materials, including an instructors manual, test questions and links to data sets that can be used by students for class projects. This is an important text selection feature that stood out in the survey of labor economics instructors. CONTENTS 1. The Study of Labor Economics. 2. The Demand for Labor. 3. Topics in Labor Demand 4. The Supply of Labor: Labor Force Participation. 5. The Supply of Labor: Hours of Work. 6. Human Capital Analysis. 7. Labor Market Equilibrium. 8. Information and Job Search. 9. Monopsony and Minimum Wages. 10. Internal Labor Markets. 11. Personnel Economics. 12. Unions and Collective Bargaining. 13. Labor Market Discrimination. 14. Unemployment. 15. Wage Inequality, Income Inequality, and Poverty.
2013, 528pp, Paperback, 9781285094229, South-Western College

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS

New Edition Tentatively in July 2013

ECONOMICS FOR MANAGERS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH INFOAPPS), 12E


James R. McGuigan; R. Charles Moyer, University of Louisville; Frederick H.deB. Harris, Wake Forest University

Packed with managerially oriented applications, ECONOMICS FOR MANAGERS, 12e, International Edition illustrates how managers apply theories and techniques to solve real-world problems while teaching future business leaders how to think analytically and make better decisions. Extremely user friendly, the text caters to a variety of learning styles as it presents key analytical concepts in several ways, including tabular analysis, graphical analysis, and algebraic analysis. Students learn in a format with which they are comfortable, making difficult material more accessible and easier to understand. The new 12th edition is concise, current, and cutting edge with an exciting and extremely relevant new focus on green businesses and business developments in the examples and applications. The seasoned author team balances traditional neoclassical micro theory with extensive coverage of the latest analytical tools in managerial economics, such as game-theoretic tactics, information economics, and organizational architecture. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW! Many new and updated examples for the Managerial Challenge feature. New Managerial Challenges include facing the difficulty of sustainability for utility companies in pollution abatement environment, why airlines have started to charge additional fees for baggage, different modes for alternative energy and a response to the recent

U.S. financial crisis using exports to China, among others. Managerial Challenges on the demand for public transportation and Californias deregulation of electricity have been updated with an emphasis on global warming and green initiatives. NEW! As evidenced in the content of the Managerial Challenges, and in examples throughout, Managerial Economics, 12e now features an emphasis on environmentally friendly (or challenging) businesses and business-practices. New green examples are noted throughout the text by the compact fluorescent light bulb icon and include the Managerial Challenge exploring the relationship of global warming to demand for public transportation, examples on the Chevy Volt battery-powered car, changing incandescent for CFL light bulbs, and numerous others. NEW! Most chapters now include the What Went Right / What Went Wrong feature. Feedback from instructors told us that this was an extremely valuable feature, so the 12th edition now includes more of these concise and keen analyses. FEATURES Streamlined Approach: Responding to user feedback, the 12th edition is succinct and streamlined. The book thoroughly covers key topics, while less-used material is now found on the textbooks website to give the authors optimal flexibility in their course coverage. More International Coverage: The 12th edition demonstrates a strong emphasis on international business issues with coverage on China, India, and the global marketplace. Demonstrating the importance of understanding the global economic environment, the book integrates international issues throughout, illustrating how they relate to managerial efficiency and shareholder wealth maximization. Diverse Approaches: The authors present key analytical concepts in several different ways -including tabular analysis, graphical analysis, and algebraic analysis -- making difficult material more accessible and enabling students to learn in the format with which they are most comfortable. When elementary differential calculus is used, at least one alternative mode of analysis also is presented for readers. The book also has a strong finance emphasis. Real-World Emphasis: The 300-plus applications and examples from actual practice give students hands-on
29

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

experience with the decision-making challenges they will face as managers -- as well as effective tools to solve them. Decision-Making Skills: What Went Right/What Went Wrong features, now included in all chapters, enable students to apply what they have learned to realbusiness decisions and see the positive and negative outcomes of management decisions. Contemporary Coverage: A strong emphasis is placed on the most current topics in microeconomic thinking, including organizational economics, game-theoretic tactics, auction economics, strategy, information economics, and more. This coverage is balanced with more traditional neoclassical micro theory. CONTENTS Part I: INTRODUCTION. 1. Introduction and Goals of the Firm. 2. Fundamental Economic Concepts. 2A. Differential Calculus Techniques in Management. Part II: DEMAND AND FORECASTING. 3. Demand Analysis. 4. Estimating Demand. 4A. Problems in Applying the Linear Regression Model. 5. Business and Economic Forecasting. 6. Managing in the Global Economy. Part III: PRODUCTION AND COST. 7. Production Economics. 7A. Maximization of Production Output Subject to a Cost Constraint. 8. Cost Analysis. 8A. Long-Run Costs with a Cobb-Douglas Production Function. 9. Applications of Cost Theory. Part IV: PRICING AND OUTPUT DECISIONS: STRATEGY AND TACTICS. 10. Prices, Output, & Strategy: Pure and Monopolistic Competition. 11. Price and Output Determination: Monopoly and Dominant Firms. 12. Price and Output Determination: Oligopoly. 13. Game-Theoretic Rivalry: Best-Practice Tactics. 13A. Entry Deterrence and Accommodation Games. 14. Pricing Techniques and Analysis. 14A. Revenue Management. Part V: ORGANIZATIONAL ARCHITECTURE AND REGULATION OF BUSINESS. 15. Contracting, Governance, and Organizational Form. 15A. Auction Design and Information. 16. Government Regulation. 17. Long-Term Investment Analysis.
2011, 768pp, Paperback, 9780538470384, South-Western College

ECONOMICS FOR MANAGERS


TRANSACTIONS AND STRATEGIES, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH INFOAPPS)
Robert J. Michaels

The first and only text for managerial economics to be organized around Oliver Williamsons basic paradigm, ECONOMICS FOR MANAGERS: TRANSACTIONS AND STRATEGIES, 1e, International Edition takes a modern approach to managerial economics that is uniquely suited to todays business students. Organized around the idea that transactions are the fundamental unit of economics and that their governance by markets, contracts, or organizations is the most important economic question for businesses to cope with, this revolutionary text brings the course materials for economics up to date with the theory and practice of the field. The first half of the text covers the familiar economic theory of markets when transactions are standardized while the second half focuses on contracts, risk and asymmetric information, and organizational design. Vivid examples found in each chapter highlight important concepts and help your students become informed business decision makers. FEATURES NOBEL PRIZE-WINNING PARADIGM. This is the first and only text for managerial economics to be organized around the basic paradigm originated by Oliver Williamson (2009 Nobel Prize Winner in Economics): that transactions are the fundamental unit of economics, and that their governance by markets, contracts or organizations is the most important economic question for businesses to cope with. REAL-WORLD RELEVANCE. The author devotes two entire chapters to the economics of contracts and risk and information in contracts. This coverage is

30

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

crucial to todays business decision-makers and is not typically found in other managerial texts. GLOBAL PERSPECTIVE. Vivid Introductions and Whats Next sections frame each chapters content with business examples from a variety of industries and nations to underscore the critical importance of transactions and strategy in business decision-making. Questions include: who operates the biggest machine in the world; what is the most reliable determinant of whether patients being treated for heart attack will live or die; what can a satellite photo of the African continent tell us about the costs of transactions? CHECKPOINT QUESTIONS. Checkpoint questions at key intervals throughout the chapters ask students to recall important points and gauge how well they are mastering the basic chapter concepts. DISCUSSION POINTS. For Further Thought questions throughout the chapters pose questions of greater computational difficulty or ask readers to consider a more open-ended question for discussion. CONTENTS PART I CREATING ECONOMIC VALUE. 1. Reasoning with Economics: Models and Information. 2. Transactions and Institutions: The Building Blocks. PART II MARKETS. 3. Markets. 4. Cost and Production. 5. Extreme Markets I: Perfect Competition. 6. Extreme Markets II: Monopoly. 7. Between the extremes: Interaction and Strategy. 8. Competition and Strategy. PART III CONTRACTS. 9. Beyond Markets; Property and Contracts. 10. The Economics of Contracts. 11. Risk and Information in Contracts. PART IV ORGANIZATIONS. 12. Organizations in Concept and Practice. 13. Organizational Design. PART V APPLICATIONS: VERTICAL INTEGRATION AND EMPLOYMENT. 14. Vertical Relationships. 15. Employment Relationships. 16. Time, Risk and Options. 17. Conflict, Negotiation and Group Choice.
2011, 592pp, Paperback, 9780538466547, South-Western College

FUNDAMENTALS OF MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH INFOAPPS 2-SEMESTER), 9E


Mark Hirschey, University of Kansas

The economic concepts presented in FUNDAMENTAL OF MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS, 9e International Edition, show students how to use common sense to understand business and solve managerial problems without calculus. This innovative text helps students develop and sharpen their economic intuition--an invaluable skill that helps students, as future managers, decide which products to produce, costs to consider, and prices to charge, as well as the best hiring policy and the most effective style of organization. With its unique integrative approach, the text presents the firm as a cohesive, unified organization and demonstrates that important business decisions are interdisciplinary. A basic valuation model is constructed and used as the underlying economic model of the firm; each topic is then related to an element of the value maximization model--a process that shows how management integrates accounting, finance, marketing, personnel, and production functions. FEATURES In every chapter, the text incorporates a variety of simple numerical examples and detailed practical illustrations of concepts. These features portray the valuable use and real-world applications of the material covered. The focus is on the economics--not the mathematics--of the managerial decision process. Each chapter includes four short Managerial Applications boxes that illustrate current examples of how text concepts apply to real-world situations. Boxes include articles from BARRONS, BUSINESS WEEK, FORBES, FORTUNE, THE WALL STREET JOURNAL, and more. To increase awareness of
31

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

international issues, numerous examples, Managerial Applications, and case studies relate to global business topics. Case studies included with each chapter provide indepth treatment of text concepts. Written to allow-but not require--a computer-based approach, case studies are fully self-contained and are especially helpful to instructors who want to more fully incorporate the use of basic spreadsheet and statistical software in their courses. The text includes 380 new end-of-chapter questions and problems. Questions help students grasp basic concepts on an intuitive level and express understanding in a nonquantitative way. Problems illustrate the role of economic analysis from within a simple numerical framework. Self-test problems show students how economic tools and techniques can be used to solve practical business problems. CONTENTS PART ONE: OVERVIEW OF MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS. 1: Introduction to Managerial Economics. 2: Basic Economic Relations. 3: Statistical Analysis of Economic Relations. PART TWO: DEMAND ANALYSIS AND ESTIMATION. 4: Demand and Supply. 5: Demand Analysis and Estimation. 6: Forecasting. PART THREE: PRODUCTION AND COMPETITIVE MARKETS. 7: Production Analysis and Compensation Policy. 8: Cost Analysis and Estimation. 9: Linear Programming. 10: Competitive Markets. 11: Performance and Strategy in Competitive Markets. PART FOUR: IMPERFECT COMPETITION. 12: Monopoly and Monopsony. 13: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 14: Game Theory and Competitive Strategy. 15: Pricing Practices. PART FIVE: LONG-TERM INVESTMENT DECISIONS. 16: Risk Analysis. 17: Capital Budgeting. 18: Organization Structure and Corporate Governance.
2009, 816pp, Paperback, 9780324588569, South-Western College

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS, 2E
MARKETS AND THE FIRM, INTERNATIONAL EDITION
William Boyes, Arizona State University

Boyes introduces non-majors to the power of economics in business decision making. The texts intuitive approach clearly highlights how economics influences marketing, management, and other business-related decisions. In addition to traditional principles of price theory MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS, 2e, International Edition examines organizational behavior, strategic management, human resource management, and emerging issues such as game theory, TQM, and information economics. MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS, 2e, International Edition departs from convention to illustrate the role of economic intuition in making sound business decisions. While other texts focus on quantitative analysis, this book emphasizes logic and conceptual modeling -- reinforced by real-life examples -- to highlight the pivotal link between economics and key business concerns such as costs, prices, markets, and personnel. Students learn to weigh the strategic costs and benefits of each business choice, instead of relying on popular quick-fix solutions. Ideal for students in MBA programs and less quantitative courses, MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS, 2e, International Edition demonstrates the power of economic insight on business decision making. NEW TO THIS EDITION The text has been reorganized to flow from the developed power of free markets into a discussion of market failures, then applied knowledge to the structure, organization, and operation of the firm. The analogies between a system of free markets and the firm are developed. The second edition incorporates global issues throughout rather than having a separate chapter, as

32

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

the first edition Chapter 14. The comparison between the invisible hand and the grabbing hand the strategy of using government to enhance a firms success is developed. FEATURES MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS departs from convention to illustrate the role of economic intuition in making sound business decisions. While other texts focus on quantitative analysis, this book enphasizes logic and conceptual modeling -- reinforced by real-life examples -- to highlight the pivotal link between economics and key business concerns such as costs, prices, markets, and personnel. Students learn to weigh the strategic costs and benefits of each business choice, instead of relying on popular quick-fix solutions. Ideal for students in MBA programs and less quantitative courses, MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS demonstrates the power of economic insight on business decision making. CONTENTS 1 Introduction: Economics and Management. 2 The Power of Markets. 3 The Prime Directive. 4 The Theory of the Firm? 5 Performance. 6 Strategic Formulation of Economic Profit. 7 Demand. 8 Costs. 9 Profit Maximization. 10 Mechanics of Profit Maximization. 11 Revenue Management: Price Strategies. 12 Organization and Corporate Culture. 13 Minimizing Costs: Capital. 14 Personnel and Compensation. 15 The Knowledge Economy. 16 The Grabbing Hand. 17 Internal Markets. 18 Strategy Myths. 19 Strategic Behavior: The Application of Games. 20 Strategy.
2012, 448pp, Paperback, 9781111533762, South-Western College

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH INFOAPPS PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 12E
Mark Hirschey, University of Kansas

The economic concepts presented in MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS, 12e International Edition, show students how to use common sense to understand business and solve managerial problems. This innovative text helps students develop and sharpen their economic intuition-an invaluable skill that helps students, as future managers, decide which products to produce, costs to consider, and prices to charge, as well as the best hiring policy and the most effective style of organization. With its unique integrative approach, the text presents the firm as a cohesive, unified organization and demonstrates that important business decisions are interdisciplinary. A basic valuation model is constructed and used as the underlying economic model of the firm; each topic is then related to an element of the value maximization model--a process that shows how management integrates accounting, finance, marketing, personnel, and production functions. NEW TO THIS EDITION Chapter 2 has been completely rewritten to clarify key economic concepts and the intuition of marginal analysis, ensuring that your students have a solid understanding before progressing to other topics. Chapter 4, Demand Analysis, delivers expanded coverage of economic principles used to explain the underpinnings of demand at the individual and market levels. This material provides an essential theoretical backdrop for subsequent analysis of demand estimation and pricing practices. Chapter 7, Production Analysis and Compensation Policy, now delves more deeply into important labor market issues that confront employers and their

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

33

employees. The all-new Chapter 9, Linear Programming, illustrates how linear programming can be used to solve real-world decision problems quickly and easily. Chapter 14, Game Theory and Competitive Strategy, has been revised to clearly present essential game theory concepts and illustrate how firms use these ideas to improve decision making when payoffs depend on actions taken by others. FEATURES In every chapter, the text incorporates a variety of simple numerical examples and detailed practical illustrations of concepts. These features portray the valuable use and real-world applications of the material covered. Although the book contains calculus, the focus is on the economics--not the mathematics--of the managerial decision process. Each chapter includes four short Managerial Applications boxes that illustrate current examples of how text concepts apply to real-world situations. Boxes include articles from BARRONS, BUSINESS WEEK, FORBES, FORTUNE, THE WALL STREET JOURNAL, and more. The 12th edition incorporates several new regressionbased illustrations of chapter concepts using actual company data and hypothetical data adapted from real-world situations. Like all aspects of the text, this material is self-contained and intuitive. Case studies included with each chapter provide indepth treatment of text concepts. Written to allow-but not require--a computer-based approach, case studies are fully self-contained and are especially helpful to instructors who want to more fully incorporate the use of basic spreadsheet and statistical software in their courses. The text includes 380 new end-of-chapter questions and problems. Questions help students grasp basic concepts on an intuitive level and express understanding in a nonquantitative way. Problems illustrate the role of economic analysis from within a simple numerical framework. CONTENTS Part 1: OVERVIEW OF MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS. 1. Nature and Scope of Managerial Economics. 2. Economic Optimization. 3. Demand and Supply. Part 2: DEMAND ANALYSIS AND ESTIMATION. 4. Demand
34

Analysis. 5. Demand Estimation. 6. Forecasting. Part 3: PRODUCTION AND COMPETITIVE MARKETS. 7. Production Analysis and Compensation Policy. 8. Cost Analysis and Estimation. 9. Linear Programming. 10. Competitive Markets. 11. Performance and Strategy in Competitive Markets. Part 4: IMPERFECT COMPETITION. 12. Monopoly and Monopsony. 13. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 14. Game Theory and Competitive Strategy. 15. Pricing Practices. Part 5: LONG-TERM INVESTMENT DECISIONS. 16. Risk Analysis. 17. Capital Budgeting. 18. Organization Structure and Corporate Governance. 19. Government in the Market Economy.
2009, 864pp, Paperback, 9780324588316, South-Western College

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS: A PROBLEM SOLVING APPROACH, 3E


Luke M. Froeb, Vanderbilt University; Brian T. McCann, Purdue University; Michael R. Ward, University of Texas, Arlington; Mikhael Shor, University of Connecticut

Teach your MBA students how to use economics to solve business problems with this breakthrough text. MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS: A PROBLEM SOLVING APPROACH, 3E covers traditional material using a problem-based pedagogy built around common business mistakes. Models are used sparingly, and then only to the extent that they help students figure out why mistakes are made, and how to fix them. This editions succinct, fast-paced presentation and challenging, interactive applications place students in the role of a decision maker who has to not only identify profitable decisions, but also implement them. The lively book provides an excellent ongoing reference for students pursuing business careers. Instructors remark, The Froeb/McCann/Shor/Ward textbook is designed

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

for decision makers. Each chapter provides logical steps to solve common but misunderstood business problems. The books candor and novelty make for easy, enjoyable reading. NEW TO THIS EDITION Economics CourseMate offers a dynamic way to bring course concepts to life with interactive learning, study, and exam preparation tools that support the text. Increased number of End of Chapter Questions: Updated Content and Improved Pedagogy New Test Bank FEATURES Written specifically for the MBA-level managerial economics class, this books solid pedagogy teaches students to solve problems rather than simply learn models. Students connect economics to decisions made on the job. This book emphasizes fewer math and technical models, as well as fewer graphs and figures than traditional managerial economics texts, but provides a much stronger emphasis on todays real business world. A variety of effective end-of-chapter applications present real business scenarios that give students the opportunity to resolve actual business problems and pursue the most profitable and rational decisions. Eight to 10 end-of-chapter scenarios for every chapter provide excellent choices for individual assignments, group projects, or class discussions. Students begin with a strong foundation and understanding of the managerial economics to follow as Chapter 1 overviews and introduces the principles with an emphasis on how economics impact todays business decisions. Both instructors using this text and reviewers agree that this edition offers a highly effective level of readability to make sure your students thoroughly understand concepts and how they apply before moving ahead. Succinct lessons present relevant theory in an accessible and compact way, while learning features enable students to clearly understand the theory and immediately apply it. CONTENTS Preface: Teaching Students to Solve Problems. SECTION I: PROBLEM SOLVING AND DECISION MAKING. 1. Introduction: What This Book Is About. 2. The One

Lesson of Business. 3. Benefits, Costs, and Decisions. 4. Extent (How Much) Decisions. 5. Investment Decisions: Look Ahead and Reason Back. SECTION II: PRICING, COSTS, AND PROFITS. 6. Simple Pricing. 7. Economies of Scale and Scope. 8. Short-run Market-level Pricing. 9. Long-run Market-level Pricing. 10. StrategyThe Quest to Keep Profit from Eroding. 11. Foreign Exchange, Trade, and Bubbles. SECTION III: PRICING FOR GREATER PROFIT. 12. More Realistic and Complex Pricing. 13. Direct Price Discrimination. 14. Indirect Price Discrimination. SECTION IV: STRATEGIC DECISION MAKING. 15. Strategic Games. 16. Bargaining. SECTION V: Uncertainty. 17. Making Decisions with Uncertainty. 18. Auctions. 19. The Problem of Adverse Selection. 20. The Problem of Moral Hazard. SECTION VI: Organizational Design. 21. Getting Employees to Work in the Firms Best Interests. 22. Getting Divisions to Work in the Firms Best Interests. 23. Managing Vertical Relationships. SECTION VII: WRAPPING UP. 23. You Be the Consultant. Epilogue: Can Those Who Teach, Do?
2014, 350pp, Paperback, 9781133951445, South-Western College

MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS

FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICAL AND COMPUTATION ECONOMICS


Kamran Dadkhah , Northeastern University

Economics doesnt have to be a mystery anymore. F O U N DAT I O N S O F M AT H E M AT I C A L A N D COMPUTATION ECONOMICS shows you how mathematics impacts economics and econometrics using easy-to-understand language and plenty of examples. Plus, it goes in-depth into computation and computational economics so youll know how to handle
35

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

those situations in your first economics job. Get ready for both the test and the workforce with this economics textbook. FEATURES Each subject starts with a discussion of the connections between mathematical models and techniques, and the applications to economics and econometrics. In addition, each topic is illustrated with a large number of examples chosen from all areas of economics and economentrics. Readers will also find exercises at the end of each section. Each subject is introduced at three different levels. Readers will develop an intuitive understanding of the subject, a practical understanding of when and how to use the method, and a firm mathematical understanding. The material in the book, and in each chapter, is also organized in such a way as to give maximum flexibility to instructors and students who may want to skip advanced material or rearrange the order in which material is presented in their classes. This text emphasizes the use of computers for analytical purposes and computation. The reader will learn the necessary tools to tackle computational problems, while the problems will help the reader to internalize the mathematical logic of concepts and techniques discussed. CONTENTS 1. Mathematics, Computation, and Economics. 2. Basic Mathematical Concepts and Methods. 3. Basic Concepts and Methods of Probability Theory and Computation. 4. Vectors and Matrices. 5. Advanced Topics in Matrix Algebra. 6. Differentiation: Functions of One Variable. 7. Differentiation: Functions of Several Variables. 8. The Taylor Series and Its Applications. 9. Static Optimization. 10. Constrained Optimization. 11. Integration. 12. Dynamic Optimization. 13. Differential Equations. 14. Difference Equations. 15. Dynamic Systems.
2007, 608pp, Hardback, 9780324235838, South-Western College

MONEY AND BANKING

M & B (WITH ECONOMICS COURSEMATE WITH EBOOK PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 2E


Dean Croushore, University of Richmond

Created through an extensive student-tested, facultyapproved review process with more than 150 students and faculty, M&B, 2E offers an engaging, accessible solution to accommodate the diverse lifestyles of todays learners at a value-based price. M&B, 2Es brief, focused approach reads more like a business periodical than a text. The books thoroughly updated coverage addresses the modern framework of todays financial system in which both financial markets and banks play important roles. Numerous real business applications and an inviting writing style, infused with the latest financial examples, relate current money and banking topics to your students everyday lives and careers. Youll find the most recent financial figures, memorable full-color photos, and access to Cengage South-Westerns Global Economic Watch to help captivate your students. A full suite of interactive learning resources for your students and time-saving teaching support, including downloadable flash cards, interactive workshops, learning games and more help you connect your students to the latest developments in money and banking today for long-term personal and career success. FEATURES AN INNOVATIVE COMBINATION OF CONTENT IN PRINT AND ONLINE PROVIDES A WEALTH OF COMPREHENSIVE MULTIMEDIA TEACHING AND LEARNING ASSETS: Based on input from student focus groups and surveys, and from interviews with

36

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

more than 150 faculty and students, this magazinestyle core text and wealth of integrated multimedia teaching and learning resources produce an engaging and accessible solution that appeals to different learning styles at a value-based price. SHORTER, COMPREHENSIVE CHAPTERS COMMUNICATE CONCEPTS IN A MODERN DESIGN: M&B, 2E uses an engaging and accessible format to deliver money and banking content without minimizing coverage for your course. CHAPTER-IN-REVIEW CARDS AT THE BACK OF THE STUDENT EDITIONS PROVIDE STUDENTS WITH A PORTABLE STUDY TOOL: Chapter-in-Review Cards contain all of the pertinent information students need for effective class preparation. A FULL SUITE OF UNIQUE LEARNING TOOLS APPEAL TO DIFFERENT LEARNING STYLES: Online study tools are available to students with the purchase of a new book. Multimedia resources include downloadable flash cards, interactive workshops and online quizzing, and learning games and more, only a click away at http://www.4ltrpress.cengage.com/M&B. In addition, students can instantly access the latest up-to-theminute economic developments with Cengage SouthWesterns online Global Economic Watch. THE LATEST FINANCIAL COVERAGE REFLECTS TODAYS MOST RECENT FINANCIAL CLIMATE: Updated content throughout this edition provides insights into the most recent financial developments and changes. The books online Global Economic Watch (updated 4 times each day) further keeps your course abreast of the latest developments. DATA BANK AND POLICY INSIDER PROVIDE INSIGHTS INTO ACTUAL BUSINESS CHALLENGES: Engaging Data Bank features explore how data collection affects real-world businesses, institutions, and investors. Policy Insider boxes provide firsthand insights as these features highlight the authors personal experience with policy decisions at the Federal level. APPLICATION TO EVERYDAY LIFE SECTIONS AND POLICY ISSUES RELATE CONCEPTS TO TODAYS LIFE: Examples within the books Application to Everyday Life help students connect concepts in the text to their personal experiences, while chapterending Policy Issues highlight key policy decisions that relate to the chapter content.

CONTENTS 1. Money and the Financial System. Part I: INTRODUCTION TO MONEY AND BANKING. 2. The Financial System and the Economy. 3. Money and Payments. 4. Present Value. 5. The Structure of Interest Rates. 6. Real Interest Rates. 7. Stocks and Other Assets. Part II: FUNDAMENTALS OF BANKING. 8. How Banks Work. 9. Governments Role in Banking. Part III: MACROECONOMICS. 10. Economics Growth and Business Cycles. 11. Modeling Money. 12. The Aggregate-Demand/Aggregate-Supply Model. 13. Modern Macroeconomic Models. 14. Economic Interdependence. Part IV: MONETARY POLICY. 15. The Federal Reserve System. 16. Monetary Control. 17. Monetary Policy: Goals and Tradeoffs. 18. Rules for Monetary Policy.
2012, 448pp, Paperback, 9781111823351, South-Western College

MONEY, ISLAMIC BANKS AND THE REAL ECONOMY


Abdul Ghafar Ismail, Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia

This book is intended to develop some important discourses on three important subjects, that is, money, Islamic banks, and the real economy. The discussion on money will highlight the role of money as capital. It starts with an understanding of why money is so important to the smooth functioning of the economy and how it improves human well-being, we need to understand exactly what money is. To quantify the impact of money on the economy, we need to be able to measure it. The goal of these discussions is to understand what the concept of money is, how we use it, how we measure it, and how we channel it to Islamic banking.

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

37

FEATURES Explains the composition of a typical Islamic banks balance sheet and the interrelationships between its accounts, including assets, liabilities and owners equity; note the use and importance of Call Reports, and state why balance sheets must be accurate and timely. Examines how regulators regulate and supervise Islamic banking operations. Highlights the link between money, Islamic banks and the real economy. CONTENTS Part I: Money and the Islamic Banking System. Chapter 1: An Introduction To Money And The Islamic Banking System. Chapter 2: Money And The Payment System. Chapter 3: Financial Instruments, Financial Markets And Islamic Banking Institutions. Part II: Islamic Banking Operations. Chapter 4: Introduction To Basic Contracts In Islamic Banking. Chapter 5: Sources Of Funds. Chapter 6: Uses Of Funds. Chapter 7: Income Statement. Part III: Islamic Banks Performance. Chapter 8: Evaluating Islamic Bank Performance. Chapter 9: Analyzing Islamic Bank Performance With Financial Ratios. Part IV: Risk Management. Chapter 10: Understanding Risk. Chapter 11: Managing Risk. Part V: The Regulatory And Supervisory Environments. Chapter 12: Regulation. Chapter 13: Supervision. Part VI: Capital, Liabilities, Assets And Off-Balance Sheet Management. Chapter 14: Capital Management. Chapter 15: Liabilities Management. Chapter 16: Assets Management. Chapter 17: Off-Balance Sheet Management. Part VII: The Real Economy. Chapter 18: The Economics Of Islamic Banking System. Chapter 19: The Central Bank. Chapter 20: Monetary Policy Transmission. Chapter 21: Islamic Banking System And The Real Economy.
2010, 560pp, Paperback, 9789814253994, Cengage Learning Asia

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS

ECONOMICS, 10E
A CONTEMPORARY INTRODUCTION, INTERNATIONAL EDITION
William A. McEachern, University of Connecticut

McEachern teaches by example. It is the text that uses examples and illustrations that students will recognize when they show up for class the first day because they already have at least 17 years of personal experience with economic choices, institutions, and events. Taking a just-in-time approach by introducing material just as it is needed to develop an argument, ECONOMICS: A CONTEMPORARY INTRODUCTION, 10, International Edition truly leads by example. In a decidedly userfriendly tone, McEachern assumes that students are already intuitively familiar with many economic concepts through their own life experiences. These life experiences are then explained to students as economic concepts with clear and interesting exposition, relevant case studies, and a clean, focused design. The texts major applications take the form of Case Studies that are meant to be read and therefore are integrated into the flow of each chapter. With this Tenth edition, the books well-crafted approach is enhanced with resources--such as Aplia and CourseMate--that will help your students improve their understanding and help you streamline tasks and save valuable time. Also available: Microeconomics: A Contemporary Introduction, International Edition, 10e [ISBN: 9781133190097] Macroeconomics: A Contemporary Introduction, International Edition, 10e [ISBN: 9781133190080] NEW TO THIS EDITION Greater Emphasis on Recent Research: New to this

38

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

edition is a greater emphasis on research with studies selected to stimulate students interest, to reinforce economic principles, and, in few cases, to offer a different perspective. The 10th edition will cite and discuss nearly 150 recent studies gleaned from the authors survey of more than a thousand relevant publications, resulting in nearly twice the number of studies identified in the previous edition. New Topics Covered: Nearly 150 new research findings inevitably will introduce new topics, such as the following - How 80% of the worlds population eat bugs with pleasure (Ch. 6); How the entry of one more hospital into a local market increased the heart-attack survival rate by 10% (Ch. 8); How higher gas prices reduce obesity (Ch. 11). Topics that will be given more emphasis include the role of technology -- Internet sellers are experimenting with online markets (Ch. 10); Older workers are more likely to retire rather than retrain for new technology (Ch. 11); HDTV puts a premium on the complexion of on-air talent (Ch. 11); The Internet has cut the demand for newsprint by 60% in the last decade (Ch. 11). More Major Sections within Chapters: The 10th edition will present major sections in more bite-sized portions through the addition of new section and subsection headings. This change will enable students to have an easier time reading and comprehending material with more manageable section lengths. Some examples of the 18 new headings include: Applications of Utility Analysis (Ch. 6); Rent Seeking Vs. the Underground Economy (Ch. 16); Other Unemployment Issues (Ch. 21); The Long-Run Aggregate Supply Curve (Ch. 25), Banking During and After the Great Recession (Ch. 28); and Other Issues of Foreign Exchange Markets (Ch. 33). Checkpoint Questions Will Be Inserted: New to the 10th edition are Checkpoint Questions to help students retrieve, or recall, material that they have just read. Case Studies treatment: Case Studies have been reduced to one per chapter, updated throughout. A second Case Study for each chapter is available online. FEATURES

of economics. With each chapter, McEachern emphasizes the rules of the game in shaping markets and promoting economic development, such as the protection of intellectual property rights. The most successful online product for economics is now fully integrated with McEacherns text. Aplia offers interactive tools to help better prepare economics students. For instructors, Aplia provides access to high-quality, auto-graded assignments that ensure your students put forth effort on a regular basis throughout the term. CONTENTS 1. The Art and Science of Economic Analysis. 2. Some Tools of Economic Analysis. 3. Economic Decision Makers. 4. Demand and Supply Analysis. 5. Elasticity of Demand and Supply. 6. Consumer Choice and Demand. 7. Production and Cost in the Firm. 8. Perfect Competition. 9. Monopoly. 10. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 11. Resource Markets. 12. Labor Markets and Labor Unions. 13. Capital, Interest, Entrepreneurship, and Corporate Finance. 14. Transaction Costs, Imperfect Information, and Behavioral Economics. 15. Economic Regulation and Antitrust Policy. 16. Public Goods and Public Choice. 17. Externalities and the Environment. 18. Income Distribution and Poverty. 19. Introduction to Macroeconomics. 20. Tracking the U. S. Economy. 21. Unemployment and Inflation. 22. Productivity and Growth. 23. Aggregate Expenditure. 24. Aggregate Expenditure and Aggregate Demand. 25. Aggregate Supply. 26. Fiscal Policy. 27. Federal Budgets and Public Policy. 28. Money and the Financial System. 29. Banking and the Money Supply. 30. Monetary Theory and Policy. 31. The Policy Debate: Active or Passive? 32.International Trade. 33. International Finance. 34. Developing and Transitional Economies.
2014, 800pp, Paperback, 9781133190073, South-Western College

McEachern leads by example, introducing each economic idea by using common everyday student experiences to help bridge the gap between what students already know and the unfamiliar world
International Edition
www.cengageasia.com

39

ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 7E


John B. Taylor, Stanford University; Akila Weerapana, Wellesley College

ECONOMICS, 7E, International Edition includes updated information on topics such as: inequality, housing markets, the deflator and the CPI, the PCE deflator as a third measure of prices, economic growth, and International Finance. This clearly written text offers concise yet thorough coverage of current economic theories. John Taylor, former Undersecretary of the Treasury for International Affairs, offers his expertise on todays issues in a way that is relevant to students who have no prior exposure to the subject. Refreshing examples, engaging applications, and proven end-ofchapter problems simplify advanced topics and make them accessible to your students. This edition addresses the global financial challenges currently being faced, and recovery from these economic challenges. Updated graphs, figures, and popular learning features present the latest issues and data, including coverage of the Obama Administration. In addition, Aplia, the leading online homework solution, is available as part of a complete supplement package. Also available: Microeconomics, International Edition, 7e [ISBN: 9780538453523] Macroeconomics, International Edition, 7e [ISBN: 9780538453561] NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW! More discussion on simple game theory. Cover the basics of game theory and apply them to the case of modeling the behavior of oligopoly. (Chapter 11, Product Differentiation and Monopolistic Competition) NEW! More discussion on legal issues and current events on anti-trust policy. (Chapter 12, Antitrust

Policy and Regulation) NEW! Refreshing content to reflect current events. Added section about the impact of tax policy on labor supply. (Chapter 13, Labor Markets) NEW! Inequality section is updated to reflect current events. Katz, Kearney, Saez/Chetty work on income distribution. (Chapter 14, Taxes, Transfers and Income Distribution) NEW! More about how current events have stimulated a discussion on the role that government can play in the economy. More discussions of Citizens United and McCain/Feingold in section on Models of Government Behavior. (Chapter 15, Public Goods, Externalities and Government Behavior) NEW! Discussions now include housing markets. This will allow the authors to mirror the discussion of labor markets, stock markets, and the role for government intervention. It also provides a broad overview of derivatives and other in-the-news financial instruments. (Chapter 16, Capital and Financial Markets) NEW! More discussions of GDP at PPP. More data and background about the deflator and the CPI. Introduce PCE deflator as a third measure of prices. (Chapter 18, Measuring the Production, Income and Spending of Nations) NEW! Introducing a production function, diminishing returns and discussion of what can and cannot be achieved with labor and capital. Discussion of differences in technology. Added discussion about government policy to influence labor and technology growth. Incorporate Acemoglu categorization of the factors of economic growth being either proximate or fundamental and discuss how these factors influence the amount of K, L and technology an economy has. Discussion of growth differences across countries. (Chapter 21, Economic Growth) FEATURES Proven features now focus on the most up to-date issues including information on the housing markets and the Keynesian model. A new chapter discussing International Finance addresses current economic events in China, India and the Economic and Monetary Union. A wide variety of examples, case studies, photos and illustrations included throughout the text help explain economic ideas and models. Features such as
International Edition

40

www.cengageasia.com

Economics in the News and Economics in Action help students understand recent news stories, issues and debates. CONTENTS Part I: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS. 1. The Central Idea. 2. Observing and Explaining the Economy. 3. The Supply and Demand Model. 4. Subtleties of the Supply and Demand Model: Price Floors, Price Ceilings and Elasticity. Part II: PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICS. 5. The Demand Curve and the Behavior of Consumers. 6. The Supply Curve and the Behavior of Firms. 7. The Interaction of People in Markets. Part III: THE ECONOMICS OF THE FIRM. 8. Costs and the Changes at Firms Over Time. 9. The Rise and Fall of Industries. 10. Monopoly. 11. Product Differentiation, Monopolistic Competition, and Oligopoly. 12. Antitrust Policy and Regulation. Part IV: MARKETS, INCOME DISTRIBUTION, AND PUBLIC GOODS. 13. Labor Markets. 14. Taxes, Transfers And Income Distribution. 15. Public Goods, Externalities And Government Behavior. 16. Capital And Financial Markets. Part V: THE PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICS. 17. Macroeconomics: The Big Picture. 18. Measuring the Production, Income and Spending of Nations. 19. The Spending Allocation Model. 20. Unemployment and Employment. 21. Productivity and Economic Growth. 22. Money and Inflation. Part VI: ECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS AND MACROECONOMIC POLICY. 23. The Nature and Causes of Economic Fluctuations. 24. The Economic Fluctuations Model. 25. Using The Economic Fluctuations Model. 26. Fiscal Policy. 27. Monetary Policy. Part VII: TRADE AND GLOBAL. 28. Economic Growth and Globalization. 29. International Trade. 30. International Finance.
2012, 888pp, Paperback, 9780538453608, South-Western College

ECONOMICS, 12E
PRINCIPLES AND POLICY, INTERNATIONAL EDITION
William J. Baumol, New York University; Alan S. Blinder, Princeton University

ECONOMICS: PRINCIPLES AND POLICY, 12e, International Edition takes a policy-based approach to the teaching of introductory economics. Written by two of the most respected economists in the world, this text is also one of the most current texts on the market that includes data through the spring of 2011. The text includes significant updates based on the current economic crisis, providing the right level of rigor and detail. Also available: Microeconomics: Principles and Policy, International Edition, 12e [ISBN: 9780538453639] Macroeconomics: Principles and Policy, International Edition, 12e [ISBN: 9780538453646] NEW TO THIS EDITION A discussion of behavioral economics has been added to the text. More material on health care costs and the health care reform bill have been added. The traditional one-interest-rate model is replaced with a more complex model that includes two interest rates. One would be the riskless rate (such as on T-bills); the other would be a risky, private-sector rate. Doing so requires teaching students about the effect of perceived default risk on interest rates (risk premiums). New boxes are updated to reflect the changes in the economic environment that have occurred since the last edition. FEATURES The comprehensive online, interactive problem sets,

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

41

analyses, tutorials, experiments, and critical-thinking exercises give students hands-on application without adding to instructors workload. Aplia requires students to take an active role in the learning process-helping them improve their economic understanding and relate to the economic concepts presented. Instructors can assign homework that is automatically graded and recorded. Each chapter opens with a real-life economic puzzle or issue to launch the material covered in the chapter bringing economics into students everyday lives. This chapter-opening economic problem is revisited within the body of the chapter to illustrate how it can be addressed with the theoretical tools and concepts being presented. This text includes special Policy Debate boxes to enliven the chapters as well as open the way for classroom discussion. The Ideas for Beyond the Final Exam feature is introduced in Chapter 1, and then integrated throughout the text to reinforce important concepts for students. Each chapter ends with a summary; key concepts and terms; and questions and problems for review to help students complete homework and prepare for exams. CONTENTS

VI: THE MACROECONOMY: AGGREGATE SUPPLY AND DEMAND. 22. An Introduction to Macroeconomics. 23. The Goals of Macroeconomic Policy. 24. Economic Growth: Theory and Policy. 25. Aggregate Demand and the Powerful Consumer. 26. Demand-Side Equilibrium: Unemployment or Inflation? 27. Bringing in the Supply Side: Unemployment and Inflation? Part VII: FISCAL AND MONETARY POLICY. 28. Managing Aggregate Demand: Fiscal Policy. 29. Money and the Banking System. 30. Monetary Policy: Conventional and Unconventional. 31.The Financial Crisis and the Great Recession. 32. The Debate over Monetary and Fiscal Policy. 33. Budget Deficits in the Short and Long Run. 34. The TradeOff between Inflation and Unemployment. Part VIII: THE UNITED STATES IN THE WORLD ECONOMY. 35. International Trade and Comparative Advantage. 36. The International Monetary System: Order or Disorder? 37. Exchange Rates and the Macroeconomy.
2012, 888pp, Paperback, 9780538453691, South-Western College

Part I: GETTING ACQUAINTED WITH ECONOMICS. 1. What Is Economics? 2. The Economy: Myth and Reality. 3. The Fundamental Economic Problem: Scarcity and Choice. 4. Supply and Demand: An Initial Look. Part II: THE BUILDING BLOCKS OF DEMAND AND SUPPLY. 5. Consumer Choice: Individual and Market Demand. 6. Demand and Elasticity. 7. Production, Inputs, and Cost: Building Blocks for Supply Analysis. 8. Output, Price, and Profit: The Importance of Marginal Analysis. 9. Securities, Business Finance, and the Economy: The Tail That Wags the Dog? Part III: MARKETS AND THE PRICE SYSTEM. 10. The Firm and the Industry under Perfect Competition. 11. Monopoly. 12. Between Competition and Monopoly. 13. Limiting Market Power: Regulation and Antitrust. Part IV: THE VIRTUES AND LIMITATIONS OF MARKETS. 14. The Case for Free Markets: The Price System. 15. The Shortcomings of Free Markets. 16. The Markets Prime Achievement: Innovation and Growth. 17. Externalities, the Environment, and Natural Resources. 18. Taxation and Resource Allocation. Part V: THE DISTRIBUTION OF INCOME. 19. Pricing the Factors of Production. 20. Labor and Entrepreneurship: The Human Inputs. 21. Poverty, Inequality, and Discrimination. Part
42

ECONOMICS, 2E
N. Gregory Mankiw, Professor of Economics, Harvard University; Mark P. Taylor, Professor of Economics and Dean of Warwick University Business School

Now firmly established as one of the leading economics principles texts in Europe, the Middle East and Africa, this highly anticipated second edition of Economics by N. Gregory Mankiw (Harvard University) and Mark Taylor (Warwick University) will further enhance the books reputation for clarity, authority and real-world relevance. This Second Edition provides: New case studies and news articles providing relevant and topical insights into real life economics from UK, Europe, Middle East, and South Africa Two new chapters, one offering highly topical and in-depth coverage of the causes and effects of the global financial crisis and one covering Keynesian economics and IS-LM analysis
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

An introduction to the latest thinking in economics, particularly regarding some aspects of behavioural economics, to help students see different explanations for economic phenomena An emphasis throughout on thinking like an economist adopting the tools, methods and concepts economists use in addressing problems and issues Economics is also accompanied by Aplia, an online, interactive, auto-graded assignment setting tool. For more information about Aplia please visit: www.aplia.com/cengageemea FEATURES An accessible writing style that makes the science of economics as clear as possible The classic ten principles approach to economics introduced in Chapter One and then referred to throughout the book A distinctly European perspective, including reference to European institutions and policy, familiar terminology and cultural references and use of the Euro in examples and tables Premium online support for lecturers include an Instructors Manual, PowerPoint slides Exhibit slides and ExamView Testbank For students, the companion website offers Learning objectives, Exhibit slides, Multiple choice questions, advanced critical thinking questions, short scenariorelated questions and answers, Discussion Questions, Practice Questions and Internet activities CONTENTS PART 1 Introduction 1 Ten Principles of Economics 2 Thinking Like an Economist 3 Interdependence and the Gains From Trade PART 2 Supply and Demand I: How Markets Work 4 The Market Forces of Supply and Demand 5 Elasticity and its Application 6 Supply, Demand and Government Policies PART 3 Supply and Demand II: Markets and Welfare 7 Consumers, Producers and the Efficiency of Markets 8 Application: The Costs of Taxation 9 Application: International Trade PART 4 The Economics of the Public Sector 10 Externalities 11 Public Goods and Common Resources 12 The Design of the Tax System PART 5 Firm Behaviour and the Organization of Industry 13 The Costs of Production 14 Firms in Competitive Markets 15 Monopoly 16 Monopolistic Competition 17 Oligopoly PART 6 The Economics of Labour Markets 18 The Markets for the Factors of Production 19 Earnings and Discrimination 20
International Edition

Income Inequality and Poverty PART 7 Topics for Further Study 21 The Theory of Consumer Choice 22 Frontiers of Microeconomics PART 8 The Data of Macroeconomics 23 Measuring a Nations Income 24 Measuring the Cost of Living PART 9 The Real Economy in the Long Run 25 Production and Growth 26 Saving, Investment and the Financial System 27 The Basic Tools of Finance 28 Unemployment PART 10 Money and Prices in the Long Run 29 The Monetary System 30 Money Growth and Inflation PART 11 The Macroeconomics of Open Economies 31 Open-Economy Macroeconomics: Basic Concepts 32 A Macroeconomic Theory of the Open Economy PART 12 Short-Run Economic Fluctuations 33 Keynes and IS-LM Analysis 34 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply 35 The Influence of Monetary and Fiscal Policy on Aggregate Demand 36 The Short-Run Trade-Off Between Inflation and Unemployment PART 13 Topics in International Finance and Macroeconomics 37 The Financial Crisis 38 Common Currency Areas and European Monetary Union PART 14 Final Thoughts 39 Five Debates over Macroeconomic Policy
2011, 928pp, Paperback, 9781844808700, CL EMEA Higher Education

ECONOMICS FOR TODAY, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 8E


Irvin B. Tucker, University of North Carolina, Charlotte

Written by an award-winning educator recognized for his work in relating basic economic principles to global issues, Irvin Tuckers ECONOMICS FOR TODAY, 8e, International Edition continues its strong tradition of presentation using a unique textual and visual learning system. This edition concisely presents and reinforces core concepts, then immediately assesses student comprehension to ensure understanding. The latest information on federal deficits, the stimulus package,
43

www.cengageasia.com

environmental issues, and other developments in economics today is presented in an engaging, easyto-follow format that students can quickly grasp and apply to everyday life. ECONOMICS FOR TODAY, 8e, International Edition provides a full complement of instructor resources, including a handy Instructors Resource CD, new PowerPoint slides, optional CourseMate website and complete array of videos. Help your students learn and apply economics with the unmatched student-friendly approach in Tuckers ECONOMICS FOR TODAY, 8e, International Edition. Also available: Microeconomics for Today, International Edition, 8e [ISBN: 9781133582151] Macroeconomics for Today, International Edition, 8e [ISBN: 9781133582144] NEW TO THIS EDITION NEWLY UPDATED Chapter 9 focuses on power of monopolies: Concepts of monopoly become clear as this editions Chapter 9 illustrates the concepts of network good, linking economies of scale and monopoly power to student-relevant examples: Facebook and Match.com. NEW Global Economics feature explores environmental challenges: Your students examine the challenges of resolving green issues as a new Global Economics feature in Ch. 14, Why is the Climate Change Problem So Hard to Solve? delves into this topic of growing, critical importance. NEWLY UPDATED Appendix fully explains opposing self-correction model: You have the flexibility of exploring certain concepts in more depth. The new Chapter 20 Appendix fully develops and explains the opposing self-correction model based on downward flexibility of prices and wages and a downwardshifting short-run aggregate supply curve. NEW clear explanation of stimulus package and spending multiplier process: New content on Fiscal Policy (Ch. 21) uses real-world numbers to clarify and fully explain the stimulus package and spending multiplier process. The latest information on federal debt ensures students understand recent, contemporary developments: Upto-the-minute, updated data and exhibits throughout this editions chapter titled Federal Deficits, Surpluses, and the National Debt (Ch. 23) gives students a better understanding of these critical issues and their impact in economics today.
44

FEATURES Chapter Previews pique student interest in specific chapter topics: Each chapter begins with an intriguing Preview that reinforces how the chapter topics work within the overall presentation of the book. Margin definitions provide quick reference to key concepts: To ensure students have an immediate understanding of the most important economic concepts, key topics are highlighted with bold type, defined in the text, and defined again in the margins for easy review and reference. Conclusion Statements relate key concepts to other economic concepts: To ensure students truly understand and can apply the main concepts within each chapter, highlighted Conclusion Statements at the end of each chapter section place the material just learned into a larger context and relate it to other chapter concepts. Economics in Practice emphasizes the relevance of concepts to everyday life: These intriguing boxed inserts introduce student to timely, real-world extensions of economic theory and provide the acid test of relevance to everyday life. CONTENTS PART I: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS. 1. Introducing the Economic Way of Thinking. 2. Production Possibilities, Opportunity Cost, and Economic Growth. PART II: MICROECONOMIC FUNDAMENTALS. 3. Market Demand and Supply. 4. Markets in Action. Appendix: Applying Supply and Demand Analysis to Health 5. Price Elasticity of Demand and Supply. 6. Consumer Choice Theory. 7. Production Costs. PART III. MARKET STRUCTURES. 8. Perfect Competition. 9. Monopoly. 10. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 11. Labor Markets. PART IV: MICROECONOMIC POLICY ISSUES. 12. Income Distribution, Poverty, and Discrimination. 13. Antitrust and Regulation. 14. Environmental Economics. PART V: MACROECONOMIC FUNDAMENTALS. 15. Gross Domestic Product. 16. Business Cycles and Unemployment. 17. Inflation. PART VI: MACROECONOMIC THEORY AND POLICY. 18. The Keynesian Model. 19. The Keynesian Model in Action. 20. Aggregate Demand and Supply. 21. Fiscal Policy. 22. The Public Sector. 23. Federal Deficits, Surpluses, and the National Debt. PART VII: MONEY, BANKING, AND MONETARY POLICY. 24. Money and the Federal Reserve System. 25. Money Creation. 26. Monetary Policy. 27. The Phillips Curve and Expectations Theory. PART VIII: THE INTERNATIONAL ECONOMY. 28. International Trade
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

and Finance. 29. Economies in Transition. 30. Growth and the Less-Developed Countries.
2014, 944pp, Paperback, 9781133582045, South-Western College

NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW! An entirely new chapter has been added to the eleventh edition--Chapter 33, Building Theories to Explain Everyday Life: From Observations to Questions to Theories to Predictions. This chapter is designed to demonstrate with interesting, everyday examples how economists build and test theories. Providing invaluable insight into how economists think while relating concepts to ideas students can easily reference in their own lives, this chapter is a unique perspective in the economics curriculum. NEW! Video tutorials: See It Solved! New to the eleventh edition are these concise video tutorials prepared by author Roger Arnold. See It Solved tutorials take a problem from the Video Questions and Problems section at the end of the chapters and demonstrate how that problem is solved, step by step. NEW! Video tutorials: GraphIt! New to the eleventh edition are these concise video tutorials prepared by author Roger Arnold. GraphIt! tutorials move carefully through key graphs in the chapter to demonstrate, step by step, how the graphs are built, and what each movement means. NEW! Thoroughly updated content throughout the chapters. The eleventh edition has been completely updated with new applications, data, and details on the financial and economic crisis. There are more than 15 new Economics 24/7 features and new applications on Speculators, Price Variability, and Patterns and Salsa, Chips, and Beer in the applications of supply and demand chapter. The chapter on monetary policy has been substantially revised to reflect changes such as Patterns of Sustainable Specialization and Trade (PSST) and targeting of nominal GDP. FEATURES Chapter 18 on the financial crisis of 2007-2009: Arnolds ECONOMICS, 11e, International Edition is the only principles of economics text currently on the market that focuses an entire chapter on the financial crisis. Video Office Hours: These videos feature Roger Arnold as he walks students through key concepts and graphs in each chapter. Using innovative video and whiteboard technology, the author provides both short concept pieces and longer lectures for each chapter, talking through the concepts just as he would in class and displaying on the whiteboard lecture points and demonstrating graphs. Office Hours: This feature emulates the kinds of

ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITON (WITH VIDEOS: OFFICE HOURS PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 11E
Roger A. Arnold, California State University, San Marcos

The economy is tough but economics doesnt have to be! Let Roger Arnolds ECONOMICS, 11e, International Edition open up the world of economic analysis for your students. With more detailed coverage of the financial and economic crisis than any other principles text on the market, fun and innovative pedagogy, easy customization, and fully integrated digital and course management options, ECONOMICS, 11e, International Edition is the perfect solution for any classroom. With intriguing pop culture examples, the text bolsters student interest by illustrating the unexpected places economics occurs, and how economic forces link events to our lives and are part of your students world 24/7. Building on the Video Office Hours lectures developed by Roger Arnold for the tenth edition, the eleventh edition features two entirely new video assets--See It Solved and GraphIt! And it is integrated with powerful resources, such as Aplia, CengageNOW, and Cengages CourseMate for Economics, which provide unsurpassed planning and management tools, like homework that is automatically assigned, graded, and recorded online, or tracking of students time spent with online resources. Also available: Microeconomics, International Edition, 11e [ISBN: 9781133582168] Macroeconomics, International Edition, 11e [ISBN: 9781133582946]

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

45

questions students bring to economics instructors after class. Office Hours explores key concepts such as how the money supply works; the purpose of the PPF; whether price ceilings are really good or bad for consumers; and the purpose of the AD/AS framework. Economics 24/7: Illustrating the practical relevance of key concepts, this feature explores anything that can be explained through economic analysis. For example: Why do people specialize and trade? Will a tax on soda help reduce obesity? Why might states ban real estate commission rebates? Which is better, a tax rebate or a tax bonus? Economics 24/7 helps students learn to look for economic forces at work--and understand the principles behind them. Aplia: Available bundled with the text or as a digital solution, Aplia is fully integrated with the eleventh edition. The comprehensive online, interactive problem sets, analyses, tutorials, experiments, and critical-thinking exercises give students hands-on application without adding to instructors workload. Based on discovery learning, Aplia requires students to take an active role in the learning process--helping them improve their economic understanding and ability to relate to the economic concepts presented. Instructors can assign homework that is automatically graded and recorded. CONTENTS AN INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS Part I: ECONOMICS: THE SCIENCE OF SCARCITY 1. What Economics Is About. 2. Production Possibilities Frontier Framework. 3. Supply and Demand: Theory. 4. Prices: Free, Controlled, and Relative. 5. Supply, Demand, and Price: Applications. MACROECONOMICS Part II: MACROECONOMIC FUNDAMENTALS 6. Macroeconomic Measurements, Part I: Prices and Unemployment. 7. Macroeconomic Measurements, Part II: GDP and Real GDP. Part III: MACROECONOMIC STABILITY, INSTABILITY, AND FISCAL POLICY 8. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. 9. Classical Macroeconomics and the Self-Regulating Economy. 10. Keynesian Macroeconomics and Economic Instability: A Critique of the Self-Regulating Economy. 11. Fiscal Policy and the Federal Budget. Part IV: MONEY, THE ECONOMY, AND MONETARY POLICY 12. Money, Banking, and the Financial System. 13. The Federal Reserve System. 14. Money and the Economy. 15. Monetary Policy. Part V: EXPECTATIONS AND
46

GROWTH 16. Expectations Theory and the Economy. 17. Economic Growth: Resources, Technology, Ideas, and Institutions. Part VI: THE FINANCIAL CRISIS OF 2007-2009 18. The Financial Crisis of 2007-2009. Part VII: GOVERNMENT AND THE ECONOMY 19. Debates in Macroeconomics Over the Role and Effects of Government. MICROECONOMICS. Part VIII: MICROECONOMIC FUNDAMENTALS 20. Elasticity. 21. Consumer Choice: Maximizing Utility and Behavioral Economics. 22. Production and Costs. Part IX: PRODUCT MARKETS AND POLICIES 23. Perfect Competition. 24. Monopoly. 25. Monopolistic Competition, Oligopoly, and Game Theory. 26. Government and Product Markets: Antitrust and Regulation. Part X: FACTOR MARKETS AND RELATED ISSUES 27. Factor Markets: With Emphasis on the Labor Market. 28. Wages, Union, and Labor. 29. The Distribution of Income and Poverty. 30. Interest, Rent, and Profit. Part XI: MARKET FAILURE, PUBLIC CHOICE, AND SPECIAL-INTERESTGROUP POLITICS 31. Market Failure: Externalities, Public Goods, and Asymmetric Information. 32. Public Choice and Special-Interest-Group Politics. Part XII: ECONOMICS THEORY-BUILDING AND EVERYDAY LIFE 33. Building Theories to Explain Everyday Life: From Observations to Questions to Theories to Predictions. THE GLOBAL ECONOMY Part XIII: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND GLOBALIZATION 34. International Trade. 35. International Finance. 36. Globalization and International Impacts on the Economy. WEB CHAPTERS 37. The Economic Case For and Against Government: Five Topics Considered. 38. Financial Matters: Stocks, Bonds, Futures and Options. 39. Agriculture: Problems, Policies, and Unintended Effects.
2014, 912pp, Paperback, 9781133582311, South-Western College

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

length with the relationship between ethics and economics Analyse the issue: in each chapter, the authors provide a brief case study for students to analyse In Summary: summarises key points that have been discussed in each section of the text CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction to economics 1. Thinking like an economist Appendix to Chapter 1: Applying graphs to economics 2. Production possibilities and opportunity cost 3. Market demand and supply 4. Markets in action Part 2: Microeconomic fundamentals 5. Elasticity of demand and supply 6. Production costs Part 3: Market structures 7. Perfect competition 8. Monopoly 9. Monopolistic competition and oligopoly 10. Policy issues: Resource taxes and climate change (NEW CHAPTER) Part 4: Macroeconomic fundamentals 11. Measuring the size of the economy 12. Business cycles and economic growth 13. Inflation and unemployment Part 5: Macroeconomic theory and policy 14. A simple model of the macro economy ONLINE Appendix to Chapter 14 - Further on the aggregate demandoutput model: The Keynesian Cross 15. The monetary and financial system ONLINE Appendix to Chapter 15 - Other key financial markets 16. Macroeconomic policy I: monetary policy 17. Macroeconomic policy II: fiscal policy Part 6: Further aspects of international economics 18. International trade and finance.
2012, 522pp, Paperback, 9780170190855, Cengage Learning Australia

ECONOMICS FOR TODAY, 4E


FOURTH ASIA PACIFIC EDITION WITH STUDENT RESOURCE ACCESS 12 MONTHS
Allan Layton, University of Southern Queensland; Tim Robinson, Queensland University of Technology; Irvin B. Tucker, University of North Carolina, Charlotte

The book aims to simplify the array of confusing economic analyses and present a straightforward and balanced approach that effectively teaches the application of basic economics principles. Only essential material is included in the book and key concepts are explained in clear and simple terms. Written in an engaging and user-friendly manner, the book is designed for non-majors (although can also be used in these courses) NEW TO THIS EDITION Focus on the Global Financial and Economic Crisis of 2008 to the present, specifically in chapters 11-18 New Chapter 10, focussing on resource taxation and climate change New cases, issues, policy discussions, questions New In Summary feature summarises key points that have been discussed in individual sections FEATURES Each chapter contains a number of current real-world exercises and topics for discussion You make the call: in each chapter, discussion/ reflection questions ask students to answer a simple question related to the topic being discussed. Answers are provided at the end of the chapter International focus: chapter topics are highlighted in a global context in a mini-case, with what do you think? questions Economics and ethics: (not included in all chapters) references to ethical considerations are made throughout the text. Various sections deal at some
International Edition

FUNDEMENTALS OF ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 6E


William Boyes, Arizona State University; Michael Melvin, Arizona State University

Based on the comprehensive two-semester text by the same authors, this version of Economics boils down
47

www.cengageasia.com

the formal economic theories and concepts into their essential parts, emphasizing domestic and international applications and policy issues. FUNDAMENTALS OF ECONOMICS, 6e, International Edition is a concise but thorough survey of economics for instructors desiring a brief, practical text. Each chapter focuses on core economic concepts and provides a link between theory and real-world relevance, making the content more meaningful for students. The text provides a convenient, integrated learning experience by including a Study Guide after each chapter, which allows students to review key concepts and practice new skills before they go on to read the next chapter. NEW TO THIS EDITION UPDATED CONTENT: The Sixth Edition has been thoroughly updated to reflect the current issues and events in economics in the US and the world. The new edition has also been updated to reflect issues in the European Nation and will help students acquire some familiarity of other economies and global capital flow. FEATURES REAL-WORLD EXAMPLES: Examples in each chapter focus on the business decisions of actual, headlinemaking companies and discuss the economic policies of todays world leaders. These examples are selected to demonstrate the relevance of the material to students lives. STUDENT-FRIENDLY PEDAGOGY: The supportive pedagogical framework that guides students through each chapter includes Fundamental Questions, which open and organize the chapter by focusing on three to six key issues, and which then reappear both at point of relevance in the margins and in the end-ofchapter Summary sections; Now You Try It checkpoint questions that quiz students on important concepts, with answers provided at the back of the book; Recaps at the end of each major section to break material into manageable segments; and end-of-chapter exercises that serve as self-checks for students and as homework assignment options for instructors. ABUNDANCE OF REVIEW MATERIALS: A built-in study guide follows each chapter and provides a more intensive review opportunity for students, with answers provided in an appendix. Most chapters contain four pages of study material consisting of key term match-ups, multiple-choice quizzes, and practice
48

questions and problems. A final section of application problems gives students an opportunity to analyze and synthesize what they have learned. CONTENTS Part I: MARKETS. 1. Economics and the World Around You. 2. Markets and the Market Process. 3. The Free Market versus Government Interference. Part II: Consumers, Firms, and Social Issues. 4. The Firm and the Consumer. 5. Costs and Profit Maximization. 6. Competition. 7. Business, Society, and the Government. 8. Government Intervention versus Free Markets. Part III: The National and Global Economies. 9. An Overview of the National and International Economies. 10. Macroeconomic Measures. 11. Unemployment, Inflation, and Business Cycles. 12. Macroeconomic Equilibrium: Aggregate Demand and Supply. 13. Fiscal Policy. 14. Money and Banking. Part IV: Macroeconomic Policy. 15. Monetary Policy. 16. Macroeconomic Policy, Business Cycles, and Growth. 17. Issues in International Trade and Finance. 18. Globalization.
2014, 450pp, Paperback, 9781285176109, South-Western College

PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS OF ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 6E


Marc Lieberman, New York University; Robert E. Hall, Stanford University

Written by acclaimed economists Lieberman and Hall, this straightforward, contemporary text remains as current as the latest headlines. Fresh new cuttingedge examples throughout this edition as well as updated mini-cases clearly illustrate core economic theory and applications in action. This editions streamlined chapters focus on todays most important economic theories and events as well as how they

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

relate to practical situations. This easy-to-understand comprehensive text equips students with a solid economic foundation they can build on for success no matter what their careers. New diagrams, interactive online exercises, graphing applications, and Internet research resources give students hands-on experience in understanding current economic challenges. The book demonstrates how economics is an integrated, powerful body of knowledge able to address complex domestic and global issues. This edition presents the latest in economic thinking, and is supported by dynamic online resources such as Aplias leading online homework manager, CourseMate online tools, and CengageNOW course management system. Also available: Principles and Applications of Microeconomics, International Edition, 6e [ISBN: 9781133188247] Principles and Applications of Macroeconomics, International Edition, 6e [ISBN: 9781133188254] NEW TO THIS EDITION N E W U S I N G T H E T H E O R Y F E AT U R E S THROUGHOUT THE EDITION REFLECT FRESH, PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS. Many of the chapters offer updated Using the Theory mini-cases to further emphasize the immediate value and practical application of concepts students are learning. U P DAT E D E CO N O M I C FAC T S A N D DATA REFLECT TODAYS LATEST EMERGING BUSINESS INFORMATION. This edition incorporates the most recent, pertinent economic and financial data from todays headlines into an updated contemporary presentation to ensure your students are prepared to deal with tomorrows challenges. FRESH, UPDATED EXAMPLES HIGHLIGHT TODAYS MOST CONTEMPORARY SITUATIONS AND CHALLENGES. This editions memorable, practical examples bring todays latest business and economic situations to life while emphasizing key concepts from the text. STREAMLINED MICROECONOMIC CHAPTERS FOCUS ON CONCEPTS MOST IMPORTANT FOR SUCCESS. Purposeful, concise, yet thorough content throughout the microeconomic chapters is streamlined in this edition to emphasize the microeconomic concepts and applications most critical in business today. UPDATED TREATMENT OF MONEY, THE BANKING SYSTEM, AND MONETARY POLICY REFLECTS TODAY S LATEST THINKING. This editions presentation of money, banking, and monetary
International Edition

policies throughout the macroeconomic chapters incorporates the most recent emerging trends and thoughts from central banks and leading economists. OPTIONAL CONTENT IS NOW AVAILABLE IN APPENDIXES. The authors have relocated both microeconomics and macroeconomics material to easily accessible appendixes to give you the flexibility to incorporate or omit this information from your course, depending on your students needs. FEATURES PROVEN AUTHORS OFFER AUTHORITATIVE, PRACTICAL PERSPECTIVES ON EMERGING ISSUES. A cutting-edge researcher, author Robert Hall is well recognized as one of the nations most respected economists. Author Marc Lieberman combines his talents as a prominent leading economist and awardwinning teacher to provide a practical perspective as well as business insights to the book. EMPHASIS ON CORE ECONOMIC THEORY ENSURES SOLID FOUNDATION. Lieberman/Halls signature, accessible, no-nonsense approach ensures all students gain a solid understanding of core economic theories and applications. You can use this comprehensive base of knowledge as a launching pad for interesting extensions of key topics. CLEAR MICROECONOMICS APPROACH CLARIFIES CONCEPTS FOR STUDENTS. This editions sensible approach to microeconomics includes a separate chapter covering the MC=MR rule of profit maximization before addressing each individual market structure. In addition, the chapter on efficiency appears after market structures to separate description and assessment issues, and provide a more unified, understandable approach. MODERN MACROECONOMICS APPROACH PROVIDES THOROUGH UNDERSTANDING OF CONTEMPORARY ISSUES. As part of this editions easy-to-understand approach, long-run and short-run perspectives are continually compared while clearly presenting strengths and limitations. This editions chapter on economic fluctuations thoroughly explains why different perspectives exist and helps resolve a variety of controversies and contradictions. CONTENTS Part I: PRELIMINARIES. 1. What Is Economics? 2. Scarcity, Choice, and Economic Systems. Part II: MARKETS AND PRICES. 3. Supply and Demand. 4.
49

www.cengageasia.com

Working with Supply and Demand. 5. Elasticity. Part III: MICROECONOMIC DECISION MAKERS. 6. Consumer Choice. 7. Production and Cost. 8. How Firms Make Decisions: Profit Maximization. Part IV: PRODUCT MARKETS. 9. Perfect Competition. 10. Monopoly. 11. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. Part V: LABOR, CAPITAL, AND FINANCIAL MARKETS. 12. Labor Markets. 13. Capital and Financial Markets. Part VI: EFFICIENCY, GOVERNMENT, AND THE GLOBAL ECONOMY. 14. Economic Efficiency and the Competitive Ideal. 15. Governments Role in Economic Efficiency. 16. Comparative Advantage and the Gains from International Trade. Part VII: MACROECONOMICS: BASIC CONCEPTS. 17. What Macroeconomics Tries to Explain. 18. Production, Income, and Employment. 19. The Price Level and Inflation. Part VIII: LONGRUN MACROECONOMICS. 20. The Classical LongRun Model. 21. Economic Growth and Rising Living Standards. Part IX: SHORT-RUN MACROECONOMICS. 22. Economic Fluctuations. 23. The Short-Run Macro Model. Part X: MACROECONOMIC POLICY. 24. Fiscal Policy. 25. Banking and Financial Institutions. 26. Monetary Policy. 27. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. 28. Inflation and Monetary Policy. 29. Exchange Rates and Macroeconomic Policy.
2013, 968pp, Paperback, 9781133188261, South-Western College

economic tools and the importance of economic ideas, this edition pays careful attention to regional and global policies and economic issues such as climate change and resource taxation, the impacts of the 2008 global financial crisis, inflation, unemployment and interest rates, monetary and fiscal policy. NEW TO THIS EDITION Up-to-date statistical information for Australia and new Zealand Integration of climate change issues and their impact on economics Significantly updated chapters on inflation, monetary and fiscal policy, the Reserve Bank of Australia, cash rate, aggregate demand and aggregate supply to fit the current context of the Australian economic landscape New media articles and case studies Updated end of chapter activities FEATURES Applications and policy alongside formal economic theory Ten Lessons from Economics outlined in chapter 1 and highlighted throughout the text to remind students that these lessons are the key to most economic analysis Margin glossaries Chapter objectives define and reinforce content End-of-chapter Summaries, Questions for Review as well as Problems and Applications, each reinforcing chapter content CONTENTS Part I: Introduction 1. Ten lessons from economics 2. Thinking like an economist 3. Interdependence and the gains from trade Part II: Supply and demand I: How markets work 4. The market forces of supply and demand 5. Elasticity and its application 6. Supply, demand and government policies Part III: Supply and demand II: Markets and welfare 7. Consumers, producers and the efficiency of markets 8. Application: The costs of taxation 9. Application: International trade Part IV: The economics of the public sector 10. Externalities 11. Public goods and common resources 12. The design of the tax system Part V: Firm behaviour and the organisation of industry 13. The costs of production 14. Firms in competitive markets 15. Monopoly 16. Business strategy 17. Competition policy 18. Monopolistic competition Part

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS, 5E
Joshua Gans, University of Toronto ; Stephen King, Monash University; Robin Stonecash, UTS; N. Gregory Mankiw, Professor of Economics, Harvard University

Principles of Economics 5th edition combines microeconomics and macroeconomics into one volume for students who take a full years course. The latest edition of this text continues to focus on important concepts and analyses necessary for students in an introductory economics course. In keeping with the authors philosophy of showing students the power of
50

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

VI: The economics of labour markets 19. The markets for the factors of production 20. Earnings, unions and discrimination 21. Income inequality and poverty Part VII: Topics for further study 22. The theory of consumer choice 23. Frontiers of microeconomics Part VIII: The data of macroeconomics 24 Measuring a nations income 25. Measuring the cost of living Part IX: The real economy in the long run 26. Production and growth 27. Saving, investment and the financial system 28. The natural rate of unemployment Part X: Money and prices in the long run 29. The monetary system 30. Inflation: Its causes and costs Part XI: The macroeconomics of open economies 31. Open-economy macroeconomics: Basic concepts 32. A macroeconomic theory of the open economy Part XII: Short-run economic fluctuations 33. Aggregate demand and aggregate supply 34. The influence of monetary and fiscal policy on aggregate demand 35. The short-run trade-off between inflation and unemployment Part XIII: Final thoughts 36. Five debates over macroeconomic policy.
2012, 936pp, Paperback, 9780170191722, Cengage Learning Australia

learning experience when compared to the pedantic approaches often found in texts. Each chapter in the seventh edition has been thoroughly revised to reflect the most relevant data and critical issues, such as how the rash of foreclosures that continues to plague our economy today is related to the repeal of the 1933 GlassSteagall Act in 1999, as well as emerging issues such as the current research on the Economics of Happiness and its integration into utility analysis. The Keynesian concept of the liquidity trap is new to the text and is added to help explain the factors that undermine the effectiveness of current monetary policy. Also available: Principles of Microeconomics, International Edition, 7e [ISBN: 9781285064833] Principles of Macroeconomics, International Edition, 7e [ISBN: 9781285064864 ] NEW TO THIS EDITION New Concepts: This seventh edition incorporates some new topics and expands on others already covered. For example, attention is given in this edition to the current research on the Economics of Happiness and this new research is integrated into utility analysis. As well, more attention is given in the principles of microeconomics to the role of entrepreneurship. In the principles of macroeconomics, this seventh edition analyzes the 1933 Glass-Steagall Act to show how its repeal in 1999 contributed to the rash of foreclosures that continues to plague our economy. The Keynesian concept of the liquidity trap is new to the text and is added to help explain the factors that undermine the effectiveness of monetary policy. Updated Real Data: When appropriate, tables and graphs have been updated to emphasize and incorporate real 2012 data, which connects theory to the real world increasing student interest and comprehension. Updated Supplement Package: The texts proven supplement package has been revised to include current data, technology updates, and content changes within the text. New Illustrations: Up-to-date illustrations have been classroom-tested in Gottheils own large economics lectures and show students the relevance of economic concepts to current events that are seemingly not related.

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 7E


Fred M. Gottheil, University of Illinois

Bring the study of economics to life with PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS, 7E, International Edition. Awardwinning educator and author Fred Gottheil speaks directly to student experience through a conversational writing style and narrative that uses stories, familiar examples, engaging scenarios, and relevant examples from literature emphasizing that economic principles can be found in all aspects of modern life. The text focuses on the key questions and presents the basic concepts-developing economic analysis step-bystep. The result is a more interactive and enjoyable

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

51

FEATURES Perspectives Feature: Perspectives features found in each chapter are categorized to illustrate how economic applications can be found in many different contexts. For example, women now represent more than 50 percent of labor unions and the respective issues and interests that subsequently affect labor negotiations are analyzed. Chapter Reviews: End-of-Chapter Questions test students understanding of qualitative concepts covered in each chapter, while new Practice Problems test their understanding of quantitative or graphical techniques. Self quizzes provide student 8-10 practice questions with answers provided in the appendices. I n - C h a p t e r S e l f-A s s e s s m e n t : C h e c k Yo u r Understanding sections raise questions at key junctures in the text for students to assess their comprehension as they read. Arrows then point to the portion of the text that contains the explanation. More of these features are now included in each chapter. Interactive Examples: Your Turn features in every chapter provide an example of a concept discussed in the text, then encourage students to visit the Gottheil Web site to post an example of their own, as well as to see what examples other students have come up with. Graphing Problems: End-of-chapter Practice Problems include graphing problems which either ask the student to identify what is wrong with a graph that is intentionally drawn incorrectly, or to reproduce a key graphical model from the chapter. Analytical Research Activities: Economic Consultants features place students in the role of the economist for a hypothetical economic research and analysis firm. These features require economic thinking and analysis, asking students to prepare a report for a client addressing the fundamental economic issues from the chapter. Useful Internet addresses are included to help with research and analysis. CONTENTS PART I: THE BASICS OF ECONOMIC ANALYSIS. 1. Introduction. 2. Production Possibilities and Opportunity Costs. 3. Demand and Supply. PART II: THE MICROECONOMICS OF PRODUCT MARKETS. 4. Elasticity. 5. Happiness, Utility, and Consumer Choice. 6. Price Ceiling and Price Floors. 7. Entrepreneurship and
52

Business Ownership. PART III: THE MICROECONOMICS OF PRODUCT MARKETS. 8. Costs of Production. 9. Maximizing Profit. 10. Identifying Markets and Market Structure. 11. Price and Output in Monopoly, Monopolistic Competition, and Perfect Competition. 12. Price and Output Determination under Oligopoly. 13. Antitrust Regulation. 14. Externalities, Market Failure, and Public Choice. PART IV: THE MICROECONOMICS OF FACTOR MARKETS. 15. Wage Rates in Competitive Labor Markets. 16. Wages and Employment: Monopsony and Labor Unions. 17. Interest, Rent, and Profit. 18. Income Distribution and Poverty. PART V: EMPLOYMENT, INFLATION, AND FISCAL POLICY. 19. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. 20. Gross Domestic Product Accounting. 21. Consumption and Investment. 22. Equilibrium National Income. 23. Fiscal Policy: Coping with Inflation and Unemployment. 24. LongRun Economic Growth and Business Cycles. PART VI: MONEY, BANKING, AND MONETARY POLICY. 25. Money. 26. Money Creation and the Banking System. 27. The Federal Reserve System and Monetary Policy. PART VII: GOVERNMENT AND THE MACROECONOMY. 28. Can Government Really Stabilize the Economy?. 29. Government Spending. 30. Financing Government: Taxes and Debt. PART VIII: THE WORLD ECONOMY. 31. International Trade. 32. Exchange Rates, Balance of Payments, and International Debt. 33. The Economic Problems of Less-Developed Economies.
2014, 928pp, Paperback, 9781285064710, South-Western College

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 9E


Michael Melvin, Arizona State University; William Boyes, Arizona State University

This latest edition of PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS, 9E, International Edition retains the reader-friendly writing style, carefully integrated learning features, and emphasis on global economics to help illustrate
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

the connections between key economic principles and todays actual business practices. This editions updates, timely revisions and memorable examples ensure you are teaching using the latest economic statistics and developments. Revised microeconomics materials emphasize the fundamentals and practical application of current events, while new macroeconomics coverage highlights the recent financial crisis and its global implications. Cutting-edge teaching and learning technology and a full range of supplements, including the world-leading Aplia homework system and CourseMate online tools, help you create a complete economics program that clarifies and emphasizes the importance of economic concepts for career and business success throughout the world. Also available: Principles of Microeconomics, International Edition, 9e [ISBN: 9781111970185] Principles of Macroeconomics, International Edition, 9e [ISBN: 9781111970192] NEW TO THIS EDITION UPDATED ECONOMIC INSIGHT BOXES EMPHASIZE THE RELEVANCE OF CONCEPTS TO CURRENT EVENTS. Fresh new Economic Insights throughout this edition highlight some of todays most current events to focus readers attention on the relevance and realworld applications of the concepts in the chapter. NEW AND UPDATED ECONOMICALLY SPEAKING AND COMMENTARY FEATURES HIGHLIGHT THE ECONOMIC IMPACT OF TODAYS MOST IMPORTANT WORLD EVENTS. Introduce your students to recent newspaper and magazine articles that highlight important world events and their economic causes and consequences in updated and new Economically Speaking and Commentary features at the end of each chapter. These familiar, interesting, and memorable examples help your students appreciate the importance of the material they are learning in your course. THE LATEST ECONOMIC STATISTICS THROUGHOUT THIS EDITION ENSURE YOU ARE TEACHING YOUR STUDENTS USING THE MOST CONTEMPORARY INFORMATION. Updates, numerous additions and timely revisions throughout all parts of this new edition represent the latest thinking from leading economists on important macroeconomic and microeconomic phenomena. NEW COVERAGE HIGHLIGHTS THE RECENT FINANCIAL CRISIS AND ITS GLOBAL IMPLICATIONS. The authors have condensed the introduction, while providing abundant important coverage of the recent
International Edition

financial crisis as well as the associated recession and the central bank policies to counter its impact. A new section emphasizes how the financial crisis began in the United States before spreading globally. REVISED MICROECONOMIC COVERAGE FURTHER CLARIFIES THE FUNDAMENTALS AND THEIR APPLICATION TO CURRENT EVENTS. New meaningful examples, extensive revisions to the chapter on elasticity, further development of the debate on government economic intervention, and a new discussion of the Economic Freedom Index ensure students better understand microeconomics concepts. This edition also offers additional coverage of game theory, updated information on health care costs, and a detailed examination of income distribution. OPTIONAL COURSEMATE ONLINE RESOURCES SUPPORT INTERACTIVE LEARNING AND CLASS ENGAGEMENT. Watch student comprehension soar as your class works with the printed text and this new, optional text-specific website. This ECONOMICS CourseMate brings course concepts to life with interactive learning, study, and exam preparation tools. FEATURES UNIQUE, PROVEN LEARNING FEATURES IMPROVE COMPREHENSION AND STUDENT PERFORMANCE. This popular texts one-of-a-kind, proven pedagogical program helps improve both comprehension and performance. Students attain the knowledge and skills to succeed in class and to develop an understanding of core economic principles essential for success throughout their careers. FUNDAMENTAL QUESTIONS DIRECT STUDENTS FOCUS TO KEY ISSUES. As students read and prepare for class, this books useful Fundamental Questions for each chapter help direct students attention to key issues. Chapter summaries and the books supplements further reinforce these themes and effectively guide students study. CONVENIENT, INTEGRATED REFERENCING SYSTEM ENABLES STUDENTS TO WORK EFFICIENTLY. With this books integrated referencing system, students can easily explore and review the topics they need more, allowing them to work more efficiently and effectively. LEADING APLIA ONLINE HOMEWORK SYSTEM INCREASES STUDENT EFFORTS AND ENGAGEMENT. Aplia offers interactive tools to help prepare your
53

www.cengageasia.com

economics students and increase student effort and engagement. Students stay on top of coursework with regularly scheduled homework assignments while Aplias high quality automatic grading provides detailed, immediate feedback. CONTENTS Part I: INTRODUCTION TO THE PRICE SYSTEM. 1. Economics: The World Around You. 2. Choice, Opportunity Costs, and Specialization. 3. Markets, Demand and Supply, and the Price System. 4. The Market System and the Private and Public Sectors. Part II: MACROECONOMIC BASICS. 5. National Income Accounting. 6. An Introduction to the Foreign Exchange Market and the Balance of Payments. 7. Unemployment and Inflation. 8. Macroeconomic Equilibrium: Aggregate Demand and Supply. 9. Aggregate Expenditures. 10. Income and Expenditures Equilibrium. Part III: MACROECONOMIC POLICY. 11. Fiscal Policy. 12. Money and Banking. 13. Monetary Policy. 14. Macroeconomic Policy: Tradeoffs, Expectations, Credibility, and Sources of Business Cycles. 15. Macroeconomic Viewpoints: New Keynesian, Monetarist, and New Classical. 16. Economic Growth. 17. Development Economics. 18. Globalization. Part IV: PRODUCT MARKET BASICS. 19. Elasticity: Demand and Supply. 20. Consumer Choice. 21. Supply: The Costs of Doing Business. Part V: PRODUCT MARKETS. 22. Profit Maximization. 23. Perfect Competition. 24. Monopoly. 25. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 26. Antitrust, Regulation, and Public Finance. 27. Market Failures, Government Failures, and Rent Seeking. Part VI: RESOURCE MARKETS. 28. Resource Markets. 29. The Labor Market. 30. Capital Markets. 31. The Land Market and Natural Resources. Part VII: CURRENT ISSUES INVOLVING THE PUBLIC SECTOR AND THE MARKET ECONOMY. 32. Aging, Social Security, and Health Care. 33. Income Distribution, Poverty, and Government Policy. Part VIII: ISSUES IN INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND FINANCE. 34. World Trade Equilibrium. 35. International Trade Restrictions. 36. Exchange Rates and Financial Links Between Countries.
2013, 896pp, Paperback, 9781111970437, South-Western College

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 6E


N. Gregory Mankiw, Professor of Economics, Harvard University

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS, 6e, International Edition became a best seller after its introduction and continues to be the most popular and widely used text in the economics classroom. Instructors found it the perfect complement to their teaching. A text by a superb writer and economist that stressed the most important concepts without overwhelming students with an excess of detail was a formula that was quickly imitated, but has yet to be matched. The sixth edition features a strong revision of content in all thirty-six chapters. Dozens of new applications emphasize the real-world relevance of economics for todays students through interesting news articles, realistic case studies, and engaging problems. The premier ancillary package is the most extensive in the industry, using a team of instructors/preparers that have been with the project since the first edition. The text material is again fully integrated into Aplia, the best-selling online homework solution. I have tried to put myself in the position of someone seeing economics for the first time. My goal is to emphasize the material that students should and do find interesting about the study of the economy.-N. Gregory Mankiw. Also available: Principles of Microeconomics, International Editon, 6e [ISBN: 9780538453363] Principles of Macroeconomics, International Edition, 6e [ISBN: 9780538453387] Brief Principles of Macroeconomics, International Edition, 6e [ISBN: 9780538453400] Essentials of Economics, Intenational Edition, 6e [ISBN: 9780538453486] NEW TO THIS EDITION The sixth edition will be available with the most

54

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

advanced new products for student and instructor choice, engagement, and outcomes. Aplia, the bestselling online homework solution. CourseMate is a new product that integrates a digital edition of the textbook with a suite of student engagement tools such as video, graphing practice, tutorials, games, and more. CourseMate also includes Engagement Tracker, which lets professors see which of the resources students are actually using. The new sixth edition of PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS, 6e, International Edition contains extensively updated coverage of areas impacted by the financial crisis. New Problems and Applications appear throughout the sixth edition, providing an effective, integrated way for students to assess their mastery of the material and to review more efficiently for assignments and exams. FEATURES Created by economist Ron Cronovich of Carthage College, Premium PowerPoint Presentations feature chapter-by-chapter slides designed to ease your course preparation time while increasing student involvement in the classroom. The presentations organize lecture points into sections that students can easily digest, animate graphs the way you might draw them, and include Student Note Prompt handouts to facilitate effective note taking without distracting students from active participation in class. In the News boxes include excerpts from many newspaper articles and encourage students to apply basic economic theory to discover how economics can provide an illuminating new perspective and enable greater understanding of world events. FYI boxes provide additional material to expand key concepts and discussions by offering a glimpse into the history of economic thought, clarifying technical issues, and exploring supplementary topics you might choose to complement your core lectures. Economic theory is most useful and interesting when applied to actual events and policies, which is why the text contains numerous Case Studies to vividly illustrate the real-world applications and consequences of key principles. Quick Quizzes follow each major section to help students check their comprehension of what they just learned and to focus their review when preparing for exams.
International Edition

Each chapter contains a variety of problems and applications that encourage students to apply the material they have learned. These practical, interesting activities serve equally well as homework assignments and starting points for lively classroom discussions. CONTENTS PART I: INTRODUCTION. 1. Ten Principles of Economics. 2. Thinking Like an Economist. 3. Interdependence and the Gains from Trade. PART II: HOW MARKETS WORK. 4. The Market Forces of Supply and Demand. 5. Elasticity and Its Application. 6. Supply, Demand, and Government Policies. PART III: MARKETS AND WELFARE. 7. Consumers, Producers, and the Efficiency of Markets. 8. Applications: The Costs of Taxation. 9. Application: International Trade. PART IV: THE ECONOMICS OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR. 10. Externalities. 11. Public Goods and Common Resources. 12. The Design of the Tax System. PART V: FIRM BEHAVIOR AND THE ORGANIZATION OF INDUSTRY. 13. The Costs of Production. 14. Firms in Competitive Markets. 15. Monopoly. 16. Monopolistic Competition. 17. Oligopoly. PART VI: THE ECONOMICS OF THE LABOR MARKET. 18. The Markets for the Factors of Production. 19. Earnings and Discrimination. 20. Income Inequality and Poverty. PART VII: TOPICS FOR FURTHER STUDY. 21. The Theory of Consumer Choice. 22. Frontiers in Microeconomics. PART VIII: THE DATA OF MACROECONOMICS. 23. Measuring a Nations Income. 24. Measuring the Cost of Living. PART IX: THE REAL ECONOMY IN THE LONG RUN. 25. Production and Growth. 26. Saving, Investment, and the Financial System. 27. Tools of Finance. 28. Unemployment and Its Natural Rate. PART X: MONEY AND PRICES IN THE LONG RUN. 29. The Monetary System. 30. Money Growth and Inflation. PART XI: THE MACROECONOMICS OF OPEN ECONOMICS. 31. Open-Economy Macroeconomics: Basic Concepts. 32. A Macroeconomic Theory of the Open Economy. PART XII: SHORT-RUN ECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS. 33. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. 34. The Influence of Monetary and Fiscal Policy on Aggregate Demand. 35. The Short-Run Tradeoff between Inflation and Unemployment. PART XIII: FINAL THOUGHTS. 36. Six Debates over Macroeconomic Policy.
2012, 896pp, Paperback, 9780538453424, South-Western College

www.cengageasia.com

55

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS: AN ASIAN EDITION, 2E


Euston Quah , Nanyang Technological University; Peter Wilson , National University of Singapore; N. Gregory Mankiw , Harvard University

students The classic ten principles of economics, introduced in Chapter One, and incorporated throughout the text, help students to reinforce their understanding of these key economic principles A clear and conversational writing style to present economic concepts in a way that is very accessible to students A quick quiz after each major section allows students to check their comprehension before they move on to the next section Each chapter ends with a variety of problems and applications to provide students with the opportunity to apply what they have learned CONTENTS PART 1 Introduction. Chapter 1 Ten Principles of Economics. Chapter 2 Thinking Like an Economist. Chapter 3 Interdependence and the Gains from Trade. PART 2 Supply and Demand I: How Markets Work Chapter 4 The Market Forces of Supply and Demand. Chapter 5 Elasticity and Its Application. Chapter 6 Supply, Demand, and Government Policies. PART 3 Supply and Demand II: Markets and Welfare Chapter 7 Consumers, Producers, and the Efficiency of Markets. Chapter 8 Application: The Costs of Taxation. Chapter 9 Application: International Trade. PART 4 The Economics of the Public Sector Chapter 10 Externalities. Chapter 11 Public Goods and Common Resources. Chapter 12 The Design of the Tax System. PART 5 Firm Behavior and the Organization of Industry Chapter 13 The Costs of Production. Chapter 14 Firms in Competitive Markets. Chapter 15 Monopoly. Chapter 16 Oligopoly. Chapter 17 Monopolistic Competition. PART 6 The Economics of Labor Markets Chapter 18 The Markets for the Factors of Production. Chapter 19 Earnings and Discrimination. Chapter 20 Income Inequality and Poverty. PART 7 Topics for Further Study Chapter 21 The Theory of Consumer Choice. Chapter 22 Frontiers of Microeconomics. PART 8 The Data for Macroeconomics Chapter 23 Measuring a Nations Income. Chapter 24 Measuring the Cost of Living. PART 9 The Real Economy in the Long Run Chapter 25 Production and Growth. Chapter 26 Saving, Investment, and the Financial System. Chapter 27 The Basic Tools of Finance. Chapter 28 Unemployment and Its Natural Rate. PART 10 Money and Prices in the Long Run Chapter 29 The Monetary System. Chapter 30 Money Growth and Inflation. PART 11 The Macroeconomics of Open Economies Chapter 31 OpenEconomy Macroeconomics : Basic Concepts. Chapter 32 A Macroeconomic Theory of the Open Economy. PART 12
International Edition

This is the second edition of the bestselling Asian adaptation of N. Gregory Mankiws market leading textbook, Principles of Economics. While maintaining all the strengths of the first Asian edition and the original book, Professor Euston Quah and Dr. Peter Wilson have provided updated materials and examples that are most relevant to students in Asia. The book reflects Asian economic institutions and policies, features companies that operate in the region, and includes economic data from various Asian countries. It, however, retains a strong international focus to enable students to place the Asian experience in a global context. The book provides students with a solid foundation to the principles and concepts of economics. Written for students taking economics for the first time, it focuses on core concepts and how these concepts are applied to the real world. Examples and cases throughout the text show students the relevance of the theory they are learning. NEW TO THIS EDITION Highlights of the second Asian edition include new topics such as the Keynesian backlash following the global financial crisis between 2007 and 2009, the minimum wage debate in Singapore and negative externalities such as climate change and transboundary pollution New to this edition too- CengageNow, an online teaching and learning resource that gives lecturers more control over their lessons, and improves student understanding and performance FEATURES A wealth of Asian examples, case studies, and news articles to make the material more relevant to Asian
56

www.cengageasia.com

Short-Run Economic Fluctuations Chapter 33 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. Chapter 34 The Influence of Monetary and Fiscal Policy on Aggregate Demand. Chapter 35 The Short-Run Tradeoff between Inflation and Unemployment. PART 13 Final Thoughts Chapter 36 Five Debates over Macroeconomic Policy.
2012, 906pp, Paperback, 9789814410120, Cengage Learning Asia

NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW! Economic Content Standards (ECS) from the National Council of Economic Education are set in the margin where the content is introduced. This addition helps to establish clear learning objectives and ties the text to these objectives NEW! Over the years, student questions have been tracked. These FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) are highlighted in the margins and offset by an icon with students raising their hands in class. NEW! Chapter openers have been added to each chapter. These are designed to capture the students interest as soon as they begin reading the chapter. NEW! A number of new In the News, Global Watch and photos with captions have been added. Many of these new features connect the real world to student lives. FEATURES The text builds on well-known principles of learning and memory to help students absorb the material more easily and completely. Each chapter includes several short sections of just three to six pages that function as self-contained learning units, providing greater flexibility for instructors and allowing students to more readily grasp and retain information. Each chapter is packed with material highlighting the connection between economics and everyday issues, including hot topics such as sex on television, property rights, song swapping, and more. In the News synopses present relevant, thought-provoking news stories, while Global Watch features explore economic causes and implications of international current events, and Using What Youve Learned exercises challenge students to apply key concepts from the text. An appealing design and abundant visual elements keep students engaged and actively learning, while photos, graphs, tables, and charts throughout the text help to illustrate, clarify, and reinforce key economic principles. Sextons dynamic writing style helps students stay interested in the material, while the texts brief, easy-to-digest sections, built-in review questions, and frequent real-life examples and applications make learning easier and more effective. The Aplia supplement is a comprehensive collection of interactive problem sets, analysis, tutorials, and experiments that require students to take an active
57

THE EXPLORATION OF ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 6E


Robert L. Sexton, Pepperdine University

THE EXPLORATION OF ECONOMICS, 6E International Edition is not a traditional encyclopedic text filled with technical details. Rather, it is an engaging, modern, back-to-basics book designed to promote economic literacy and help students appreciate how economics affects their everyday lives. This reader-friendly text includes innovative learning tools, a visually appealing design, and captivating content to encourage students to read the chapters eagerly and help them master the material more easily. Packed with examples from current events and pop culture, THE EXPLORATION OF ECONOMICS, 6E International Edition succeeds like no other text in making economics less intimidating and achieving the authors primary goal: conveying the real-world relevance of economics and inspiring in students the same excitement he felt when taking his first economics class. Also available: The Exploration of Microeconomics, International Edition, 6e [ISBN: 9781111970406] The Exploration of Macroeconomics, International Edition, 6e [ISBN: 9781111970390]

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

role in the learning process. Students benefit from hands-on applications without creating extra work for instructors. Homework that is automatically graded and recorded can be assigned. CONTENTS Part I: INTRODUCTION. 1. The Role and Method of Economics. 2. Economics: Eight Powerful Ideas. 3. Scarcity, Trade-Off, and Production Possibilities. Part II: SUPPLY AND DEMAND. 4. Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium. 5. Markets in Motion and Price Controls. 6. Elasticities. Part III: MARKET EFFICIENCY, MARKET FAILURE, AND THE PUBLIC SYSTEM. 7. Market Efficiency and Welfare. 8. Market Failure. 9. Public Finance and Public Choice. Part IV: HOUSEHOLDS AND MARKET STRUCTURE. 10. Consumer Choice Theory. 11. The Firm: Production and Costs. 12. Firms in Perfectly Competitive Markets. 13. Monopoly and Antitrust. 14. Monopolistic Competition and Product Differentiation. 15. Oligopoly and Strategic Behavior. Part V: INPUT MARKETS AND MICROECONOMIC POLICY ISSUES. 16. The Markets for Labor, Capital, and Land. 17. Income, Poverty and Health Care. Part VI: MACROECONOMICS FOUNDATIONS. 18. Introduction of Macroeconomics: Unemployment, Inflation, and Economic Fluctuations. 19. Measuring Economic Performance. 20. Economic Growth in the Global Economy. 21. Financial Markets, Savings, and Investment. Part VII: THE MACROECONOMIC MODELS. 22. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. 23. The Aggregate Expenditure Model. Part VIII: MACROECONOMIC POLICY. 24. Fiscal Policy. 25. Monetary Institutions. 26. The Federal Reserve System and Monetary Policy. 27. Issues in Macroeconomic Theory and Policy. Part IX: THE GLOBAL ECONOMY. 28. International Trade. 29. International Finance.
2013, 944pp, Paperback, 9781111970383, South-Western College

UNDERSTANDING ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 14E


Russell S. Sobel, West Virginia University; James D. Gwartney, Florida State University; Richard L. Stroup, Montana State University; David A. Macpherson, Trinity University

UNDERSTANDING ECONOMICS, 14E, International Edition reflects current economic conditions, enabling students to apply economic concepts to the world around them. The up-to-date text includes analysis and explanation of measures of economic activity in todays market. It also includes highlights of the recession of 2008-2009, and an in-depth look at the lives and contributions of notable economists. UNDERSTANDING ECONOMICS, 14E, International Edition dispels common economic myths. The text uses the invisible hand metaphor to explain economic theory, demonstrating how it works to stimulate the economy. The 14th edition includes a robust set of online multimedia learning tools. Tutorials, analyses and quizzes are designed to support classroom work and increase student performance. Also available: Understanding Microeconomics, International Edition, 14e [ISBN: 9781111970581] Understanding Macroeconomics, International Edition, 14e [ISBN: 9781111971601] NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW! Text is streamlined to make it more accessible to students and instructors. NEW! Addenda to some chapters are moved to the text website: (chapter 6) Who Produces, Who Pays, and Why it Matters and (chapter 20) Consumer Choice and Indifference Curves. NEW! Material on The Keynesian Aggregate Expenditure Model (chapter 11) is moved to the text website. NEW! Chapter 5 has a new section on Market Failure and Government Failure.
International Edition

58

www.cengageasia.com

NEW! New material on Cash for Clunkers (chapter 6) shows the short-sightedness of political action. NEW! Chapter 12 integrates the idea that constant policy changes generate uncertainty and undermine growth. FEATURES Applies economic theory to current real-world issues and controversies, allowing students to apply what they learn directly to pertinent topics in the world around them. Offers historical vignettes on the lives of notable economists, providing an opportunity to weave economic history into the classroom. In-depth analysis of the government response to the financial crisis--discussing both the political economy and federal budget implications. CONTENTS PART I: THE ECONOMIC WAY OF THINKING. 1. The Economic Approach. 2. Some Tools of the Economist. Part II: MARKETS AND GOVERNMENT. 3. Supply, Demand, and the Market Process. 4. Supply and Demand: Applications and Extensions. 5. Difficult Cases for the Market, and the Role of Government. 6. The Economics of Collective Decision Making. Part III: CORE MACROECONOMICS. 7. Taking the Nations Economic Pulse. 8. Economic Fluctuations, Unemployment, and Inflation. 9. An Introduction to Basic Macroeconomic Markets. 10. Dynamic Change, Economic Fluctuations, and the ADAS Model. 11. Fiscal Policy: The Keynesian View and Historical Perspective. 12. Fiscal Policy: Incentives, and Secondary Effects. 13. Money and the Banking System. 14. Modern Macroeconomics and Monetary Policy. 15. Stabilization Policy, Output, and Employment. 16. Creating an Environment for Growth and Prosperity. 17. Institutions, Policies, and Cross-Country Differences in Income and Growth. Part IV: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS. 18. Gaining from International Trade. 19. International Finance and the Foreign Exchange Market. Part V: CORE MICROECONOMICS. 20. Consumer Choice and Elasticity. 21. Costs and the Supply of Goods. 22. Price Takers and the Competitive Process. 23. Price-Searcher Markets with Low Entry Barriers. 24. Price-Searcher Markets with High Entry Barriers. 25. The Supply of and Demand for Productive Resources. 26. Earnings, Productivity, and the Job Market. 27. Investment, the Capital Market, and the Wealth of Nations. 28. Income Inequality and Poverty. Part VI: APPLYING THE BASICS: SPECIAL TOPICS IN ECONOMICS. Special Topic 1
International Edition

Government Spending and Taxation. Special Topic 2 The Internet: How Is It Changing the Economy? Special Topic 3 The Economics of Social Security. Special Topic 4 The Stock Market: Its Function, Performance, and Potential as an Investment Opportunity. Special Topic 5 The Crisis of 2008: Causes and Lessons for the Future. Special Topic 6 Lessons from the Great Depression. Special Topic 7 Lessons from the Japanese Experience. Special Topic 8 The Federal Budget and the National Debt. Special Topic 9 The Economics of Health Care. Special Topic 10 School Choice: Can It Improve the Quality of Education in America? Special Topic 11 Earnings Differences between Men and Women. Special Topic 12 Do Labor Unions Increase the Wages of Workers? Special Topic 13 Are We Running Out of Resources? Special Topic 14 Difficult Environmental Cases and the Role of Government.
2013, 816pp, Paperback, 9781111971595, South-Western College

ECON MACRO 3 (WITH ECONOMICS COURSEMATE WITH EBOOK PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 3E
William A. McEachern, University of Connecticut

Created through a student-tested, faculty-approved review process with an extensive number of students and faculty, ECON: MACRO, 3E is an engaging and accessible solution that accommodates the diverse lifestyles of todays learners at a value-based price all without sacrificing content. ECON: MACRO, 3E truly leads by example as award-winning instructor and author Will McEachern takes a just-in-time approach -- introducing material just as it is needed to develop an argument. Dr. McEachern teaches by example, using familiar examples and illustrations drawn from students actual daily lives to vividly demonstrate that when students show up for class the first day, they each
59

www.cengageasia.com

come with at least 17 years of first-hand, life experiences in making intuitive economic choices and dealing with economic institutions and events. Using a decidedly user-friendly tone, Dr. McEachern connects these life experiences to key macroeconomic concepts. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW FIFTH ERA IN CHAPTER 5 REFLECTS THE MOST RECENT DEVELOPMENTS FROM THE RECESSION AND BEYOND. Keep your students up to date on the very latest macroeconomic developments as a new fifth era now in the Introduction to Macroeconomics (Ch. 5) covers the recession of 2007-2009 and beyond. ADDITIONAL EXPLANATION NOW FURTHER DETAILS HOW GDP IS COMPUTED. Familiarize your students with GDP and how it is computed with additional, new clarification and explanations in Chapter 6. REORGANIZED KEY CHAPTERS CLARIFY DISCUSSION OF TODAYS MOST RECENT EVENTS. The chapter on the U.S. economy now appears earlier (Ch. 6) in response to increased interest in the recession and short-run fluctuations. The chapter on unemployment is now Chapter 7 and the chapter on growth is now Chapter 8. REVISED GDP FIGURES REFLECT THE LATEST INFORMATION. All GDP figures in this editions Chapter 9 are revised to reflect 2005 chained dollars. This chapter also closely examines todays market demand for investment. N E W COV E R AG E E X A M I N E S LO N G -T E R M UNEMPLOYMENT. This edition now offers a fresh, new discussion and examination of the impact of long-term unemployment (Ch. 11) in todays economy. NEW EXAMINATION OF STIMULUS PACKAGE PROVIDES STUDENTS WITH BETTER UNDERSTANDING OF THIS LATEST DEVELOPMENT. As part of the books reflection of todays latest events and developments in macroeconomics today, this edition takes a close look at the stimulus package in Chapter 12. NEW MATERIAL REFLECTS THE LATEST CHANGES IN TODAYS BANKING REGULATIONS. You can be sure you are presenting the latest changes in the industry to your students as this books coverage reflects the most up-to-date changes in todays banking regulations (Ch. 15). NEW COVERAGE EXAMINES THE FEDS AGGRESSIVE
60

ACTIONS TO STABILIZE THE ECONOMY AND MORE. This edition discusses and evaluates the aggressive policies by the Fed to stabilize the economy (Ch. 16). Students also examine the most recent monetary policy developments. CONTENTS Part I: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS. 1. The Art and Science of Economic Analysis. 2. Economic Tools and Economic Systems. 3. Economic Decision Makers. 4. Demand, Supply, and Markets. Part II: FUNDAMENTALS OF MACROECONOMICS. 5. Introduction to Macroeconomics. 6. Tracking the U.S. Economy. 7. Unemployment and Inflation. 8. Productivity and Growth. 9. Aggregate Expenditure. 10. Aggregate Expenditure and Aggregate Demand. 11. Aggregate Supply. Part III: FISCAL AND MONETARY POLICY. 12. Fiscal Policy. 13. Federal Budgets and Public Policy. 14. Money and the Financial System. 15. Banking and the Money Supply. 16. Monetary Theory and Policy. 17. Macro Policy Debate: Active or Passive? Part IV: THE INTERNATIONAL SETTING. 18. International Trade. 19. International Finance. 20. Economic Development.
2012, 352pp, Paperback, 9781111826697, South-Western College

ECON MICRO3 (WITH ECONOMICS COURSEMATE WITH EBOOK PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 3E
William A. McEachern, University of Connecticut

Created through a student-tested, faculty-approved review process with an extensive number of students and faculty, ECON: MICRO, 3E is an engaging and accessible solution that accommodates the diverse lifestyles of todays learners at a value-based price all without sacrificing content. ECON: MICRO, 3E truly
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

leads by example as award-winning instructor and author Will McEachern takes a just-in-time approach -- introducing material just as it is needed to develop an argument. Dr. McEachern teaches by example, using familiar examples and illustrations drawn from students actual daily lives to vividly demonstrate that when students show up for class the first day, they each come with at least 17 years of first-hand, life experiences in making intuitive economic choices and dealing with economic institutions and events. Using a decidedly user-friendly tone, Dr. McEachern connects these life experiences to key economic concepts. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW MATERIAL HIGHLIGHTS THE IMPACT OF THE RECENT RECESSION ON MICROECONOMICS DECISIONS. Coverage of macroeconomics and economic fluctuations in Chapter 1 sets the groundwork for discussions within the micro section of how the recent recession has affected particular micro decisions. NEW DIAMOND CASE STUDY HIGHLIGHTS RECENT GLOBAL ECONOMIC TURMOIL TO EXEMPLIFY MACRO ECONOMY SPILLING INTO MICRO ECONOMY. This new case study in Chapter 9 examines details of the global economic turmoil of 2008 and 2009 to demonstrate how the macro economy spills into the micro economy. NEW COVERAGE HIGHLIGHTS TODAYS GROWING INTEREST IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP. A new section within the Capital, Interest, and Corporate Finance chapter (Ch.13) emphasizes entrepreneurship in todays times. NEW MATERIAL EMPHASIZES BEHAVIORAL E CO N O M I C S A N D FAC TO R S I M PAC T I N G ECONOMIC DECISIONS. A new section added to coverage of Transaction Costs and Imperfect Information (Ch. 14) highlights behavioral economics to help students better understand the factors behind and impact of economic decisions by individuals and institutions today. NEW REVISED MERGER GUIDELINES KEEP STUDENT LEARNING UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DEVELOPMENTS. This editions chapter on Economic Regulation and Antitrust Policy (Ch. 15) provides new coverage that reflects revised merger guidelines from the FTC and Justice Department. NEW MATERIAL REFLECTS RECENT RELEVANT
International Edition

EVENTS, SUCH AS ECONOMIC RAMIFICATIONS OF OIL SPILLS. In the chapter on Externalities and the Environment (Ch. 17) new discussion highlights the impact of oil spills and water pollution. A new case study specifically explores the recent BP oil spill. NEW COVERAGE OF WELFARE ADDRESSES RECENT DECLINES. A new section in Chapter 18 highlights how todays welfare rolls have declined and the impact of this on the economy. FEATURES AN INNOVATIVE COMBINATION OF CONTENT IN PRINT AND ONLINE PROVIDES A SOLID CORE TEXT AND WEALTH OF COMPREHENSIVE MULTIMEDIA TEACHING AND LEARNING ASSETS. Based on extensive input from student focus groups and surveys and from interviews with numerous faculty and students, this magazine-style core text and wealth of integrated multimedia teaching and learning resources produce an engaging and accessible solution that appeals to different learning styles at a value-based price. CONTENTS Part I: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS. 1. The Art and Science of Economic Analysis. 2. Economic Tools and Economic Systems. 3. Economic Decision Makers. 4. Demand, Supply, and Markets. Part II: INTRODUCTION TO THE MARKET SYSTEM. 5. Elasticity of Demand and Supply. 6. Consumer Choice and Demand. 7. Production and Cost in the Firm. Part III: MARKET STRUCTURE AND PRICING. 8. Perfect Competition. 9. Monopoly. 10. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. Part IV: RESOURCE MARKETS. 11. Resource Markets. 12. Labor Markets and Labor Unions. 13. Capital, Interest, Entrepreneurship and Corporate Finance. 14. Transaction Costs, Imperfect Information, and Behavioral Economics. Part V: MARKET FAILURE AND PUBLIC POLICY. 15. Economic Regulation and Antitrust Policy. 16. Public Goods and Public Choice. 17. Externalities and Environment. 18. Income Distribution and Poverty. Part VI: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS. 19. International Trade. 20. International Finance. 21. Economic Development.
2012, 352pp, Paperback, 9781111822217, South-Western College

www.cengageasia.com

61

microeconomics. Theory refreshers provide a quick way to revise a key concept or theory that is important for understanding the application in a particular chapter. CONTENTS Section 1: Scarcity, decision-making, incentives and trade: an introduction to key concepts in economics Section 2: Demand, supply and equilibrium in competitive markets Section 3: International trade Section 4: Market failure and government policy Section 5: Theory of the firm and managerial economics Section 6: Game theory Section 7: Labour markets Section 8: Economics of information
2013, 292pp, Paperback, 9780170225441, Cengage Learning Australia

MICROECONOMICS, 2E
CASE STUDIES AND APPLICATIONS
Jeff Borland, University of Melbourne

Microeconomics: case studies and applications 2nd edition is an essential text that supports Cengage Learnings suite of Economics titles. The text contains case studies focussing on current events in economics, a theory refresher for each section, and questions. The case studies are written specifically for students at a level they can easily relate to, and are presented in such a way that the theoretical concept being taught can be applied. They are intended as a students stepping stone to using authentic news articles. NEW TO THIS EDITION Expanded coverage of core microeconomic concepts Up-to-date material with sufficient use of current topics FEATURES Support for core microeconomics texts consolidates and encourages application of newly acquired concepts. Questions to think about give students a way to test their knowledge about the core concept and application these have been designed to develop critical thinking and analytical skills as well as to demonstrate application. A total of 48 cases - Four new case studies have been introduced (2.8 on CEO salaries, 2.9 on indirect taxes, 4.4 on positive externalities and 5.6 mineral resources tax). A new section on the economics of information with case studies on insurance (8.1) and pay-forperformance schemes (8.2) has been added. This new section is intended to increase the books value as a resource in teaching intermediate-level

PUBLIC FINANCE

POLICY APPLICATIONS AND PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC FINANCE, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH INFOTRAC COLLEGE EDITION 2-SEMESTER AND ECONOMIC APPLICATIONS PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 2E
John E. Anderson, University of Nebraska, Lincoln

Emphasizing policymaking and policy analysis, POLICY APPLICATIONS AND PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC FINANCE, 2E, International Edition uses a variety of applications to deliver modern treatment of everything from overviews and definitions for undergraduates, to mathematical derivations of advanced topics for advanced and graduate-level courses. The text evenly addresses local, state, and federal issues, and shows students how to use fiscal federalism as a framework
International Edition

62

www.cengageasia.com

for analysis. Anderson also demonstrates the effects of international concerns on U.S. public policy, lacing the text with topical discussions on entities and issues that greatly affect the entire world, such as the IMF, World Bank, and Kyoto Protocol. NEW TO THIS EDITION Updated policy studies throughout the entire textbook: This includes Deepwater Horizon Gulf Oil Leak; Climate Change; The Kyoto Protocol; State Flood and Earthquake Insurance; International Tax Havens; Medicaid Fraud; Tax Reform Rates; and much more. There are over 25 new or revised policy studies within the textbook. FEATURES Thought-Provoking Policy Studies: Appearing throughout the text and companion websites, this enlightening feature highlights current policy debates to better illustrate chapter content. Topics include the Samaritans Dilemma, IRAs, The European Union, Health Insurance Economies of Scale, Food-stamp Trafficking, Preserving Old-growth Forests, Municipal Bond Financing, Racketeering and Smuggling, and many tax-related issues, such as Tax Reform Proposals, Flat Tax, Property Tax and Home Values, and more. Strategic Game Theory Discussions: Integrated throughout the text, Game Theory models and discussions like a Game Theoretic Motivation for Government and a version of the Beekeeper and the Orchardists help students develop analytical skills and perform better in your course. Special Attention to Corporate Income Taxation: From fundamental issues to examples drawn from recent events, the text puts extra emphasis on the important subject of Corporate Tax, which includes an in-depth look at Enrons Corporate Tax issues. Unique Policymaking and Policy Analysis Coverage: Unlike any other public finance text on the market, this text devotes a full chapter to this topic, giving students a real-world glimpse of how public finance policy is actually made, along with a chapter-closing discussion about careers in the field and ongoing educational opportunities. CONTENTS 1. Economics of the Public Sector. 2. Methods and Measurements in Public Finance. 3. Welfare Economics

and Public Goods. 4. Externalities. 5. Income Distribution and Transfer Programs. 6. Collective Decision Making. 7. Benefit-Cost Analysis in Program Evaluation. 8. The Pricing of Public Goods and Services. 9. Social Insurance Programs. 10. The Structure of Taxes. 11. Efficiency Effects of Taxes and Subsidies. 12. Incentive Effects of Taxation. 13. Equity Aspects of Taxes and Expenditures. 14. Income and Payroll Taxes. 15. The Corporate Income Tax. 16. Sales and Excise Taxes. 17. Property Taxes. 18. Deficit Finance, Government Budgets and Borrowing. 19. Multilevel Government Finance. 20. The Economics of Local Governments. 21. Policy Analysis and Policy Making.
2012, 768pp, Paperback, 9781111526986, South-Western College

PUBLIC FINANCE, 10E


A CONTEMPORARY APPLICATION THEORY POLICY, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH ECONOMIC APPLICATIONS, INFOTRAC 1-SEMESTER PRINTED ACCESS CARD)
David N. Hyman, North Carolina State University

In this upper-level undergraduate text, David Hyman delivers a solid economics-oriented approach to public finance and public policy. The 10th edition of PUBLIC FINANCE, International Edition addresses public issues that will confront the United States and other nations throughout the new millennium. Dr. Hyman first emphasizes the economic theory of public goods and how to best provide them. He then builds in relevant applications to illustrate the main economics points and ensure solid understanding. Packed with timely, real-world examples, this text sparks lively discussion and debate with its convincing coverage of hot topics using the latest government statistics and recent scholarly research.

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

63

NEW TO THIS EDITION All data on government spending and revenues has been updated to 2008 or the latest available year. Public expenditure data has been revised using the latest National Income and Product Account data for government consumption and investment documenting the rise in the share of the public sector to 35% of GDP since 2001. The impact of the 2007-2009 recession on revenues and spending is discussed, along with the provisions of the stimulus package embodied in the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 that affect state and federal government spending and how the tax system is used to help stimulate the economy. More on issues relating to Social Security pensions, including analysis of how aging of the population, retirement decisions, and labor force participation of the elderly affect the economy and spending for pensions. More analysis of Medicare and Medicaid, government spending on health care, and issues involved in extending health care to the uninsured. More analysis of the federal budget deficit, showing how the recession and the policies of the Bush and Obama administrations have affected federal spending, taxes, and government debt. FEATURES The cutting-edge 10th edition offers an intriguing view into public policy, addressing issues that will confront the United States and other nations throughout the new millennium. It thoroughly addresses current issues in public finance and taxation, including indifference curve analysis, producer and consumer surplus, and tax incidence. Professor Hyman presents critical concepts in the context of real-world, right-now issues. Unlike other texts which focus primarily on policy issues, Dr. Hyman emphasizes the economic theory of public goods and how best to provide them and then builds in applications to illustrate the main economics points. Offering a solid economics-oriented approach to public finance and public policy, Hymans PUBLIC FINANCE, 10th, International Edition equips students with a balanced view of both the revenue and expenditure sides of taxes and public goods giving them the full story of how economics affect public policy issues.
64

CONTENTS PART I: THE ECONOMIC BASIS FOR GOVERNMENT ACTIVITY. 1. Government Activity in the Modern Mixed Economy. 2. The Efficiency Criterion. 3. Internalizing Externalities. 4. The Theory of Public Goods. 5. Collective Choice and Politics. PART II: GOVERNMENT EXPENDITURES AND POLICY IN THE UNITED STATES: SELECTED ISSUES. 6. Government Budgeting and Cost-Benefit Analysis. 7. Government Aid to The Poor. 8. Social Insurance. 9. Health Care Expenditures. PART III: FINANCING GOVERNMENT EXPENDITURES. 10. Alternative Means of Government Finance. 11. Economic Analysis of Taxation. 12. Fiscal Balance and Public Debt. PART IV: TAXATION: THEORY AND STRUCTURE. 13. Income Taxes. 14. Personal Income Taxes in the United States. 15. Business Income Taxes. 16. Consumption Taxes. 17. Wealth Taxes. PART V: STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT FINANCE. 18. Public Finance in a Federal System of Government.
2011, 800pp, Paperback, 9780538797696, South-Western College

SURVEY OF ECONOMICS

BASIC ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 16E


Frank V. Mastrianna, Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania Emeritus

Now in its sixteenth edition, BASIC ECONOMICS, 16e, International Edition delivers a streamlined, straightforward introduction to the fundamentals of macro- and microeconomics, while addressing some of the most stimulating issues affecting the world today. You will engage students with timely discussions of monetary policies and the labor market, as well as the

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

recent financial market collapse and housing crises. This very successful text also presents in a concise, 19-chapter format, which can be covered in single quarter or semester, and includes a wealth of student applications and instructor supplements to assist with course planning and teaching. NEW TO THIS EDITION New discussions regarding the liquidity trap and quantitative easing. Information on the new Dodd-Frank Bill that was recently passed in hopes of re-regulating the economy. Additional information such as the number of bank failures and the current members of the Federal Reserve. CourseMate with The Watch is new to this edition. FEATURES Streamlined, straightforward introduction to the fundamentals of macro- and microeconomics, while addressing some of the most stimulating issues affecting the world today. Success and failure of the expansionary policies from the Obama Administration is presented. CONTENTS 1. The Nature and Scope of Economics. 2. Scarcity and Choice. 3. The U.S. Economic System. 4. Price: The Role of Demand and Supply. 5. Production, Cost, and Profit. 6. Perfect Competition. 7. Monopoly. 8. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 9. The Labor Market, Employment, and Unemployment. 10. Income Distribution. 11. The Circular Flow and National Income Accounts. 12. Business Cycles. 13. Macroeconomic Models and Analysis. 14. Money in the U.S. Economy. 15. The Federal Reserve and the Money Supply. 16. Macroeconomic Policies. 17. Taxation, Budgetary Policy, and the National Debt. 18. International Trade and Aid. 19. The Balance of International Payments.
2013, 480pp, Paperback, 9781133188452, South-Western College

SURVEY OF ECON (WITH PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 2E


Robert L. Sexton, Pepperdine University

Created through a student-tested, faculty-approved review process with more than 150 students and faculty, Survey of ECON is an engaging and accessible solution to accommodate the diverse lifestyles of todays learners at a value-based price. Sextons unique Survey of ECON introduces your students to the exciting, practical role that economics plays in everyday life. Award-winning instructor and author Robert Sexton uses a dynamic writing style to pique students interest within a presentation that reads more like a business periodical than a text. Bite-sized, easy-to-digest sections; built-in review questions; and numerous, memorable examples drawn from pop culture demonstrate the relevance and excitement of economics at work in the world today. NEW TO THIS EDITION New! CHAPTER 4 APPENDIX: Using Supply and Demand in the Health Care Market. NEW! CHAPTER OPENER. These are designed to capture the students interest as soon as they begin reading the chapter. NEW! A number of new In the News, Global Watch and photos with captions have been added. Many of these new features connect the real world to student lives. REFINED COVERAGE AND PEDAGOGY. More examples when needed, extended coverage in troubling areas of learning, and more visual references were added to this edition to enhance the learning experience. FEATURES AN INNOVATIVE COMBINATION OF CONTENT DELIVERY BOTH IN PRINT AND ONLINE provides a

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

65

core text and a wealth of comprehensive multimedia teaching and learning assets based on input from student focus groups and surveys, and from interviews with nearly 150 faculty and students. SHORTER, COMPREHENSIVE CHAPTERS IN A MODERN DESIGN present economics content in a more engaging and accessible format without minimizing coverage for your course. CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction to Economics. 1. The Role and Method of Economics. 2. The Economic Way of Thinking. 3. Supply and Demand. 4. Using Supply and Demand. 5. Market Failure and Public Choice. Part 2: Microeconomics. 6. Production and Costs. 7. Firms in Perfectly Competitive Markets. 8. Monopoly. 9. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 10. Labor Markets, Income Distribution, and Poverty. Part 3: Macroeconomics. 11. Introduction to Macroeconomics: Unemployment, Inflation, and Economic Fluctuations. 12. Economic Growth. 13. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. 14. Fiscal Policy. 15. Monetary Institutions. 16. The Federal Reserve and Monetary Policy. 17. Issues in Macroeconomic Theory and Policy. 18. International Economics.
2014, 484pp, Paperback, 9781285087306, South-Western College

Readable, sensible, and interesting, this text is renowned for its engaging presentation, emphasis on critical thinking, active learning environment, highly motivational pedagogy, unrivaled visual learning support, and numerous in-chapter applications and review opportunities. With its focus on the most basic tools and topics in economics in the context of realworld issues, the book gives students the opportunity to see how economic issues play out at national and international levels. NEW TO THIS EDITION UPDATED COVERAGE. Bringing the latest economic developments from all corners of the glove into your classroom, the 8th edition of Survey of Economics now includes discussions of recent controversies in the field such as: privatization versus nationalization, social Security, Past, Present & Future, etc. Additionally, the author updated his new Road Map features that provide review questions linked to an interactive causation chain game. Further updated in the 8th edition are: the Global Economics boxed features, the Economics in Practice boxes, the Checkpoint features, and the Careers in Economics coverage. FEATURES GLOBAL PERSPECTIVE. Global Economics boxed features show students how economic issues play out at the national and international levels and include topics such as How Does Public Capital Affect a Nations Curve? and How Should Carbon Emissions be Reduced: Cap-and-Trade or Carbon Taxes? REAL WORLD RELEVANCE. Economics in Practice boxes give students the opportunity to encounter timely, real-world extensions of economic theory and cover such relevant topics as Social-Networking Sites: The New Advertising Game, Americas Housing Market Bubble Bursts, and Why Is that Web Site Youre Using Free? UNIQUE MOTIVATIONAL PEDAGOGY. A national award-winning teacher, Dr. Tucker draws from his vast expertise and personal experiences as an educator to implement features that spark interactive reading and critical thinking from students. For example, Analyze the Issue questions challenge students to apply their own understanding of economic concepts to the issues at hand, prompting lively classroom
International Edition

SURVEY OF ECONOMICS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 8E


Irvin B. Tucker, University of North Carolina, Charlotte

Designed specifically for the one-semester introductory economics course for non-majors, Tuckers SURVEY OF ECONOMICS, 8E, International Edition delivers the most comprehensive and pedagogically rich treatment of introduction to economics available.
66

www.cengageasia.com

discussions. CLEAR, CONCISE, AND FOCUSED. Emphasizing the basic tools of supply and demand analysis in a realworld perspective, this text equips students with a thorough understanding of the basics instead of a glimpse of a multitude of topics. INTEGRATED SELF-ASSESSMENT. Thought-provoking You Make the Call questions challenge students to check their understanding of economic concepts by applying them to real-life situations. Students can check their answers at the end of the chapter, giving them immediate feedback on how well they have learned the material. CONTENTS Brief CONTENTS PART I: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS. 1. Introducing the Economic Way of Thinking. 2. Production Possibilities, Opportunity Cost, and Economic Growth. PART II: THE MICROECONOMY. 3. Market Demand and Supply. 4. Markets in Action. 5. Price Elasticity of Demand. 6. Production Costs. 7. Perfect Competition. 8. Monopoly. 9. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 10. Labor Markets and Income Distribution. PART III: THE MACROECONOMY AND FISCAL POLICY. 11. Gross Domestic Product. 12. Business Cycles and Unemployment. 13. Inflation. 14. Aggregate Demand and Supply. 15. Fiscal Policy. 16. The Public Sector. 17. Federal Deficits, Surpluses, and the National Debt. PART IV: MONEY, BANKING, AND MONETARY POLICY. 18. Money and the Federal Reserve System. 19. Money Creation. 20. Monetary Policy. PART V: THE INTERNATIONAL ECONOMY. 21. International Trade and Finance. 22. Economies in Transition. 23. Growth and the Less-Developed Countries.
2013, 592pp, Paperback, 9781111969493, South-Western College

FINANCE
BANK MANAGEMENT

MANAGEMENT OF BANKING, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 6E


Timothy Koch , University of South Carolina; S. MacDonald , Southern Methodist University

The concept of risk management serves as the unifying theme. A banks asset and liability management committee (ALCO) or risk management committee is responsible for the overall financial planning and management of the banks profitability and risk profile. The book emphasizes how managers can develop and implement strategies to maximize stockholders wealth by balancing the trade-off between banking risks and returns. One of the books primary purposes is to explain how market risk (interest rate risk, equity price risk, and foreign exchange rate risk), liquidity risk, credit risk, capital/solvency risk and operational risk are measured and how decisions to alter a banks risk profile affects profitability and growth opportunities. The book demonstrates how risk management decisions in different areas affect each other and the overall profitability and risk of the institution. NEW TO THIS EDITION Currency: Impact of new banking regulations. Detailed critique: Basel II capital requirements and their likely impact. Discussion: New fee-based sources of revenue. Contrast: Structure and performance differences of community banks versus larger institutions. Focus: Strategies and risks associated with rising interest rates. Simplified bank performance model format using the UBPR to interpret bank financial information. New Contemporary Issues: Examples of actual bank

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

67

activities and decision analysis. Reduced number of chapters: Supplementary information accessible via the web. FEATURES Updated use of UBPR data and analysis: Discussion of the Uniform Bank Performance Report, created by the FDIC, has been expanded and includes discussion of the different ratios. Cash flow analysis in lending: Expanded discussion reflects new emphasis. Discussion of hedge accounting under FAS 133: Its implications for financial services companies are discussed along with hedge criteria, risk exposure, and the accounting standards. Revised discussion of interest rate futures, forwards and swaps as risk management tools. Added cases: Bank Performance Analysis, Commercial Lending, Consumer Lending, Liquidity Analysis, Project Finance and Managing a Banks Investment Portfolio, reflect current issues. Expanded Excel Template for Student Use: Credit and Cash Flow Analysis and Bank Performance Analysis allow students to learn from doing. Management Tools Included: Early, integrated coverage of management tools, including asset/ liability management strategies, GAP & EVE analysis and the use of off-balance sheet instruments such as futures, forwards and swaps, serves as an analytical tool for managing interest rate risks.
2006, 768pp, Paperback, 9780324405880, South-Western College

BEHAVIORAL FINANCE

BEHAVIORAL FINANCE
PSYCHOLOGY, DECISION-MAKING, AND MARKETS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION
Lucy Ackert; Richard Deaves

This comprehensive text--ideal for your behavioral finance elective-- links finance theory and practice to human behavior. The book begins by building upon the established, conventional principles of finance that students have already learned in their principles course. The authors then move into psychological principles of behavioral finance, including heuristics and biases, overconfidence, emotion and social forces. Students learn how human behavior influences the decisions of individual investors and professional finance practitioners, managers, and markets. Your students gain a strong understanding of how social forces impact peoples choices. The book clearly explains what behavioral finance indicates about observed market outcomes as well as how psychological biases potentially impact the behavior of managers. Students learn the implications of behavioral finance on retirement, pensions, education, debiasing, and client management. This book is unique as it spends a significant amount of time examining how behavioral finance can be used effectively by practitioners today. FEATURES TA B L E O F CO N T E N T S R E F L E C T S B O O K S COMPREHENSIVE APPROACH: As a glance at this books rich Table of Contents reveals, the authors begin with conventional finance principles before showing how these principles are sometimes contradicted by survey evidence. The authors then present the psychological principles of behavioral finance, including heuristics and biases, overconfidence and

68

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

emotion. INTRODUCTION CHAPTER SETS THE STAGE FOR CONTENT THAT FOLLOWS: The books introduction clearly establishes the texts key themes and structured academic approach, while demonstrating how the authors link finance theory and practice to human behavior. CHAPTER 5, HEURISTICS AND BIASES EXPLORES COGNITIVE LIMITATIONS AND USE OF HEURISTICS: This unique chapter emphasizes how people make decisions and where biases may be revealed. Students explore cognitive limitations, from faulty and selective perceptions and memories to inattention and frame influence. APPLIED APPROACH DEMONSTRATES HOW FINANCIAL PROFESSIONALS CAN EFFECTIVELY USE BEHAVIORAL FINANCE: Future and current financial professionals can benefit from this books unique emphasis on how behavioral finance can be and actually is used successfully today by practitioners. END-OF-CHAPTER DISCUSSION QUESTIONS AND PROBLEMS PROVIDE OPPORTUNITIES TO APPLY CONCEPTS: As a unique, first-of-its-kind academic approach, this book emphasizes the applicability of what students are learning with a variety of end-of-chapter exercises and discussion questions, simulations and experiments. In addition, a student survey at the beginning of the source demonstrates to students the extent to which they themselves are subject to various behavioral biases. C H A P T E R S H I G H L I G H T T H E I M PAC T O F BEHAVORIAL FINANCE ON MANAGERS AND FINANCIAL PROFESSIONALS: Your students learn how psychological biases potentially impact the behavior of managers; what behavioral finance indicates about observed market outcomes; and the implications of behavioral finance for retirement, pensions, education, debiasing, and client management. CONTENTS Introduction. Section I: Conventional finance, prospect theory and market efficiency. Chapter 1: Foundations of conventional finance: Expected utility. Chapter 2: Foundations of conventional finance: Asset pricing theory and market efficiency. Chapter 3: Prospect theory, framing and mental accounting. Chapter 4: Limits to arbitrage, anomalies and investor sentiment.
International Edition

Section II: Behavioral science foundations. Chapter 5: Heuristics and biases. Chapter 6: Overconfidence. Chapter 7: Emotion. Section III: Investor behavior. Chapter 8: Investor behavior stemming from heuristics and biases. Chapter 9: The impact of overconfidence on investor decision-making. Chapter 10: Emotion-based investor behavior. Section IV: Social forces. Chapter 11: Social forces: Selfishness or altruism? Chapter 12: Social forces and behavior. Section VI: Market outcomes. Chapter 13: Behavioral explanations for anomalies. Chapter 14: Aggregate stock market puzzles. Section V: Corporate finance. Chapter 15: Irrational markets. Chapter 16: Irrational managers. Section VII: Retirement, pensions, education, debiasing and client management. Chapter 17: Understanding retirement saving and investment behavior and improving DC pensions. Chapter 18: Debiasing, education, and client management. Section VIII: Money management. Chapter 19: Money management and behavioral investing. Chapter 20: Neurofinance and trading.
2010, 432pp, Paperback, 9780538752862, South-Western College

CORPORATE FINANCE/ FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

CFIN 3 (WITH FINANCE COURSEMATE WITH EBOOK PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 3E


Scott Besley, University of South Florida; Eugene F. Brigham, University of Florida

Created by the continuous feedback of a studenttested, faculty-approved process, CFIN3 delivers a visually appealing, succinct print component, tear-out review cards for students and prep cards for instructors,
69

www.cengageasia.com

and a consistent online offering with CourseMate that includes an eBook in addition to a set of interactive digital tools including self quizzes, extra problems for practice, downloadable flash cards and more--all at a value-based price and proven to increase retention and outcomes. CFIN3 provides online resources such as material on Ethical Dilemmas to stimulate thoughtprovoking class discussion, while Integrative Problems pull together chapter concepts and allow instructors to guide students through a step-by-step process to apply what they have learned to solve realistic business problems. NEW TO THIS EDITION This edition has been updated to include discussion of the global financial crisis. Chapter 3 has been updated to include the most recent changes in the U.S. stock markets. Examples and problems have been updated and revised where necessary. FEATURES An innovative combination of content delivery both in print and online provides a core text and a wealth of comprehensive multimedia teaching and learning assets based on input from student focus groups and surveys, and from interviews with numerous faculty and students. Shorter, comprehensive chapters in a modern design present content in a more engaging and accessible format without minimizing coverage for your course. Chapter In Review Cards at the back of the Student Editions provide students a portable study tool containing all of the pertinent information for class preparation. This remarkable text combines all of the content and resources you expect with a supplements package that is second to none, including a computerized Test Bank, PowerPoint lecture slides, a complete Instructors Manual, and Integrative Problems that pull together chapter concepts and allow you to guide students through a step-by-step process to apply what they have learned to solve realistic business problems. CONTENTS Part I: INTRODUCTION TO MANAGERIAL FINANCE. 1. An Overview of Managerial Finance. Part II: ESSENTIAL CONCEPTS IN MANAGERIAL FINANCE. 2. Analysis of
70

Financial Statements. 3. The Financial Environment: Markets, Institutions, and Investment Banking. 4. Time Value of Money. Part III: VALUATION--FINANCIAL ASSETS. 5. The Cost of Money (Interest Rates). 6. Bonds (Debt)--Characteristics and Valuation. 7. Stocks (Equity)-Characteristics and Valuation. 8. Risk and Rates of Return. Part IV: VALUATION--REAL ASSETS (CAPITAL BUDGETING). 9. Capital Budgeting Techniques. 10. Project Cash Flows and Risk. Part V: COST OF CAPITAL AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE CONCEPTS. 11. The Cost of Capital. 12. Capital Structure. 13. Distribution of Retained Earnings: Dividends and Stock Repurchases. Part VI: WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT. 14. Working Capital Policy. 15. Managing Short-Term Assets. 16. Managing Short-Term Liabilities (Financing). Part VII: STRATEGIC PLANNING AND FINANCING DECISIONS. 17. Financial Planning and Control.
2013, 336pp, Paperback, 9781133626404, South-Western College

CONTEMPORARY CORPORATE FINANCE, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH THOMSON ONE BUSINESS SCHOOL EDITION), 12E
James R. McGuigan; R. Charles Moyer, University of Louisville; Ramesh P. Rao , Oklahoma State University; William J. Kretlow, University of Houston

CONTEMPORARY CORPORATE FINANCE, 12, International Edition gives students a comprehensive, contemporary introduction to financial management focusing on maximizing shareholder wealth and effectively managing cash flow. Students learn the international aspects of financial management, examine the ethical behavior of managers, and study the effects of the 2008-2009 recessions on corporations. Financial Challenges, icons, integrative cases, and numerous

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

other learning features highlight critical concepts and provide important practice. Excel templates in this editions companion web site offer additional practice in using technology to achieve financial management objectives. Thomson ONE Business School Edition, included with the text, places the same financial analysis tool used daily by Wall Street professionals into the hands of students to further their financial management skills and success. NEW TO THIS EDITION Chapter learning objectives have been added to all chapters as well as updated references (footnotes and web references) throughout the book. The previous Chapter 6, Analysis of Risk a Return, is repositioned as Chapter 8 so that the two valuation chapters (Fixed Income Securities and Common Stock) follow immediately after the Time Value of Money Chapter (5). Numerous new Financial Challenges begin most of the chapters: Issues Confronting Financial Managers (Ch. 1); Fords Investment in Volvo Comes up Short (Ch. 9); Risk in the Pharmaceutical Industry (Ch. 11); The Euro Takes a Dive (Ch. 22). Chapter 1 is updated to reflect the current economic environment affecting business. Chapter 2 is updated with regard to material on the stock market, and a NEW section gives an overview of the financial crisis and how it affected firms. Chapter 3 is updated throughout and contains new examples on earnings management and balance sheet quality. Chapter 6 discusses the GM bond downgrade and bankruptcy, and TARP. Chapter 7 covers AIG and reverse stock splits, and HSBC and rights offerings. Chapter 8 includes material on default risk premiums. Chapter 9 Introduction is updated with new data on the magnitude of capital spending by large companies. CONTENTS Part I: Introduction. Chapter 1. The Role and Objective of Financial Management. Chapter 2. The Financial Marketplace. Chapter 3. Evaluation of Financial Performance. Chapter 4. Financial Planning and Forecasting. Part II: Valuation. Chapter 5. The Time Value of Money. Chapter 6. Bond Valuation. Chapter 7. Common Stock Valuation. Chapter 8. Risk and
International Edition

Return. Part III: Investment Decisions. Chapter 9. Capital Budgeting and Cash Flow Analysis. Chapter 10. Capital Budgeting Decisions and Real Options. Chapter 11. Capital Budgeting and Risk. Part IV: The Cost of Capital, Capital Structure, and Payout Policy. Chapter 12. The Cost of Capital. Chapter 13. Capital Structure Concepts. Chapter 14. Capital Structure Management in Practice. Chapter 15. Payout Policy. Part V: Working Capital Management. Chapter 16. Working Capital Policy and Short-Term Financing. Chapter 17. The Management of Cash and Marketable Securities. Chapter 18. The Management of Accounts Receivable and Inventories. Part VI: Additional Topics. Chapter 19. Lease and Intermediate-Term Financing. Chapter 20. Financing with Derivatives. Chapter 21. Risk Management. Chapter 22. International Financial Management. Chapter 23. Corporate Restructuring.
2012, 976pp, Paperback, 9780538482899, South-Western College

CORE CONCEPTS OF FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT


Dr. Eugene Brigham, University of Florida; Dr. Joel F. Houston, University of Florida; Dr. Yao-Min Chiang, National Chengchi University; Dr. Hon-Sing Lee, National University of Singapore; Bany Ariffin, Universiti Putra Malaysia

Core Concepts of Financial Management offers a balance of clear concepts, contemporary theory, and practical applications in a dynamic text that sets high standards for quality, reliability, accuracy, and innovation. With an emphasis on the core concepts of fi nancial management, the book is interspersed with real-world examples, end-of-chapter applications, Integrated Cases, and Excel spreadsheet models that make it easier for students to understand the how and why of corporate budgeting, financing, and working capital decision-making.
71

www.cengageasia.com

FEATURES Practical and focused presentation of important financial theories is realized through proven learning features, a wealth of real-world examples, problem sets, and integrated mini-cases. Significant ethics coverage allows professors to easily and efficiently locate and integrate material on this topic at appropriate points within the course. Self-test problems appear immediately after all major sections of each chapter. Integrated spreadsheet models show students how to solve financial problems. Resources for students include Web Appendices, Excel Computation Models, Calculator Tutorials, and a Tutorial on using Excel as a Financial Analysis Tool. CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction to Financial Management. 1. An Overview of Financial Management. Part 2: Fundamental Concepts in Financial Management and Financial Forecasting. 2. Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes. 3. Analysis of Financial Statements. 4. Financial Planning and Forecasting. 5. Financial Markets and Institutions. Part 3: Financial Assets and Time Value of Money. 6. Interest Rates. 7. Risk and Rates of Return. 8. Time Value of Money. 9. Bonds and Their Valuation. 10. Stocks and Their Valuation. Part 4: Investing in LongTerm Assets: Capital Budgeting. 11. The Cost of Capital. 12. The Basics of Capital Budgeting. 13. Cash Flow Estimation and Risk Analysis. Part 5: Capital Structure and Dividend Policy. 14. Capital Structure and Leverage. 15. Distributions to Shareholders: Dividends and Share Repurchases. Part 6: Working Capital Management and Multinational Financial Management. 16. Working Capital Management. 17. Multinational Financial Management.
2011, 632pp, Paperback, 9789814319423, Cengage Learning Asia

C LL CO COLLEGE LLEG EGE EG E CORPORATE FINANCE, 5E


A FOCUSED APPROACH (WITH THOMSON ONE BUSINESS SCHOOL EDITION 6-MONTH PRINTED ACCESS CARD)
Michael C. Ehrhardt, University of Tennessee ; Eugene F. Brigham, University of Florida

Focus on the financial concepts, skills, and technological applications that are most critical for MBA students in todays workplace with Ehrhardt/Brighams CORPORATE FINANCE: A FOCUSED APPROACH 5E. The text provides an in-depth treatment of essential corporate finance topics within a streamlined presentation that you can complete in a single semester. With its relevant and engaging presentation and numerous examples, your students will learn the latest financial developments as they also learn how to maximize a firms value in todays changing business world. Students will master the many features and functions of spreadsheets with chapter Excel Tool Kits, Build a Model problems, and Mini Cases that encourage what-if analysis on a real-time basis. Students will also gain hands-on experience using Thomson ONE Business School Edition, which gives students access to the same Thomson Reuters Financial database that business professionals use every day. NEW TO THIS EDITION Increased corporate governance coverage throughout the text. Increased emphasis on free cash flows (FCF) in chapters 13 and 14. Refreshed, easier-to-read interior design. FEATURES The authors clearly illustrate the application of concepts and theories throughout the books proven presentation, wealth of actual business examples, thought-provoking problem sets, and integrated

72

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

mini-cases. Updated, timely real examples throughout almost every chapter demonstrate the impact of todays financial crisis in all areas of business and life. Actual screen captures from the Excel Tool Kit models that correspond with each chapter appear within this edition, allowing students to clearly and more closely follow the models in analysis. Partially completed, end-of-chapter spreadsheets contain financial data and instructions on how to build a model. Instant access to leading financial data sources, including Thomson Reuters Financial, Worldscope, SEC Disclosure, First Call, Datastream and more. Corresponding Thomson ONE problems in most chapters in the text enable valuable practice. CONTENTS PART I: FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS OF CORPORATE FINANCE. 1. An Overview of Financial Management and the Financial Environment. 2. Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes. 3. Analysis of Financial Statements. PART II: FIXED INCOME SECURITIES. 4. Time Value of Money. 5. Bonds, Bond Valuation, and Interest Rates. PART III: STOCKS AND OPTIONS. 6. Risk, Return, and the Capital Asset Pricing Model. 7. Stocks, Stock Valuation, and Stock Market Equilibrium. 8. Financial Options and Applications in Corporate Finance. PART IV: PROJECTS AND THEIR VALUATION. 9. The Cost of Capital. 10. The Basics of Capital Budgeting: Evaluating Cash Flows. 11. Cash Flow Estimation and Risk Analysis. PART V: CORPORATE VALUATION AND GOVERNANCE. 12. Financial Planning and Forecasting Financial Statements. 13. Corporate Valuation, ValueBased Management and Corporate Governance. PART VI: CASH DISTRIBUTIONS AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE. 14. Distributions to Shareholders: Dividends and Repurchases. 15. Capital Structure Decisions. PART VII: MANAGING GLOBAL OPERATIONS. 16. Working Capital Management. 17. Multinational Financial Management.
2014, 848pp, Hardback, 9781133947530, South-Western College

CORPORATE FINANCE: THE ESSENTIALS


ASIA-PACIFIC EDITION
Scott Besley, University of South Florida; Eugene Brigham, University of Florida; Darren Henry, LaTrobe University; Taiji Watanabe, University of Southern Queensland

This is a regional adaptation of a highly successful and well regarded Besley/Brigham text targeted at undergraduate and postgraduate levels. It can be used in its entirety over the course of the standard 12-week semester. It provides a regionally relevant context to corporate finance. FEATURES Thoroughly adapted to include local and regional company examples, including AWB, James Hardie, Telstra, Fosters Group, Rio Tinto, Fortescue Metals Group, and Woolworths Limited. Key equations are highlighted as they appear throughout the text. Tear-out chapter review cards and equation reference cards. End-of-chapter practice problems, expanded on from US text. A summary of key concepts appears at the end of each chapter, to assist students with revision and understanding. NEW Chapter 9: Derivatives, written specifically for the Asia-Pacific region. CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction to Managerial Finance 1. An Overview of Managerial Finance. 2. The Financial Environment: Markets, Institutions, and Investment Banking Part 2: Essential Concepts in Managerial Finance 3. Analysis of Financial Statements 4. Time Value of Money Part 3: Valuation Financial Assets 5. The Cost of Money (Interest Rates) 6. Bonds (Debt) -- Characteristics and Valuation. 7. Stocks (Equity)-Characteristics and Valuation. Part 4: Risk and Rate of Return 8. Risk and Rates of Return 9. Derivatives
73

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

Part 5: Valuation Real Assets (Capital Budgeting) 10. Capital Budgeting Techniques 11. Project Cash Flows and Risk Part 6: Cost of Capital and Capital Structure Concepts 12. The Cost of Capital 13. Financial Planning and Control 14. Capital Structure 15. Distribution of Retained Earnings: Dividends and Stock Repurchases Part 7: Working Capital Management 16. Working Capital Policy 17. Managing Short-Term Assets 18. Managing Short-Term Liabilities (Financing) Chapter review cards Equation review cards.
2013, 424pp, Paperback, 9780170210362, Cengage Learning Australia

but also accessible and relatively non-mathematical Excellent coverage of the financial market line Lecturers online support include: Lecturers Guide, Power Point slides and Testbank. For students: Accounting and finance definitions from the pocket IEBM amd useful related weblinks CONTENTS PART 1 INTRODUCTION 1 Financial decision making 2 Decision objectives PART 2 INVESTMENT DECISIONS 3 Traditional methods of investment appraisal 4 Investmentconsumption decision model 5 The discounted cash flow approach 6 Net present value and internal rate of return 7 Project cash flows 8 Capital rationing PART 3 RISK ANALYSIS 9 Simple risk techniques 10 Risk and return 11 Portfolio theory 12 The capital asset pricing model 13 Option valuation 14 Interest rate risk PART 4 FINANCING DECISIONS 15 Financial markets 16 The cost of capital 17 Weighted average cost of capital 18 Capital structure in a simple world 19 Capital structure in a complex world 20 Investment and financing interactions 21 The dividend decision PART 5 INTERNATIONAL ISSUES 22 Foreign Exchange 23 Foreign Exchange Hedging 24 Foreign direct investment.
2011, 800pp, Paperback, 9781844809462, CL EMEA Higher Education

CORPORATE FINANCE, 8E
THEORY AND PRACTICE
Steve Lumby, Deputy Managing Director of the London College of Accountancy; Chris Jones, Principal Lecturer in Accounting and Finance at Sheffield Hallam University

Now in its eighth edition, this best-selling and highly regarded textbook offers a complete introduction to financial management and corporate finance. Though it is predominantly theoretical in focus, Corporate Finance: Theory and Practice takes a relatively non-mathematical approach which offers textual explanations in a very accessible style. NEW TO THIS EDITION Now includes Learning Objectives at the start of each chapter Contains expanded coverage on risk and uncertainty in investment appraisal and the different techniques Highlights numerical calculations/equations to make them stand out better FEATURES Topic content that is comprehensive, logically structured and well-tailored to course requirements An academic level that is both appropriately rigorous
74

New Edition Tentatively in July 2013

ESSENTIALS OF FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT, 2E


Dr. Eugene Brigham, University of Florida; Dr. Joel F. Houston, University of Florida; Dr. Yao-Min Chiang, National Chengchi University; Dr. Hon-Sing Lee, National University of Singapore; Bany Ariffin, Universiti Putra Malaysia

This edition of Essentials of Financial Management offers a balance of clear concepts, contemporary theory, and practical applications in a dynamic text that sets high standards for quality, reliability, accuracy, and

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

innovation. With an emphasis on basic concepts, the book is interspersed with real-world examples, endof-chapter applications, Integrated Cases, and Excel spreadsheet models that make it easier for students to understand the how and why of corporate budgeting, financing, and working capital decision-making. FEATURES Practical and focused presentation of important financial theories is realized through proven learning features, a wealth of real-world examples, problem sets, and integrated mini-cases. Significant ethics coverage allows professors to easily and efficiently locate and integrate material on this topic at appropriate points within the course. Self-test problems appear immediately after all major sections of each chapter. Integrated spreadsheet models show students how to solve financial problems. Resources for lecturers include Instructors Manual, PowerPoint Slides, Solutions to Web Appendices, Solutions to Spreadsheet Problems, and Excel Spreadsheet Models. CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction to Financial Management. 1. An Overview of Financial Management. Part 2: Fundamental Concepts in Financial Management and Financial Forecasting. 2. Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes. 3. Analysis of Financial Statements. 4. Financial Planning and Forecasting 5. Financial Markets and Institutions. Part 3: Financial Assets and Time Value of Money. 6. Interest Rates. 7. Risk and Rates of Return. 8. Time Value of Money. 9. Bonds and Their Valuation. 10. Stocks and Their Valuation. Part 4: Investing in Long-Term Assets: Capital Budgeting. 11. The Cost of Capital. 12. The Basics of Capital Budgeting. 13. Cash Flow Estimation and Risk Analysis. 14. Real Options and Other Topics in Capital Budgeting. Part 5: Capital Structure, Dividend Policy, and Working Capital Management. 15. Capital Structure and Leverage. 16.: Distributions to Shareholders: Dividends and Share Repurchases. 17. Working Capital Management. Part 6: Special Topics in Financial Management. 18. Derivatives and Risk Management. 19. Multinational Financial Management. 20. Hybrid Financing: Preferred Stock, Leasing, Warrants, and Convertibles. 21. Mergers and Acquisitions.
2010, 760pp, Paperback, 9789814281379, Cengage Learning Asia

FINANCE FOR EXECUTIVES, 4E


MANAGING FOR VALUE CREATION
Gabriel Hawawini, INSEAD; Claude Viallet, INSEAD

Ideal for both aspiring managers and experienced executives, the Fourth Edition of FINANCE FOR EXECUTIVES: MANAGING FOR VALUE CREATION illustrates the importance of financial information in maximizing firm value. Respected authors Gabriel Hawawini and Claude Viallet draw on their wealth of business and teaching experience to provide a concise, analytically sound introduction to financial management that is neither too simplistic nor too theoretical. In fact, the text masterfully balances a thorough exploration of modern finance principles with a strong practical focus on real-world applications and rigorous analysis, even while avoiding complicated formulas with little value for decision-making. NEW TO THIS EDITION The Fourth Edition includes an entirely new chapter on managing corporate risk, which provides a comprehensive framework for this essential topic and explores corporate risk management within the context of creating value--the core objective of the entire text. The chapter devoted to company valuation has been completely revised based on the concept of enterprise value, which has surged in popularity and gained widespread use among financial analysts, making it an important standard for informed executives to master. A new set of companies--The Home Depot, Inc., and Lowes Companies, Inc.--are now featured in a series of integrated examples that provides a step-by-step illustration of how to perform a financial analysis using key concepts and tools presented in chapters two through five.
75

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

Every chapter has been extensively updated to reflect the latest financial information, as well as current trends, issues, and tools essential for todays successful executives and leading financial analysts. The new edition includes expanded coverage of raising capital and the valuation of financial securities, offering additional insights and greater depth to help students master these important topics. FEATURES This well-balanced text emphasizes rigorous analysis but avoids complicated formulas that have little direct application to decision-making. As such, the text fills a critical gap between overly simplistic introductory accounting and finance manuals for non-financial managers and more advanced texts in corporate finance, which can become bogged down in minutiae. The text is organized around the underlying principle that firms should be managed to create value for their owners, a concept that is introduced in the first chapter, which also outlines the structure of the text and explains how each chapter and major topic relates to the central theme of value creation. The authors have extensive expertise in finance and have based much of the text on courses they have taught to more than 2,000 successful managers and executives around the globe. Each chapter is self-contained, providing optimal flexibility for instructors and making the text an ideal resource and reference students are likely to find useful throughout their careers. Topics are presented using a problem-scenario approach, which provides the context of a financial management problem that executives are likely to face on a day-to-day basis, making the material much more useful and meaningful for students. CONTENTS PART I INTRODUCTION. 1. Financial Management and Value Creation: An Overview. 2. Understanding Balance Sheets and Income Statements. Part II FINANCIAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT. 3. Assessing Liquidity and Operational Efficiency. 4. Measuring Cash Flows. 5. Diagnosing Profitability, Risk, and Growth. PART III INVESTMENT DECISIONS. 6. Using the Net Present Value Rule to Make Value-Creating Investment Decisions. 7. Alternatives to the Net Present Value Rule. 8. Identifying and Estimating a Projects Cash Flows.
76

Part IV FINANCING DECISIONS. 9. Raising Capital and Valuing Securities. 10. Estimating the Cost of Capital. 11. Designing a Capital Structure. PART V BUSINESS DECISIONS. 12. Valuing and Acquiring a Business. 13. Managing Corporate Risk. 14. Making International Business Decisions. 15. Managing for Value Creation.
2011, 672pp, Hardback, 9780538751346, South-Western College

FINANCIAL ANALYSIS WITH MICROSOFT EXCEL, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 6E


Timothy R. Mayes, Metropolitan State College of Denver; Todd M. Shank, University of Portland

Mayes/Shanks FINANCIAL ANALYSIS WITH MICROSOFT EXCEL 2010, 6E covers all of the topics in todays corporate finance course, including financial statements, budgets, the Market Security Line, pro forma statements, cost of capital, equities, and debt. A reader-friendly, self-directed learning approach and numerous study tools make this book both an ideal resource for independent learning and a valuable long-term reference tool. Because todays typical students enter college with basic spreadsheet skills, this new edition covers the basics early for those with no background, before moving quickly into many of the more advanced and most powerful features of Excel 2010. This edition offers new focus on Excel tables, pivot tables and pivot charts and other areas that have become increasingly important to todays employers. NEW TO THIS EDITION UPDATES PREPARE STUDENTS TO UTILIZE THE LATEST EXCEL 2010 ADVANTAGES. Prepare your students for immediate finance and spreadsheet

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

success in a financial context as this edition highlights introductory and advanced spreadsheet skills using EXCEL 2010 new functions and features. NEW FINAL CHAPTER ANALYZES DATA SETS USING EXCEL TABLES AND PIVOT TABLES. This new chapter (Ch. 15) thoroughly addresses the use of Excel Tables, Pivot Tables and Pivot Charts an area that has become an increasingly important requirement in job interviews. NEW COVERAGE OF WEB QUERIES AND PIVOT TABLES HELPS STUDENTS MAXIMIZE POWERFUL EXCEL TOOLS. Now you can introduce your students to more advanced, powerful Excel skills, such as using web queries to download and work with Internet data. New coverage also delves into using pivot tables, one of the most powerful Excel features for extracting, summarizing and presenting data in readable form. FEATURES EQUIP STUDENTS WITH BOTH BASIC SKILLS AND ADVANCED FINANCIAL TECHNIQUES FOR USING EXCEL 2010. This proven, reader-friendly text introduces the basics of using spreadsheet as well as maximizing Excel 2010 to build basic financial statements. After establishing a solid foundation, the book launches into more advanced techniques for performance evaluation, forecasting, valuation, and capital budgeting. COMBINE SOLID FINANCE COVERAGE WITH ESSENTIAL SPREADSHEET SKILLS. This edition offers more than a mere spreadsheet book or a text filled with spreadsheet templates. This trusted financial resource offers all of the advantages of a solid, thorough finance text while equipping your students to effectively solve financial problems using Excel 2010. INTRODUCTORY LEVEL IS IDEAL FOR READERS UNFAMILIAR WITH EXCEL. This editions readerfriendly approach begins at a basic introductory level thats ideal for students who are not very familiar with Excel. Topics quickly advance to challenge those entering the course with a basic understanding of spreadsheets. CONTENTS 1. Introduction to EXCEL 2010. 2. The Basic Financial Statements. 3. The Cash Budget. 4. Financial Statement
International Edition

Analysis Tools. 5. Financial Forecasting. 6. Break-Even and Leverage Analysis. 7. The Time Value of Money. 8. Common Stock Valuation. 9. Bond Valuation. 10. The Cost of Capital. 11. Capital Budgeting. 12. Risk and Capital Budgeting. 13. Portfolio Statistics and Diversification. 14. Writing User-Defined Functions with VBA. 15. Analyzing Datasets with Tables and Pivot Tables.
2012, 528pp, Paperback, 9781111989576, South-Western College

FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT: THEORY & PRACTICE, AN ASIA EDITION


Annie Koh - Singapore Management University; Ser-Keng Ang, Singapore Management University; Eugene F. Brigham - University of Florida; Michael C. Ehrhardt, University of Tennessee

The financial markets have been undergoing dramatic changes in the last five years. The Global Financial Crisis that resulted from the sub-prime debacle in the United States, and the sovereign debt crisis across Euroland have elevated Asian economies into prominence globally. Asian economies, both in emerging markets and developed markets are poised for steady and strong growth. An in-depth understanding of the nuances and practices in these markets is essential because the operating, legal, regulatory and cultural environments are vastly different from those in the developed markets in Europe and the United States. To this end, this Asia edition of Financial Management: Theory and Practice aims to provide readers with insights into the key issues and cases that are related to the corporate scene in Asia. While updating the book with content and examples most relevant to students in Asia, the features of the original edition have been maintained. It is the only text that presents a striking balance between solid

www.cengageasia.com

77

financial theory and practical applications. Students gain a strong working knowledge of todays financial environment as the book examines recent financial crises; the global economic crisis; and role of finance in the world, business, and your students personal lives. This books relevant and engaging presentation, numerous examples, and emphasis on using Excel spreadsheets prepare students to make sound financial decisions in business. The book progresses from an early presentation of fundamentals to specific techniques and discussions that guide students in maximizing the value of a firm. This text is not only the ideal choice for todays introductory MBA course, but also serves as a complete reference tool for students throughout their academic and business careers. FEATURES Chapters are adapted to explain practices and nuances in Asian markets and corporate sectors different from Europe and the United States. Provides a more international perspective of financing issues that firms in emerging or small economies face. Discusses the differences in regulatory and operating environments in emerging Asia. Showcases successful Asian corporations that have grown substantially over the last decade. Uses Asian cases and examples throughout. Practical application of theory and trends highlights the role of finance today. Multi-disciplinary approach demonstrates how finance affects all areas of business. Early coverage of financial statements establishes a strong context for concepts that follow. CONTENTS PART I: FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS OF CORPORATE FINANCE. 1. An Overview of Financial Management and the Financial Environment. 2. Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes. 3. Analysis of Financial Statements. PART II: FIXED INCOME SECURITIES. 4. Time Value of Money. 5. Bonds, Bond Valuation, and Interest Rates. PART III: STOCKS AND OPTIONS. 6. Risk, Return, and the Capital Asset Pricing Model. 7. Stocks, Stock Valuation, and Stock Market Equilibrium. 8. Financial Options and Applications in Corporate Finance. PART IV: PROJECTS AND THEIR VALUATION. 9. The Cost of Capital. 10. The Basics of Capital Budgeting: Evaluating Cash Flows. 11. Cash Flow Estimation and Risk Analysis.
78

PART V: CORPORATE VALUATION AND GOVERNANCE. 12. Financial Planning and Forecasting Financial Statements. 13. Corporate Valuation, Value-Based Management, and Corporate Governance. PART VI: CASH DISTRIBUTIONS AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE. 14. Distributions to Shareholders: Dividends and Repurchases. 15. Capital Structure Decisions. PART VII: TACTICAL FINANCING DECISIONS. 16. Working Capital Management. 17. Multinational Financial Management. PART VIII: MANAGING GLOBAL OPERATIONS. 18. Lease Financing. 19. Hybrid Financing: Preferred Stock, Warrants, and Convertibles. 20. Initial Public Offerings, Investment Banking, and Financial Restructuring. PART VIIII: SPECIAL TOPICS. 21. Mergers, LBOs, Divestitures, and Holding Companies. 22. Bankruptcy, Reorganization, and Liquidation. 23. Derivatives and Risk Management. PART X: ADVANCED ISSUES. 24. Portfolio Theory, Asset Pricing Models, and Behavioral Finance. 25. Real Options. 26. Analysis of Capital Structure Theory.
2013, 9789814369527, Cengage Learning Asia

FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH THOMSON ONE - BUSINESS SCHOOL EDITION 6-MONTH AND SMART FINANCE PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 3E
William L. Megginson, University of Oklahoma; Scott B. Smart, Indiana University, Bloomington; John Graham, Duke University

This business-focused, accessible text is more relevant than ever as award-winning author and nationally acclaimed finance researcher John Graham of Duke University, joins master-teacher Scott Smart and international business expert Bill Megginson to help bridge the gap between academic rigor and corporate finance practices. Each chapter in this edition now

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

integrates the latest results from Duke Universitys prestigious CFO Global Business Outlook, a quarterly survey of financial executives that gauges business outlook and topical economic issues. The authors have refined this practical text and integrated technology to closely correspond with the way you teach your MBAlevel course. Engaging examples, meaningful cases, and practical exercises reflect how todays changing events and recent financial crises relate to established finance principles. Cross-functional applications and career-focused features, such as actual job interview questions in the margin, make the book applicable to all students, whether finance majors or general business professionals. Time-saving online Smart Finance tools, created by author Scott Smart, further reinforce learning with integrated tutorials, interactive practice, and videos from leading finance researchers introducing key theories and concepts. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW AWARD-WINNING AUTHOR JOHN GRAHAM PROVIDES LATEST CORPORATE PERSPECTIVE --One of todays most prolific and widely cited scholars in finance, new lead author John R. Graham of Duke University helps bridge the gap between academic rigor and todays corporate finance practices. In addition to authoring 20 articles in top finance journals since 1996, Dr. Graham serves as director of Duke Universitys highly regarded CFO Outlook Survey. His unique perspective is reflected within this editions new subtitle, LINKING THEORY TO WHAT COMPANIES DO. LATEST RESULTS FROM DUKE UNIVERSITYS CFO BUSINESS OUTLOOK SURVEY KEEP YOUR COURSE ON CUTTING EDGE --This editions What CFOs Do in each chapter details the latest results from Duke Universitys CFO Business Outlook quarterly survey of financial executives. Your students can gauge business outlooks and examine topical economic issues, as features detail what real CFOs think and do in actual practice. These authoritative survey findings are frequently referenced by financial and mainstream media, including the Wall Street Journal and NPR. NEW FOCUS ON FINANCE CAREERS PREPARES STUDENTS FOR INTERVIEW SUCCESS --Brief new Job Interview Questions in each chapters margins help familiarize students with actual, real questions recruiters often ask during job interviews for finance
International Edition

positions. NEW CROSS-DISCIPLINARY APPLICATIONS KEEP FOCUS RELEVANT TO ALL BUSINESS STUDENTS --This edition incorporates engaging cross-functional applications into the books examples and end-ofchapter problems. Students pursuing any business major, as well as finance majors, find the books content and applications relevant to their success. CONVENIENT CALCULATOR KEYSTROKES AND MORE EMPHASIS ON EXCEL PREPARE STUDENTS FOR FINANCE SUCCESS --This award-winning author team has considered all of the learning details your students need for success. Calculator Strokes appear in this editions margins to help students check their work as they complete numerous examples. This edition also includes new Excel applications and tutorials that demonstrate how to use Excel to build more complex models. FEATURES BOOKS PRACTICAL APPROACH EMPHASIZES WHAT TODAYS FINANCIAL MANAGERS ACTUALLY DO --The authors apply their more than 50 years of combined research, writing, and award-winning teaching of corporate finance at all levels with extensive market research, including analysis of more than 150 MBA-course syllabi to focus on whats most important within todays practice of corporate finance. Reviewer suggestions and feedback from leading instructors combine with formal research and timely CFO surveys to ensure the book accurately reflects what financial managers actually do. STREAMLINED, FOCUSED TEXT PROVIDES THE LATEST UPDATES THAT REFLECT TODAYS FINANCIAL CRISES --In order to streamline and ensure an accessible timely text for todays students, Internet Resources now appear on the books companion website, rather than within the text. This editions streamlined presentation incorporates numerous new and updated research citations that reflect todays changing financial times. INTEGRATED EMPHASIS ON INTERNATIONAL FINANCE PREPARES STUDENTS FOR GLOBAL SUCCESS The feature previously called What Companies Do is now called What Companies Do Globally to reinforce the texts focus on international finance. The authors use their firsthand experience to introduce students to aspects of
79

www.cengageasia.com

financial management within todays international organizations. The book compares U.S. statistics and trends to other countries statistics and trends, giving students a strong realization of how both U.S. corporations as well as international companies function within todays global marketplace. EXPANDED ONLINE SMART FINANCE TOOLS SAVE TIME WHILE REINFORCING LEARNING --Created by master-teacher Scott Smart, this integrated classroom management system saves you time with tutorials, videos, and interactive practice for each chapter. Smart Concepts animated tutorials explain topics step-by-step so students can review at their own pace. Smart Solutions help students improve problem-solving skills. Smart Ideas Videos feature leading researchers, such as Robert Schiller (Yale), Elroy Dimson (London School of Business), Andrew Karolyi (The Ohio State University), and Kenneth French (Dartmouth College). OPENING FOCUS FEATURES ENGAGE STUDENTS BY DEMONSTRATING REAL ISSUES IN ACTION --Captivating Opening Focus features at the beginning of each chapter highlight real companies, timely topics and even noteworthy finance-related stories from todays media. Students see how modern finance theory applies to todays actual business challenges. CONTENTS Part I: INTRODUCTION. 1. The Scope of Corporate Finance. 2. Financial Statement and Cash Flow Analysis. 3. The Time Value of Money. Part II: VALUATION, RISK, AND RETURN. 4. Valuation. 5. The Tradeoff Between Risk and Return. 6. Risk, Return, and the Capital Asset Pricing Model. Part III: CAPITAL BUDGETING. 7. Capital Budgeting Processes and Techniques. 8. Cash Flow and Capital Budgeting. 9. Cost of Capital and Project Risk. Part IV: CAPITAL STRUCTURE AND DIVIDEND POLICY. 10. Market Efficiency and Behavioral Finance. 11. An Overview of Long-Term Financing. 12. Capital Structure: Theory and Taxes. 13. Capital Structure: Balancing the Benefits and Costs of Debt. 14. The Link Between Capital Structure and Capital Budgeting. 15. Payout Policy. Part V: LONG-TERM FINANCING. 16. Investment Banking and the Public Sale of Equity Securities. 17. Long-Term Debt and Leasing. Part VI: OPTIONS, DERIVATIVES, AND INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT. 18. Options Basics. 19. Black and Scholes and Beyond. 20. International Financial Management. Part VII: SHORT-TERM FINANCING DECISIONS. 21. Strategic and Operational Financial Planning. 22. Cash Conversion,
80

Inventory, and Receivables Management. 23. Liquidity Management. Part VIII: SPECIAL TOPICS. 24. Mergers, Acquisitions, and Corporate Governance. 25. Bankruptcy and Financial Distress Web Chapters 26. Entrepreneurial Finance and Venture Capital. 27. Risk Management and Financial Engineering. APPENDIX: Key Formulas.
2010, 1008pp, Paperback, 9780538745581, South-Western College

FINANCIAL MATHEMATICS FOR DECISION MAKING


Nicole Ibbett, University of Western Sydney

Financial Mathematics for Decision Making 1st edition is designed to provide students with little, or no, previous exposure to finance or financial calculations with the skills necessary to make practical financial decisions,. Using a six step problem solving framework students learn to: 1. Identify the decision to be made (or problem to be solved) 2. Identify formula (or formulae) to be used 3. Summarise the available information 4. Create an equation 5. Solve the equation 6. Use the solution to justify the decision made (or to answer the problem) FEATURES Technically edited for accuracy and clarity. Over 140 examples help students understand complex theory. 35 Self-test questions appear throughout the text to enable students to test their understanding as they learn. The end of chapter revision section contains a variety of multiple choice, short exercises and longer problem activities. CONTENTS Part 1: Foundation 1. Simple interest 2. Compound
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

interest 3. Ordinary annuities 4. Variations of annuities Part 2: Application 5. Long term loans 6. Short term securities 7. Long term securities 8. Investment decisions using Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return 9. Fees and charges
2012, 180pp, Paperback, 9780170215695, Cengage Learning Australia

chapters to ensure reader comprehension of this important topic. NEW APLIA FOR FINANCE ENGAGES STUDENTS AND SUPPORTS INTERACTIVE LEARNING. This optional digital solution is the fastest-growing online pedagogical tool for intermediate financial management. Aplia saves you time while helping your students perform better in class. A trusted homework solution, Aplia includes text-correlated real-time interactive tutorials, online experiments, news analyses, and auto-graded problem sets. It is simple to ensure your students are consistently well prepared for class as this leading online system provides immediate feedback and student accountability. FEATURES UNIQUE BALANCE OF THEORY AND PRACTICE DIFFERENTIATES BOOKS APPROACH. Brigham and Daves clearly introduce both core financial theories in-depth as well as emerging financial management issues using a practically focused, clear presentation that is of hallmark strength. This edition provides the background material necessary for student success without sacrificing the rigor you need to equip advanced students. RELIABLE PRESENTATION PROVIDES TRUSTED ACCURACY. The author teams meticulous attention to detail and time-tested content deliver a complete text and unique package of author-driven supplements that you can trust with confidence in your intermediate or advanced course. PROVEN LEARNING FEATURES HIGHLIGHT PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS. Students see how todays financial theories and trends are applied through this editions wealth of engaging learning features, including real-world examples, practical problem sets, and integrated Mini-Cases. THOMSON ONE-BUSINESS SCHOOL EDITION ACCESSES SAME TOOL PROFESSIONAL BROKERS AND ANALYSTS USE EVERY DAY. Students can access leading financial data sources -- including Thomson Financial, Worldscope, SEC Disclosure and DataStream -- to complete special Thomson ONEBSE end-of-chapter text problems. Students gain valuable experience in performing financial research and analysis and also hands-on practice with this leading financial tool, without creating additional work for you.
81

INTERMEDIATE FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT (WITH THOMSON ONE - BUSINESS SCHOOL EDITION FINANCE 1-YEAR 2-SEMESTER PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 11E
Eugene F. Brigham, University of Florida; Phillip R. Daves, University of Tennessee

Trust Brigham/Daves INTERMEDIATE FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 11E, the only textbook written specifically for Intermediate or Advanced Corporate Finance courses to provide your students with a full understanding of both conceptual theories and practical financial skills. This comprehensive text from renowned author team Gene Brigham and Phillip Daves reinforces coverage from earlier corporate finance courses for a clear presentation, while providing new, progressive material to challenge even the most advanced learners. The authors use corporate valuation as a unifying theme to emphasize the theoretic groundwork for value maximization and the practical skills to analyze business decisions. You will find in-depth coverage of core issues and the most current coverage of topics that are reshaping finance today. NEW TO THIS EDITION RESTRUCTURED CAPITAL BUDGETING CHAPTERS CLARIFY CONCEPTS. The authors have significantly reorganized Chapters 12 and 13 on Capital Budgeting
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

CONTENTS PART I: FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS. 1. An Overview of Financial Management. 2. Risk and Return: Part I. 3. Risk and Return: Part II. 4. Bond Valuation. 5. Basic Stock Valuation. 6. Financial Options. 7. Accounting for Financial Management. 8. Analysis of Financial Statements. PART II: CORPORATE VALUATION. 9. Financial Planning and Forecasting Financial Statements. 10. Determining the Cost of Capital. 11. Corporate Value and Value-Based Management. PART III: PROJECT VALUATION. 12. Capital Budgeting: Decision Criteria. 13. Capital Budgeting: Estimating Cash Flows and Analyzing Risk. 14. Real Options. PART IV: STRATEGIC FINANCING DECISIONS. 15. Capital Structure Decisions: Part I. 16. Capital Structure Decisions: Part II. 17. Distributions to Shareholders: Dividends and Repurchases. PART V: TACTICAL FINANCING DECISIONS. 18. Initial Public Offerings, Investment Banking, and Financial Restructuring. 19. Lease Financing. 20. Hybrid Financing: Preferred Stock, Warrants, and Convertibles. PART VI: WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT. 21. Working Capital Management. 22. Providing and Obtaining Credit. 23. Other Topics in Working Capital Management. PART VII: SPECIAL TOPICS. 24. Derivatives and Risk Management. 25. Bankruptcy, Reorganization, and Liquidation. 26. Mergers, LBOs, Divestitures, and Holding Companies. 27. Multinational Financial Management. WEB CHAPTERS. 28. Time Value of Money. 29. Basic Financial Tools: A Review. 30. Pension Plan Management. 31. Financial Management in Not-for-Profit Businesses.
2013, 1168pp, Hardback, 9781111530266, South-Western College

INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH THOMSON ONE BUSINESS SCHOOL EDITION 6-MONTH PRINTED ACCESS CARD AND ECONOMIC COURSEMATE WITH EBOOK PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 3E
Scott B. Smart, Indiana University, Bloomington; John Graham, Duke University

Get closer to finance as its actually practiced today with the powerful approach from award-winning authors John Graham and Scott Smart found in INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT, 3E, International Edition. Theoretically sound yet practically relevant, this text integrates examples throughout to emphasize the roles of financial managers and CFOs and show how financial management actually works in todays real companies. This texts accessible, inviting approach gives finance majors the solid foundation they need while remaining relevant to the large number of non-majors in your course. Timely real examples and the latest material on the recent financial crisis, innovative online learning tools, and an integrated approach enable you to keep students of varying degrees of ability both motivated and involved. NEW TO THIS EDITION One of todays most prolific and widely cited scholars in finance, new lead author John Graham of Duke University helps bring a clarity and emphasis on practicality to this study of todays corporate finance practices. Dr. Graham serves as director of Duke Universitys highly regarded CFO Outlook Survey which provides unique insights that are reflected in this editions new subtitle, WHAT COMPANIES DO. Every chapter includes new material that clearly depicts how financial management works in real

82

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

companies in todays business world. Students see the importance and practical relevance of the information they are learning. This edition weaves timely material on the recent financial crisis throughout the discussion when appropriate. The authors detail both the causes and consequences of recent financial events. This editions new approach in Chapter12, based on the latest progressive research, shows students how to trade off the marginal costs and benefits of debt to arrive at an optimal capital structure. This editions new Chapter 21 closely examines why firms engage in mergers and acquisitions and the consequences and impact of these actions. FEATURES A wealth of extremely interesting, relevant, and up-tothe-minute Finance in Your Life examples highlight finance scenarios that affect todays students lives. Examples emphasize concepts and applications using a perspective to which students can easily relate Intriguing, actual corporate scenarios at the beginning of each chapter capture readers attention. The emphasis on practicality and relevance continues with a myriad of actual examples and practical applications. Completely integrated SmartFinance tools offer much more than isolated computer exercises. Students gain a strong understanding of financial topics as SmartFinance tools illustrate concepts, theories, and ethical issues in real business. Give students integrated access to real company data for financial analysis and research. Thomson ONE lets students apply the most reliable information to financials, earnings estimates, market data, and source documents using the same financial data sources that finance professionals use every day, including Thomson Financial, Worldscope, SEC Disclosure, Datastream, and more. CONTENTS Part I: INTRODUCTION. 1. The Scope of Corporate Finance. 2. Financial Statement and Cash Flow Analysis. 3. The Time Value of Money. Part II: VALUATION, RISK, AND RETURN. 4. Valuing Bonds. 5. Valuing Stocks. 6. The Trade-off between Risk and Return. 7. Risk, Return, and the Capital Asset Pricing Model. Part III: CAPITAL BUDGETING. 8. Capital Budgeting Process and Decision Criteria. 9. Cash Flow and Capital Budgeting. 10. Risk
International Edition

and Capital Budgeting. Part IV: CAPITAL STRUCTURE AND PAYOUT POLICY. 11. Raising Long-Term Financing. 12. Capital Structure. 13. Long-Term Debt and Leasing. 14. Payout Policy. Part V: FINANCIAL PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT. 15. Financial Planning. 16. Cash Conversion, Inventory, and Receivables Management. 17. Cash, Payables, and Liquidity Management. Part VI: SPECIAL TOPICS. 18. International Financial Management. 19. Options. 20. Entrepreneurial Finance and Venture Capital. 21. Mergers, Acquisitions, and Corporate Control. Web Chapters. 22. Bankruptcy and Financial Distress. 23. Risk Management.
2012, 736pp, Paperback, 9781111532154, South-Western College

PRACTICAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT, 7E, INTERNATIONAL EDITION


William R. Lasher Nichols College

Enlist the help of an actual former CFO to introduce your students to the key financial management topics with the seventh edition of PRACTICAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT. Author, former successful CFO, and recognized instructor William R. Lasher captivates your students with unique insights into the issues and challenges facing financial managers every day. From a look at hidden agendas and the biases of decision makers in the firm to their effect on the analyses of financial proposals, Lashers practical, relevant presentation promises to keep students reading. This edition examines the latest financial developments, including a new discussion on IPOs as a broad topic, and the sale of Facebook stock and its fallout in particular. Throughout this edition, Lasher delivers an engaging, thorough presentation that is perfectly matched to the needs of todays business students. He substitutes advanced math in theory sections with everyday math,
83

www.cengageasia.com

numerous worked-out examples, and graphical and intuitive presentations. This edition provides Thomson ONE--Business School Edition exercises to give your students experience using the same financial research tool that professional brokers and analysts trust every day. Also available with the Seventh Edition is CengageNOW, a powerful course management and online homework tool that provides robust instructor control and customization to optimize the student learning experience and meet desired outcomes. Lashers PRACTICAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT, Seventh Edition, delivers the solid understanding of financial management your business students need for future success NEW TO THIS EDITION The seventh edition of PRACTICAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT has been updated throughout, with new content on pass throughs (methods of passing profits through to owners before being taxed), municipal bonds, free cash flow, corporate governance and executive compensation, discounting, and a lengthy new discussion on IPOs and the launch of the Facebook IPO and its turmoil out of the gate. The book introduces each new topic with a thorough explanation that delves into the heart of the business problem or issues. The author starts each discussion with the assumption that students know nothing about the topic. FEATURES Concept Connections: End-of-chapter problems reference in-chapter examples to facilitate review. Students who are challenged by end-of-chapter problems can use convenient cross references that guide them back to corresponding in-chapter examples for review and clarification of concepts. Step-by-step completed examples walk students through the processes: Numerous, detailed workedout examples throughout the text ensure students understand each step as they walk through the processes. Thomson ONE--Business School Edition (BSE) exercises give students practice using financial tools: Thomson ONE provides a full range of fundamental financials, earnings estimates, and market data for hundreds of actual companies. Students access
84

leading financial data sources, including Thomson Financial, Worldscope, and SEC Disclosure as they complete special Thomson ONE--BSE exercises in the text. CONTENTS 1. Foundations. 2. Financial Background: A Review of Accounting, Financial Statements, and Taxes. 3. Cash Flows and Financial Analysis. 4. Financial Planning. 5. The Financial System, Corporate Governance, and Interest. Part II: DISCOUNTED CASH FLOW AND THE VALUE OF SECURITIES. 6. Time Value of Money. 7. The Valuation and Characteristics of Bonds. 8. The Valuation and Characteristics of Stock. 9. Risk and Return. Part III: BUSINESS INVESTMENT DECISIONS--CAPITAL BUDGETING. 10. Capital Budgeting. 11. Cash Flow Estimation. 12. Risk Topics and Real Options in Capital Budgeting. 13. Cost of Capital. Part IV: LONG-TERM FINANCING ISSUES. 14. Capital Structure and Leverage. 15. Dividends. Part V: OPERATIONS ISSUES--WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT AND PLANNING. 16. The Management of Working Capital. 17. Corporate Restructuring. 18. International Finance.
2014, 864pp, Paperback, 9781133593522, South-Western College

ENTREPRENEURIAL FINANCE

ENTREPRENEURIAL FINANCE, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 4E


J. Chris Leach, University of Colorado at Boulder; Ronald W. Melicher, University of Colorado at Boulder

This accessible, reader-friendly edition closely follows a life cycle of the firm approach as it introduces the theories, knowledge, and financial tools an

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

entrepreneur needs to start, build, and eventually harvest a successful venture. This edition clearly focuses on sound financial management practices, showing students how and where to obtain the financial capital necessary to run and grow a venture. This edition explores the most important financial issues that entrepreneurs face, particularly the stages of financing, business cash flow models, and strategic positioning of the early-stage company. Students gain the knowledge to interact successfully with financial institutions and the regulatory agencies that are central to financing ventures as they grow and, ultimately, look for liquidity for their investors. NEW TO THIS EDITION CURRENT, UP-TO-THE-MINUTE COVERAGE HELPS YOU ADDRESS TODAYS MOST RECENT FINANCIAL DEVELOPMENTS. This edition offers some of the most current information and developments available for this course, enabling you to prepare your students with the latest financial tools and knowledge. NEW DISCUSSION HIGHLIGHTS THE SPECIFICS AND ENTREPRENEURIAL OPPORTUNITIES PRESENTED WITH THE 2007-2009 FINANCIAL AND ECONOMIC CRISIS. Students examine the financial crises, resulting entrepreneurial venture opportunities and effective methods for dealing with tighter capital. N E W F R O M T H E H E A D L I N E S F E AT U R E IN EACH CHAPTER HIGHLIGHT INTRIGUING ENTREPRENEURIAL VENTURES. Students see chapter content put into practice as each entrepreneurial venture relates to concepts presented within the chapter. NEW CAPSTONE CASE PROMPTS STUDENTS TO MAKE EARLY-STAGE SOUND FINANCING DECISIONS. This editions new capstone case features Eco-Products, Inc., a company that produces and sells environmentally sound food service products from renewable resources. SUBSTANTIALLY REWRITTEN INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW (CH. 1) NOW REFLECTS TODAYS FOCUS ON ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY PRODUCTS. Students become familiar with clean tech and clean energy potential applications as well as entrepreneurial venture opportunities related to environmentally friendly products. UPDATED PERSONAL AND CORPORATE INCOME TAX INFORMATION REFLECTS THE LATEST
International Edition

CHANGES. Chapter discussion guides students through effectively organizing and financing a new venture (Ch.3) with fresh, contemporary references and information. CONTENTS PART I: BACKGROUND AND ENVIRONMENT. 1. Introduction and Overview. 2. From the Idea to the Business Plan. PART II: ORGANIZING AND OPERATING THE VENTURE. 3. Organizing and Financing a New Venture. 4. Measuring Financial Performance. 5. Evaluating Financial Performance. PART III: PLANNING FOR THE FUTURE. 6. Financial Planning: Short Term and Long Term. 7. Types and Costs of Financial Capital. 8. Securities Law Considerations When Obtaining Venture Financing. PART IV: CREATING AND RECOGNIZING VENTURE VALUE. 9. Valuing Early-Stage Ventures. 10. Venture Capital Valuation Methods. PART V: STRUCTURING FINANCING FOR THE GROWING VENTURE. 11. Professional Venture Capital. 12. Other Financing Alternatives. 13. Security Structures and Determining Enterprise Values. PART VI: EXIT AND TURNAROUND STRATEGIES. 14. Harvesting the Business Venture Investment. 15. Financially Troubled Ventures: Turnaround Opportunities? PART VII: CAPSTONE CASES. Case 1 Eco-Products, Inc. Case 2 Coral Systems, Inc. Case 3 Spatial Technology, Inc.
2012, 688pp, Paperback, 9780538482011, South-Western College

www.cengageasia.com

85

FINANCIAL MARKETS AND INSTITUTIONS

Thoroughly updated to include recent examples and current market information. Industry Insights and Practical Applications as boxed discussion of specific illustrations and examples that complement the main text. FEATURES Search me! finance - 6 months access is provided with the text. Fast and convenient, Search me! finance is an online library of world-class journals, ebooks, newspapers, including The Australian and The New York Times, and magazines including The Economist. It is updated daily. Students can use Search me! finance to explore topics further and provides up-to-date references to assist with their assignments. FinMaths boxes that explain the formulae and equations that are used to calculate security prices and yields as well as the value of other financial instruments. Key terms are defined in the margins where they first appear, for ease of learning and revision. Updated end-of-chapter questions to help students to apply their knowledge and assess their understanding. Chapter-by-chapter web links, references and further reading CONTENTS 1 Overview of the financial system 2 The payments system 3 Authorised deposit taking institutions 4 The stability of deposit taking institutions 5 Introduction to markets 6 Funds management 7 The money market 8 The bond market 9 Shares 10 The share market 11 Foreign exchange and global capital markets 12 Introduction to interest rate risk management 13 Financial futures 14 Swaps 15 Exchange-traded options
2011, 540pp, Paperback, 9780170188449, Cengage Learning Australia

FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS & MARKETS WITH STUDENT RESOURCE ACCESS 12 MONTHS, 6E


Ben Hunt, University of Technology, Sydney; Chris Terry

Thoroughly updated, this new sixth edition of Financial Institutions and Markets focuses on Australias financial system, while retaining the structure of the successful fifth edition. It examines the financial systems three main functions settlement, flow-of-funds and risk transfer and provides a clear and comprehensive integrated account of the activities of Australias financial institutions and markets, including the risks they face and the instruments they use. As well, the major capital and foreign exchange markets and the markets for derivatives (and their use as hedging instruments) are discussed. This new 6th edition covers recent financial innovations, such as high-frequency trading in the share market and APRAs adoption of Basel II (and Basel III) an explanation of how the RBA assesses the financial systems stability. It also includes new Industry Insights and Practical Applications that illustrate specific topics, such as the role of margin loans and short selling in the demise of ABC Learning. NEW TO THIS EDITION Learning from the GFC boxes provide a concise account of aspects of the GFC that provide lessons that complement the books exposition of the operation of the financial system. Online activity icon - directs students to relevant podcasts, videos and information on the web, to help explain issues and concepts that are mentioned in the text.
86

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

EXPANDED QUESTIONS AND APPLICATIONS PROVIDE TIMELY REVIEW. More comprehensive Questions and Applications at the end of each chapter offer engaging exercises to help your students review and apply concepts from the text. FRESH, NEW DESIGN IMPROVES READABILITY. This edition provides content within an inviting, visually appealing fresh design created to improve readability and further encourage student comprehension.

FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND MARKETS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH STOCK TRAK COUPON), 10E
Jeff Madura, Florida Atlantic University

FEATURES INSTRUCTIVE DIAGRAM AT BEGINNING OF EACH PART ILLUSTRATES RELATIONSHIP OF CONCEPTS. This useful, detailed diagram at the beginning of each part of the text visually clarifies how the key concepts of the part relate to one another and details how each text chapter is organized. CLEAR LEARNING OBJECTIVES AND LISTS OF KEY CONCEPTS GUIDE STUDENT READING AND STUDY. To direct your students in their individual study, reading and review, this edition lists learning objectives and key concepts for each chapter at the beginning of the chapter. TIMELY, RELEVANT EXAMPLES REINFORCE PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF CONCEPTS. Numerous memorable examples throughout this edition reinforce key concepts and show students the practical applications and importance of the material theyre learning in each chapter in todays financial world. DETAILED SUGGESTIONS FOR CREDIT CRISIS TERM PAPER PROVIDE MEANINGFUL CONTEXT FOR STUDY. Useful suggestions for creating a Credit Crisis term paper at the end of Chapter 1 provide a relevant, engaging opportunity for students to apply key concepts within a meaningful context. CONTENTS Part 1: OVERVIEW OF THE FINANCIAL ENVIRONMENT. 1. The Role of Financial Markets and Institutions. 2. Interest Rate Determination. 3. Interest Rate Structure. Part II: THE FED AND MONETARY POLICY. 4. The Fed and Its Functions. 5. Monetary Policy. Part III: DEBT SECURITY MARKETS. 6. Money Markets. 7. Bond Markets. 8. Valuation and Risk of Bonds. 9. Mortgage Markets. Part IV: EQUITY MARKETS. 10. Investor Monitoring and Stock Offerings. 11. Valuation and Risk of Stocks. 12. Market Microstructure and Strategies.
87

Maduras leading FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND MARKETS, 10E, International Edition emphasizes securities traded by financial institutions and the scope of participation of those financial institutions within each market. This edition also focuses on the management, performance, and regulatory aspects of financial institutions and explores the functions of the Federal Reserve System, the major debt and equity security markets, and derivative security market. This edition places significant emphasis on current financial reform as updates throughout reflect the most recent financial changes, developments and trends in todays financial industry. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW EMPHASIS ON FINANCIAL REFORM HIGHLIGHTS DEVELOPMENTS RESHAPING THE INDUSTRY. New Financial Reform call-outs appear next to all applicable content. The book still thoroughly addresses the financial and credit crisis, but with less intensity. NEW ONLINE ARTICLES ENCOURAGE FINANCIALLY RELATED INTERNET RESEARCH. This edition provides a new online research assignment corresponding with each chapter that prompts students to both practice their internet research skills as well as connect this editions content to timely financial activities. TIMELY UPDATES THROUGHOUT THIS EDITION R E F L E C T T H E M OS T R E C E N T F I N A N C I A L DEVELOPMENTS AND TRENDS. This editions updated content prepares your students to deal with the most recent financial changes, developments and trends in todays ever-changing financial industry.
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

Part V: DERIVATIVE SECURITY MARKETS. 13. Financial Futures Markets. 14. Option Markets. 15. Interest Rate Derivative Markets. 16. Foreign Exchange Derivative Markets. Part VI: COMMERCIAL BANKING. 17. Commercial Bank Operations. 18. Regulation of Banks. 19. Bank Management. 20. Bank Performance. Part VII: NONBANK OPERATIONS. 21. Thrift Operations. 22. Finance Company Operations. 23. Mutual Fund Operations. 24. Securities Operations. 25. Pension Fund and Insurance Operations.
2012, 752pp, Paperback, 9780538482172, South-Western College

FEATURES A primer for banking students and a reference for industry professionals Reviews key financial services business areas, technologies, and practices, and the differences between North America, Asia, and Europe Analyzes current trends and concerns, such as cloud computing, big data, and ongoing regulatory changes Contains over 70 case studies and 100-plus diagrams. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction. PART 1 Foundations. Chapter 2 Business Process Management. Chapter 3 Solution Architecture. Chapter 4 Technology Solution Delivery. PART 2 Banking Technology. Chapter 5 Banking Contexts. Chapter 6 Deposits and Lending. Chapter 7 Cash Management and Payments. Chapter 8 Trade Services and Finance. Chapter 9 Treasury and Foreign Exchange. Chapter 10 Treasury Derivatives. PART 3 Financial Markets Technology. Chapter 11 Capital Markets Contexts. Chapter 12 Exchanges and Execution Venues. Chapter 13 Financial Market Intermediaries. PART 4 Cross-functional Considerations. Chapter 14 Channels and Customer Relationship Management. Chapter 15 Security and Control Systems. Chapter 16 Risk Management. Chapter 17 Improving Financial Services.
2013, 472pp, Paperback, 9789814416122, Cengage Learning Asia

FINANCIAL SERVICES

FINANCIAL SERVICES TECHNOLOGY PROCESSES, ARCHITECTURE, AND SOLUTIONS


Randall E. Duran

Financial Services Technology reviews key financial services business areas, technologies, and trends, providing a primer for students and a reference for industry professionals. It covers current trends and emerging concerns in financial services industry, including cloud computing, big data, business process management, microfinance, mobile banking, algorithmic trading, and ongoing regulatory changes. In addition, it reviews how financial services processes and practices vary between North America, Asia, and Europe. This book aggregates and condenses a broad range of information related to financial services technology and business applications that, until now, has not been available in a single text or information source.

88

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

INTERNATIONAL FINANCE

INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE FINANCE, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 11E


Jeff Madura, Florida Atlantic University

Equip your students for success in international finance with the depth of theory and practical applications in this best-selling text. Maduras INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE FINANCE, 11E, International Edition builds on the fundamental principles of corporate finance to provide the timely information and contemporary insights your students need to prosper in todays global business environment. Well-known for its inviting reader-friendly style and clear explanations, this book introduces international finance with a focus on the important role of modern multinational corporations in global commerce. The book discusses a wide range of managerial topics using a strong corporate perspective. The latest updates throughout this edition emphasize the most recent financial changes and industry trends to prepare your students for contemporary practice. This edition also now highlights financial reform and its impact on international finance today with new call-outs and content. New Online Articles as well as expanded real-world applications and clear, relevant examples provide the hands-on experience your students need to understand and effectively manage within the dynamic field of international finance. Instructive diagrams, learning features, and self-test opportunities further guide your students to the strong understanding of financial theory theyll need for international finance success. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW EMPHASIS ON FINANCIAL REFORM HIGHLIGHTS DEVELOPMENTS RESHAPING THE

INDUSTRY. This edition prepares your students for the international financial world of tomorrow with a new focus on reform in the financial industry. New financial reform call-outs appear next to all applicable content. The book still thoroughly addresses the global financial and credit crisis, but with less intensity. NEW ONLINE ARTICLES ENCOURAGE FINANCIALLY RELATED INTERNET RESEARCH. This edition provides a new online research assignment at the end of each chapter that prompts students to practice their internet research skills as well as connect this editions content to timely financial activities. TIMELY UPDATES THROUGHOUT THIS EDITION R E F L E C T T H E M OS T R E C E N T F I N A N C I A L DEVELOPMENTS AND TRENDS. This editions updated content prepares your students to deal with the most recent financial changes, developments and trends in todays ever-changing financial industry. EXPANDED QUESTIONS AND APPLICATIONS PROVIDE TIMELY REVIEW. More comprehensive Questions and Applications at the end of each chapter offer engaging exercises to help your students review and apply concepts from the text. Averages of two to three new problems have been added to this section in most chapters. FEATURES INSTRUCTIVE DIAGRAM AT BEGINNING OF EACH PART ILLUSTRATES RELATIONSHIP OF CONCEPTS. This useful, detailed diagram at the beginning of each part of the text visually clarifies how the key concepts of the part relate to one another. The diagram also details how each text chapter is organized. CLEAR LEARNING OBJECTIVES AND LISTS OF KEY CONCEPTS GUIDE READING AND STUDY. To direct students in their individual study, review and reading, this edition lists learning objectives and key concepts for each chapter at the beginning of the chapter. These learning tools assist students in preparation for midterm and final exams. TIMELY, RELEVANT EXAMPLES REINFORCE PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF CONCEPTS. Numerous memorable examples throughout this edition reinforce key concepts and show students the practical applications and importance of the material theyre learning within each chapter in todays financial world.
89

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

CONTENTS Part I: THE INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL ENVIRONMENT. 1. Multinational Financial Management. 2. International Flow of Funds. 3. International Financial Markets. 4. Exchange Rate Determination. 5. Currency Derivatives. Part II: EXCHANGE RATE BEHAVIOR. 6. Government Influence on Exchange Rates. 7. International Arbitrage and Interest Rate Parity. 8. Inflation, Interest Rates, and Exchange Rates. Part III: EXCHANGE RATE RISK MANAGEMENT. 9. Forecasting Exchange Rates. 10. Measuring Exposure to Exchange Rate Fluctuations. 11. Managing Transaction Exposure. 12. Managing Economic Exposure and Translation Exposure. Part IV: LONG-TERM ASSET AND LIABILITY MANAGEMENT. 13. Direct Foreign Investment. 14. Multinational Capital Budgeting. 15. International Corporate Governance and Control. 16. Analysis of Country Risk. 17. Multinational Cost of Capital and Capital Structure. 18. Financing in the Long-Term. Part V: SHORT-TERM ASSET AND LIABILITY MANAGEMENT. 19. Financing International Trade. 20. Financing in the Short-Term. 21. International Cash Management.
2012, 736pp, Paperback, 9780538482974, South-Western College

FEATURES Groundbreaking: It is the first textbook to explain option pricing theory and apply those theories to real financing decisions. Student Friendly Read: The text has an easy to read style, and uses real-world applications to bring theories to life. End of Chapter Materials: It is the first real options text to provide an end-of-chapter pedagogy for students to use. CONTENTS 1. Introduction. PART 1. THE THEORY OF VALUE. 2. Valuation of Financial Assets. 3. Valuation of Real Assets. PART 2. THE BINOMIAL MODEL. 4. Valuation by Arbitrage in the Binomial Model. PART 3. EUROPEANSTYLE REAL OPTIONS. 5. Research and Development: Valuing the Preliminary Design of a Super-Jumbo Jet at Boeing. 6. Platform Investments: How Much Are You Willing To Lose in the Name of Strategy? A Lesson on Volatility Estimation. 7. Multi-Staged Investments: The Staged Roll-Out of Wal-Mart Neighborhood Markets. 8. Multi-Staged Investments with Technical (or Private) Risk: Early-Stage Pharmaceutical R&D, and the Interaction of Market and Technical Risk. 9. Rainbow Options. PART 4. AMERICAN-STYLE REAL OPTIONS. 10. More On Arbitrage Valuation in the Binomial Model: Early Exercise of Options, Convenience Yield, and Value Erosion. 11. The Traditional Look of Convenience Yield: An Option to Develop a Coal Mine. 12. Value Erosion that Triggers Early Exercise: An Option on a Tax Credit Investment at Koch Industries. 13. Optimal Abandonment Strategy: Closing a Money-Losing Foreign Subsidiary at Mead Johnson. An Application with Foreign Exchange Risk. 14. Delayed Response to Decisions: Fab Shells at Intel. 15. Multiple Choices: Optimal Pollution Compliance Strategy at the Southern Company. 16. Conclusion: What Else Can You Do?
2007, 256pp, Hardback, 9780324259636, South-Western College

INVESTMENTS

AN APPLIED COURSE IN REAL OPTIONS VALUATION


Richard L. Shockley , Indiana University

APPLIED COURSE IN REAL OPTIONS VALUATION, offers an excellent guide to option pricing in todays fast paced business world. This innovative text not only provides the theories of option pricing but includes real-world examples and situations.

90

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

understand the basic materials covered in the text. Solutions to these questions at the end of the book allow students to check their own comprehension. FEATURES MOST RECENT ARTICLES AND READINGS REFLECT CHANGES IN TODAYS FINANCIAL BUSINESS WORLD: The latest updates, articles and suggested readings at the end of each chapter keep your course abreast of the many challenges and changes throughout todays financial crises. Internet-related information and the books companion web site further ensure the material you present is the most current. EXTENSIVE, ENGAGING ILLUSTRATIONS CLARIFY CONCEPTS: A wealth of captivating, useful illustrations, including more than 100 figures and more than 100 tables throughout this edition, further expand upon and reinforce the concepts presented in the text. Figures in the text build on each other to illustrate links between stocks, risk-free bonds, futures, options, forwards, Black-Scholes call/put pricing, and similar concepts. MINIMAL USE OF TECHNICAL MATHEMATICS KEEPS THE BOOK ACCESSIBLE FOR STUDENTS: While financial derivatives are unavoidably a technical subject, the authors do not emphasize calculus that is not necessary for learning material at this level. This edition uses a flexible mathematical approach that places more complex material in end-of-chapter appendices -- all while keeping the text challenging and applicable to todays needs. PROVEN END-OF-CHAPTER PRACTICE AND NEW TEST BANK PROBLEMS CHALLENGE STUDENTS UNDERSTANDING: A variety of end-of-chapter problems in this book provide focused opportunities for students to apply the concepts theyve learned. ENGAGING QUOTES BEGIN EACH CHAPTER AND DIRECT THE READERS ATTENTION TO THE CONTENT THAT FOLLOWS: This edition captures your students attention at the beginning of the chapter as intriguing quotes turn the readers focus to the useful presentation of theory and applications that follow. U P DAT E D M A K I N G T H E CO N N E C T I O N DEMONSTRATES THE MOST RECENT CHANGES IN THE FIELD TODAY: You can clearly show your students the power of derivatives at work in todays financial
91

AN INTRODUCTION TO DERIVATIVES AND RISK MANAGEMENT, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH STOCK-TRAK COUPON), 9E
Don M. Chance, Louisiana State University ; Robert Brooks, University of Alabama, Tuscaloosa

This leading text gives students a solid understanding of financial derivatives and their use in managing the risks of financial decisions. AN INTRODUCTION TO DERIVATIVES AND RISK MANAGEMENT, 9E, International Edition provides a blend of institutional material, theory, and practical applications. The latest financial information throughout this edition and timely updates on the texts website ensure your course reflects the most recent changes in one of the most volatile sectors of todays financial world. Youll find detailed coverage of options, futures, forwards, swaps, and risk management as well as a balanced introduction to pricing, trading, and strategy. A variety of practical end-of-chapter applications, memorable examples from real businesses, and minimal use of technical mathematics keep the text accessible and engaging for students. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW MAKING THE CONNECTION BOXES DEMONSTRATE FINANCIAL DECISION-MAKING IN ACTION: Now you can give your students insights into how the content applies directly to financial decisionmaking in todays business world. Engaging Making the Connection boxes highlight examples from real businesses and actual market conditions to emphasize the practicality of chapter theories. NEW CONCEPT CHECKS ENSURE STUDENT COMPREHENSION: This new set of Concept Checks questions at the end of each chapter assists the students in clarifying and ensuring that they
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

industry with fresh examples and explanations within Derivatives Tools features throughout this edition. FRESH, DYNAMIC POWERPOINT SLIDES BRING LECTURES TO LIFE: Now you can clarify principles for your students and keep them engaged with dynamic, updated PowerPoint Presentation slides that are easy to use and simple to customize to your unique course needs. SUPPORT WEBSITE: Give your students the tools they need for a strong understanding of derivatives and risk management with the rich array of learning resources and teaching tools. Youll find the latest updates to keep your course on the cutting edge including updates to Errata, useful Web links, author-provided spreadsheets, and a new Technical Notes feature that clearly shows how various formulas and measures of various kinds of risk are derived. CONTENTS 1. Introduction. PART I Options. 2. Structure of Options Markets. 3. Principles of Option Pricing. 4. Option Pricing Models: The Binomial Model. 5. Option Pricing Models: The Black-Scholes-Merton Model. 6. Basic Option Strategies. 7. Advanced Option Strategies. PART II Forwards, Futures, and Swaps. 8. The Structure of Forward and Futures Markets. 9. Principles of Pricing Forwards, Futures, and Options on Futures. 10. Futures Arbitrage Strategies. 11. Forward and Futures Hedging, Spread, and Target Strategies. 12. Swaps. PART III Advanced Topics. 13. Interest Rate Forwards and Options. 14. Advanced Derivatives and Strategies. 15. Financial Risk Management Techniques and Applications. 16. Managing Risk in an Organization.
2013, 704pp, Paperback, 9781133190219, South-Western College

ANALYSIS OF INVESTMENTS AND MANGEMENT OF PORTFOLIOS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH THOMSON ONE - BUSINESS SCHOOL EDITION AND STOCK-TRAK COUPON), 10E
Frank K. Reilly, University of Notre Dame; Keith C. Brown, University of Texas at Austin

Filled with real-world illustrations and hands-on applications, this text takes a rigorous, empirical approach to teaching students about topics such as investment instruments, capital markets, behavioral finance, hedge funds, and international investing. It also emphasizes how investment practice and theory are influenced by globalization. In addition, this tenth edition includes new coverage of relevant topics such as the impact of the 2008 financial market crisis, changes in rating agencies and government agencies such as Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, global assets risk-adjusted performance and intercorrelations, and more. Students can also take advantage of the Thomson ONE Business School Edition, an online, one-stop shop to do financial analysis and research. NEW TO THIS EDITION Real-world relevance: Through the inclusion of recent changes and events in the field, students are able to see the real-world application of what they are learning. For example, the tenth edition includes integrated coverage of the impact of the 2008 financial market crisis on financial markets. In addition, coverage also includes discussion of several new fixed income instruments, changes in rating agencies and government agencies such as Fannie and Freddie, and the bond insurance industry and municipal bond sector. Domestic and global coverage: The tenth edition

92

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

includes extensive discussion of the significant changes in the organization and functioning of the U.S. and global security markets, giving students valuable insight into this hot topic. Expanded coverage: In-depth discussions of portfolio performance measurement analytics, bond portfolio strategies, stock portfolio strategies, and global assets risk-adjusted performance and intercorrelations for the 30-year period ending in 2010 ensures that you are provided with the most up-to-date information. Derivative securities: Increased emphasis on derivative securities in portfolio management gives students insight into this important topic. FEATURES Concise: More streamlined than ever, the tenth edition delivers comprehensive yet succinct coverage, providing just the right amount of detail to ensure solid student understanding and enabling you to cover more ground in the span of the course. Ethics emphasis: Discussions of codes of ethics highlight the importance--and sometimes lack-of ethics in todays financial markets, prompting students to examine and shore up their personal principles and values. Thomson ONE--Business School Edition: Similar to tools analysts and brokers use in real practice, Thomson ONE--Business School Edition equips students with a one-stop shop to do financial analysis and research, giving them hands-on practice working with real-world applications. Stock-Trak: Packaged with every copy of the book is a $7.00-off coupon for Stock-Trak Gold Account. Stock-Trak is an optional stock simulation that can give students even more access to real-world applications, enhancing the courses practical experience. Global perspective: ANALYSIS OF INVESTMENTS AND MANAGEMENT OF PORTFOLIOS, 10E, International Edition leads the market with its solid coverage of international issues--the most comprehensive on the market. CONTENTS PART 1: THE INVESTMENT BACKGROUND. 1. An Overview of the Investment Process. 2. The Asset Allocation Decision. 3. The Global Market Investment Decision. 4. Securities Markets: Organization and Operation. 5. Security-Market Indexes. PART 2:
International Edition

DEVELOPMENTS IN INVESTMENT THEORY. 6. Efficient Capital Markets. 7. An Introduction to Portfolio Management. 8. An Introduction to Asset Pricing Models. 9. Multifactor Models of Risk and Return. PART 3: VALUATION PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES. 10. Analysis of Financial Statements. 11. Security Valuation Principles. PART 4: ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT OF COMMON STOCKS. 12. Macroanalysis and Microvaluation of the Stock Market. 13. Industry Analysis. 14. Company Analysis and Stock Valuation. 15. Equity Portfolio Management Strategies. 16. Technical Analysis. PART 5: ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT OF BONDS. 17. Bond Fundamentals. 18. The Analysis and Valuation of Bonds. 19. Bond Portfolio Management Strategies. PART 6: DERIVATIVE SECURITY ANALYSIS. 20. An Introduction to Derivative Markets and Securities. 21. Forward and Futures Contracts. 22. Option Contracts. 23. Swap Contracts, Convertible Securities, and Other Embedded Derivatives. PART 7: SPECIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF ASSET MANAGEMENT. 24. Professional Money Management, Alternative Assets, and Industry Ethics. 25. Evaluation of Portfolio Performance.
2012, 1104pp, Paperback, 9780538482486, South-Western College

INVESTMENTS, 11E
AN INTRODUCTION, INTERNATIONAL EDITION (WITH THOMSON ONE - BUSINESS SCHOOL EDITION 6-MONTH PRINTED ACCESS CARD AND STOCK-TRAK COUPON)
Herbert B. Mayo, The College of New Jersey

Using Mayos INVESTMENTS: AN INTRODUCTION, 11E, International Edition introduce students to todays most important investment topics from the perspective of an individual financial planner. This edition provides an inviting, comprehensive approach to investments from the fundamentals students need to master for
93

www.cengageasia.com

success on the CFP exam to more advanced topics. This edition is an ideal, understandable choice for business students as well as finance majors. Concepts build on one another in this editions updated Financial Advisors Investment Case at the end of each chapter providing a strong overview of todays most pertinent investment opportunities and challenges. Throughout each chapter, this edition clearly emphasizes how students can apply what theyre learning to make solid investment decisions. Students can even gain hands-on experience with the same financial analysis tool used on Wall Street with this editions access to Thomson ONEBusiness School Edition and corresponding problems in the text. NEW TO THIS EDITION Two chapters were rewritten: Chapter 9 on the valuation of stock using discounted cash flow and Chapter 20 on financial planning. The Point of Interest boxed feature has been omitted or integrated into the text. Virtually all footnotes have been incorporated into the text material. This edition includes two new features designed for instructors who want more problems and self-help projects. The first feature is Relationships, which asks students to determine the relationship between two things. The second new feature is Fundamental Worked Problems. These are illustrations of basic problems covered in the chapter. The answers as well as the steps necessary to solve the problems are provided. FEATURES THOMSON ONE-BSE PROBLEMS PROVIDE FIRSTHAND PRACTICE WITH THE DATABASE PROFESSIONALS USE. Give your students handson experience with the same financial online database that Wall Street analysts rely on every day. Thomson ONE-BSE problems at the end of chapters give students an opportunity to present earnings estimates, financials, and market data using Thomson ONE-BSE data from hundreds of todays leading companies. Thomson ONE-BSE access is included with each new book. STUDENTS FOCUS ON THE CFP TOPICS MOST IMPORTANT FOR TODAYS EXAM. Widely recognized for its proven focus and clear presentation of CFP testing topics, this edition continues to emphasize
94

concepts students need for success when they take todays CFP exam. FINANCIAL ADVISORS INVESTMENT CASE PREPARES STUDENTS FOR REAL INVESTMENT DECISIONS. Brief, engaging cases at the end of each chapter create a dynamic, continuing Financial Advisors Case that integrates each chapters materials. Students clearly see how concepts from each chapter apply to investment decisions from a financial planners perspective. Cases follow todays proven format for effective learning. EXPANDED COVERAGE OF STOCK VALUATION RATIOS THOROUGHLY INTRODUCES THIS KEY TOPIC. Give students a strong understanding of adjusted PEG, return on equity from price to book, and profit margin from price to sales with this editions complete expanded introduction to stock valuation ratiosone of todays key investment topics. CONTENTS Part I: THE INVESTMENT PROCESS AND FINANCIAL CONCEPTS. 1. An Introduction to Investments. 2. Securities Markets. 3. The Time Value of Money. 4. Financial Planning, Taxation and the Efficiency of Financial Markets. 5. Risk and Portfolio Management. Part II: INVESTMENT COMPANIES. 6. Investment Companies: Mutual Funds. 7. Closed-End Investment Companies, Real Estate Investment Trusts (REITs), and Exchange-Traded Funds (ETFs). Part III: INVESTING IN COMMON STOCK. 8. Stock. 9. The Valuation of Common Stock. 10. Investment Returns and Aggregate Measures of Stock Markets. 11. The Macroeconomic Environment for Investment Decisions. 12. Behavioral Finance and Technical Analysis. Part IV: INVESTING IN FIXED-INCOME SECURITIES. 13. The Bond Market. 14. The Valuation of Fixed-Income Securities. 15. Government Securities. 16. Convertible Bonds and Convertible Preferred Stock. Part V: DERIVATIVES. 17. An Introduction to Options. 18. Option Valuation and Strategies. 19. Commodity and Financial Futures. Part VI: AN OVERVIEW. 20. Financial Planning and Investing in an Efficient Market Context.
2014, 816pp, Paperback, 9781285175676, South-Western College

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

INVESTMENTS, 4E
CONCEPTS & APPLICATIONS WITH STUDENT RESOURCE ACCESS 12 MONTHS
Tim Brailsford, University of Queensland; Richard Heaney , RMIT; Chris Bilson , ANU

pricing). Expansion of asset class material (Chapters 2, 3 and Chapters 18-20 on portfolio formation) have been expanded to include greater material in areas such as Real Estate (in particular exchange traded securities such as ETF and REITs), and commodities (such as oil, gold and base metals). Refocused discussion of market efficiency (Chapter 10) to reflect recent changes in the literature. Updated alternative asset class discussion (Chapter 18) reflecting the new products and assets (such as infrastructure, energy, ethical funds and hedge funds). CONTENTS Part 1: The investment framework 1. The investment decision 2. Australian financial markets 3. The international investment environment 4. Financial management: Derivative instruments and information sources Part 2: Principles of passive management and asset pricing 5. Money market securities 6. Bonds 7. Investor preferences and portfolio concepts 8. Risky asset pricing models and the CAPM 9. Alternative risky asset pricing models 10. Market efficiency Part 3: Practices of active equity management 11. Equity valuation models 12. Macro- and industry analysis of share markets 13. Qualitative stock selection 14. Quantitative company analysis Part 4: Derivatives and risk management 15. Futures and forward contracts 16. Option contracts 17. Advanced issues in options Part 5: Management of multi-asset portfolios 18. Alternative investment classes 19. Portfolio management 20. Performance evaluation of managed funds.
2011, 832pp, Paperback, 9780170188241, Cengage Learning Australia

Investments: Concepts & Applications explores the complexities of modern financial markets in combination with an historical analysis of investment theory. The text maintains a strong emphasis on the techniques and applications of investment management set within a regional context. This fourth edition continues to link theory and research with the real-world financial markets, including an in-depth analysis of the Global Financial Crisis and expanded coverage on alternative investments. NEW TO THIS EDITION In the news boxes in each chapter feature news articles with commentary helping students relate their study of investments to the real-world business environment. Search me! finance 6 months access. Search me! finance is an online library of world-class journals, ebooks and newspapers, including The Australian, The New York Times, and The Economist, and is updated daily. NEW topics covered include: global financial crisis, gearing equity investments, margin loans, international commodities trading, asset backed securities, arbitrage profits, Carharts extension, using the CAPM or the ICAPM, price versus value. Coverage of the recent global financial crisis and the resulting unprecedented shake-up of world markets (Chapters 3, 4 and 9 primarily). Exploration of Chinas increasing importance as a global player and the implications for investments (primarily Chapters 3 on the International Investment Environment and Chapter 9 on international asset
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

95

Consistent industry and company examples: in the equity valuation. oriented chapters.
2006, 784pp, Paperback, 9780324323849, South-Western College

INVESTMENTS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 7E


Frank K. Reilly , University of Notre Dame; Edgar A. Norton , Illinois State University

To help understand how to manage ones money to derive the most from what you earn, to develop a way of analyzing and thinking about investments, and to pass on the excitement about investing, are the goals the authors have set for this edition. Global investing information, descriptive and theoretical material, practitioner investment techniques, and drawing from knowledge and readings for those preparing for the CFA exams, are highlights of this edition. Reilly and Norton have thoroughly revised, reorganized, and updated material, and cover the major topics logically and concisely, providing a strong base for those who want to do advanced work in investment analysis and valuation. NEW TO THIS EDITION Currency: More up to date examples. Real World: Many more real-world examples. Real Tools for Students: Addition of Thomson ONE - BSE. Enhanced End-of-Chapter Materials: Thomson ONE: Business School Edition questions. Online e-Lectures. FEATURES CFA emphasis: Many end-of-chapter questions and problems are drawn from previous CFA exams. Intregrated View of Investments: Finance/investment professional must know interrelationships between investment concepts and how to use available tools and principles. Spreadsheet Applications: Spreadsheet exercises in virtually all chapters allow better analyses of the topics discussed in the chapter.
96

PORTFOLIO CONSTRUCTION, MANAGEMENT, AND PROTECTION (WITH STOCK-TRAK COUPON), INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 5E
Robert A. Strong, University of Maine

Strengthen students knowledge and skills in traditional investments information as well as portfolio theory with the latest edition of this unique applicationsoriented text. Strongs PORTFOLIO CONSTRUCTION, MANAGEMENT, AND PROTECTION, 5E International Edition, transitions students from theory to practice with a straightforward approach that balances coverage of both the small and large investor. This edition addresses unique topics not found in other texts, such as fiduciary duty and investment policy. The books blend of theory and applications covers the objectives of both the traditional investments course and portfolio theory course, making it an ideal solution for schools without a dedicated portfolio course. Abundant references to the CFA exam and questions drawn from the CFA exam help students prepare for future success. FEATURES NEW TOPICS REFLECT MOST RECENT INDUSTRY DEVELOPMENTS: This edition reflects the latest data and numerous new market-driven topics such as Volume Weighted Average Price (VWAP) and implementation shortfall as an evaluation measure. Students examine online services such as the Value Line Investment Analyzer and stock screeners available at Yahoo! and Morningstar. New discussion
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

highlights single stock futures as a hedging tool (Chapter 22). PORTFOLIO MEMOS EMPHASIZE APPLICATION: Portfolio Memo boxes throughout the book demonstrate how students can apply the finance concepts they have just learned to real-world situations EXTENSIVE FIGURES AND TABLES PROVIDE QUICK REFERENCE: This editions extensive collection of figures and tables summarizes chapter content for quick student reference and ease in studying. VARIETY OF PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS HELP IN PREPARING FOR CFA EXAM: End-of-chapter summaries, questions, problems, and Internet-based exercises help students practice and apply chapter concepts. Many of the problems are linked to the CFA exam to provide critical practice in taking the exam. APPENDICES OFFER IN-DEPTH COVERAGE OF ADDITIONAL TOPICS: Three appendices provide in-depth coverage and analysis of additional topics of interest. The first appendix, found after Chapter 3, details a term-length student project on mutual funds. CONTENTS

PERSONAL FINANCE

ECONOMIC EDUCATION FOR CONSUMERS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 4E


Roger LeRoy Miller, Institute for University Studies, Arlington, Texas; Alan D. Stafford, Niagara County Community College

PART I: BACKGROUND, BASIC PRINCIPLES, AND INVESTMENT POLICY. 1. The Process of Portfolio Management. 2. Valuation, Risk, Return, and Uncertainty. 3. Setting Portfolio Objectives. 4. Investment Policy. PART II: PORTFOLIO CONSTRUCTION. 5. The Mathematics of Diversification. 6. Why Diversification Is a Good Idea. 7. International Investment and Diversification. 8. The Capital Markets and Market Efficiency. 9. Picking the Equity Players. 10. Stock Selection Models. 11. Security Screening. 12. Bond Pricing and Selection. 13. The Role of Real Assets. 14. Alternative Investments. PART III: PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT. 15. Revision of the Equity Portfolio. 16. Revision of the Fixed Income Portfolio. 17. Principles of Options and Option Pricing. 18. Option Overwriting. 19. Performance Evaluation. 20. Fiduciary Duties and Responsibilities. PART IV: PORTFOLIO PROTECTION AND EMERGING TOPICS. 21. Principles of the Futures Market. 22. Benching the Equity Players. 23. Removing Interest Rate Risk. 24. Integrating Derivative Assets and Portfolio Management. 25. Contemporary Issues in Portfolio Management.
2009, 720pp, Paperback, 9780324593891, South-Western College

ECONOMIC EDUCATION FOR CONSUMERS, 4th Edition, INTERNATIONAL EDITION brings economic, consumer, and personal finance topics to life. Exciting changes to this edition include a bright, new design and updated information on important changes in technology, banking, and taxes. Organized into several class-length lessons, each chapter contains several features to capture and maintain student interest, such as Consumer Alert, Vote Your Wallet, Inside the Numbers, Math of Money, What in the World?, and NetBookmark. NEW TO THIS EDITION Expanded Coverage: Learn to plan for college, retirement, saving, loans, and more. Updated Content: New coverage of online banking and shopping, reflecting the changes in technology. FEATURES What Would You Do? introduces chapter content by asking students to assess their feelings about a specific topic. What Would You Do Now? helps students see how their attitudes may have changed based on what they have learned. Life-Span Plan Project links all the personal finance aspects of a students life into a capstone project. The semester-length project incorporates the concepts learned throughout the course into a comprehensive life-span plan. This project helps make the course relevant for students who need the consistent
97

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

organization and discipline throughout the semester. Reviewers said What in the World? questions were thought-provoking and would meet the standards concerning globalization. Real-World: Emphasis is on real-world situations and applications in the features and the text. CONTENTS 1. Consumers: The Engine that Runs the Economy. 2. Buying Technology Products: Lets Talk Tech. 3. Consumer Protection: Rights, Responsibilities, Resolutions. 4. Choose a Career: Get a Job. 5. Taxes: How Much Income Will You Keep? 6. Budgeting: How Will You Use Your Money? 7. Banking Services: Where to Stash Your Cash. 8. Saving: Plan for Financial Security. 9. Investing: Prepare for Your Future. 10.Credit: Youre in Charge. 11. Budget Essentials: Food, Clothes, Fun. 12. Transportation: How Will You Get There? 13. Housing: A Place to Call Home. 14. Automobile and Home Insurance: Sharing the Risk. 15. Health and Life Insurance: Your Personal Security. 16. Choose Services: When You Need Help. 17. Global Economy: What It Means to You.
2010, 656pp, Paperback, 9781439046821, South-Western

to todays busy learner. Shorter chapters, an inviting design, engaging visuals, and removable Chapter-inReview cards work with numerous online student study tools to reinforce the books solid life-cycle approach to personal financial management. Students study financial plans, assets, credit, insurance, investment, and retirement as individuals and families progress through life. All online tools, including Excel worksheets that correspond to the books exercises and Kiplinger videos with money management and investing advice, are easily accessed through PFIN3s CourseMate website. Time-saving CengageNOW online course management and Aplia for Finance automated homework solutions further ensure that students develop todays most important personal finance skills. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW UPDATES THROUGHOUT THIS EDITION REFLECT THE LATEST FINANCIAL LAWS AND INFORMATION. All information and data now reflects todays most current statistical information and laws regarding taxes, health care, credit, banking, insurance, and estate planning. The new PLANNING OVER A LIFETIME feature appears at the end of most chapters. This chart applies the chapters subject matter to each stage of life, showing students what they should do at any given age to make the most of their money. The new BEHAVIOR MATTERS feature uses real-life statistics and personal questions to get students thinking about how altering their everyday behavior can result in bigger savings and more confidence in their financial plan. FEATURES AN INNOVATIVE COMBINATION OF CONTENT DELIVERY BOTH IN PRINT AND ONLINE provides a core text and a wealth of comprehensive multimedia teaching and learning assets based on input from student focus groups and surveys and from interviews with faculty and students. SHORTER COMPREHENSIVE CHAPTERS COMMUNICATE PERSONAL FINANCE CONCEPTS WITHIN A MODERN DESIGN. PFIN3 uses an engaging and accessible format to deliver more personal finance content without minimizing coverage for your course. CHAPTER-IN-REVIEW CARDS AT THE BACK OF THE STUDENT EDITION PROVIDE STUDENTS WITH A
International Edition

PFIN3 (WITH FINANCE COURSEMATE AND EBOOK PRINTED ACCESS CARD), 3E


Lawrence J. Gitman, San Diego State University - Emeritus; Michael D. Joehnk, Arizona State University; Randall Billingsley, Virginia Tech

Created through an extensive student-tested, facultyapproved review process with student and faculty input, PFIN3 is an engaging and accessible solution designed to accommodate the diverse lifestyles of todays learners at a value-based price. PFIN3 continues to provide the personal finance content students need in a concise, approachable format that appeals
98

www.cengageasia.com

PORTABLE STUDY TOOL. Chapter-in-Review cards contain pertinent information students need for effective class preparation. A FULL SUITE OF UNIQUE LEARNING TOOLS APPEALS TO DIFFERENT LEARNING STYLES. Online study tools are available to students. Online resources, including quizzing, videos, bonus exercises and exhibits, and more, are only a click away. CONTENTS Part I: FOUNDATIONS OF FINANCIAL PLANNING. 1. Understanding the Financial Planning Process. 2. Developing Your Financial Statements and Plans. 3. Preparing Your Taxes. Part II: MANAGING BASIC ASSETS. 4. Managing Your Cash and Savings. 5. Making Automobile and Housing Decisions. Part III: MANAGING CREDIT. 6. Using Credit. 7. Using Consumer Loans. Part IV: MANAGING INSURANCE NEEDS. 8. Insuring Your Life. 9. Insuring Your Health. 10. Protecting Your Property. Part V: MANAGING INVESTMENTS. 11. Investment Planning. 12. Investing in Stocks and Bonds. 13. Investing in Mutual Funds, Exchange-Traded Funds, and Real Estate. Part VI: RETIREMENT AND ESTATE PLANNING. 14. Planning for Retirement. 15. Preserving Your Estate.
2014, 384pp, Paperback, 9781285082578, South-Western College

and understanding they need to define and achieve their financial goals. The book follows a life-cycle approach--addressing financial plans, assets, credit, insurance, investment, and retirement--as individuals and families progress through life. The latest updates reflect the most recent financial developments and research--from new tax laws and the latest financial data to professional financial advice that considers the impact of the recent global financial crisis. Allnew features teach students to use todays critical financial tools and technology, including financial planning software. CFP practice questions provide valuable student practice. A complete support package, including CengageNOW online course management system, saves you time as you put the best in personal financial planning in students hands. NEW TO THIS EDITION THE MOST CURRENT UPDATES AVAILABLE REFLECT THE LATEST TAX LAWS AND FINANCIAL DATA. The latest updates to this leading text incorporate all of the newest tax laws with special sections on tax preparation as well as recent personal examples and contemporary financial advice. The latest financial data, figures, and tables keep your course up to date as you present text content. The new PLANNING OVER A LIFETIME feature appears at the end of most chapters. This chart applies the chapters subject matter to each stage of life, showing students what they should do at any given age to make the most of their money. THE LATEST COVERAGE ADDRESSES TODAYS MOST PERTINENT FINANCE TOPICS FOR STUDENTS. This edition examines the latest significant financial developments as well as the most important topics for students. The new BEHAVIOR MATTERS feature uses real-life statistics and personal questions to get students thinking about how altering their everyday behavior can result in bigger savings and more confidence in their financial plan. FEATURES THOROUGH UPDATES BRING A MORE PERSONAL TOUCH TO THE SUBJECT MATTER. A friendly tone helps relate big financial ideas to students everyday lives, based on the latest research and input from practicing professionals and leading instructors. The
99

PERSONAL FINANCIAL PLANNING, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 13E


Lawrence J. Gitman, San Diego State University - Emeritus; Michael D. Joehnk, Arizona State University; Randy Billingsley, Virginia Tech University

Knowing what to do with your money is more important than ever. Gitman/Joehnk/Billingsleys market-leading PERSONAL FINANCIAL PLANNING, 13E, International Edition provides students with the tools, techniques,
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

book continues to emphasize how key principles of personal financial planning--saving, diversifying investments, watching expenditures, and borrowing carefully--remain valid. CRISP, EXCITING, AND FRIENDLY NEW DESIGN ENCOURAGES STUDENTS UNDERSTANDING. Based on feedback from current instructors, financial planners, and students, this edition incorporates numerous updates and a fresh design to ensure that the book presents financial information in a clear, concise, and understandable manner. Updated, practical sidebar discussions provide useful tips and guidelines, and numerous learning features reinforce the inviting, meaningful design. INTEGRATED LEARNING SYSTEM ANCHORS AND GUIDES EFFECTIVE LEARNING. Each chapter opens with six clear Learning Goals that link the chapters material to specific learning outcomes. Learning Goals match chapter headlines, summaries, and end-ofchapter problems to direct learning. Corresponding Concept Checks at the end of each major section ensure that students thoroughly understand the material before moving on. STUDENTS WILL RELATE TO CHAPTER CONTENT IMMEDIATELY. A How Will This Affect Me? feature appears at the beginning of each chapter. The feature explains in plain language why students should find the chapters topic relevant to their life, engaging students from the start. CONTENTS Part I: FOUNDATIONS OF FINANCIAL PLANNING. 1. Understanding the Financial Planning Process. 2. Developing Your Financial Statements and Plans. 3. Preparing Your Taxes. Part II: MANAGING BASIC ASSETS. 4. Managing Your Cash and Savings. 5. Making Automobile and Housing Decisions. Part III: MANAGING CREDIT. 6. Using Credit. 7. Using Consumer Loans. Part IV: MANAGING INSURANCE NEEDS. 8. Insuring Your Life. 9. Insuring Your Health. 10. Protecting Your Property. Part V: MANAGING INVESTMENTS. 11. Investment Planning. 12. Investing in Stocks and Bonds. 13. Investing in Mutual Funds and Real Estate. Part VI: RETIREMENT AND ESTATE PLANNING. 14. Planning for Retirement. 15. Preserving Your Estate.
2014, 576pp, Paperback, 9781111971649, South-Western College

SURVEY OF FINANCE

AN INTRODUCTION TO INSTITUTIONS, MANAGEMENT & INVESTMENTS, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 10E


Herbert B. Mayo, The College of New Jersey

AN INTRODUCTION TO INSTITUTIONS, MANAGEMENT & INVESTMENTS, 10E, International Edition by Herbert B. Mayo discusses the three primary aspects of finance-financial institutions, management, and investments and examines how they are interrelated using a modular format. Each chapter offers a concise, self-contained treatment of one or two finance concepts or institutions easily covered in a single class period. AN INTRODUCTION TO INSTITUTIONS, MANAGEMENT & INVESTMENTS, 10E, International Edition provides a strong finance foundation that students can build on using Internet resources and sample number problems, cases, and calculator solutions that use a Microsoft Excel appendix. The text introduces the time value of money using three approaches to reinforce the concept-interest tables, financial calculator keystrokes, and investment analysis calculator software created specifically for the Mayo books. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW fill-in-the-blank questions in the chapter show the progression from question-working out the problem, the final answer, and any implications of the answer. This format is especially helpful for student learning outside of class and for distance learners. FEATURES Expanded coverage of the time value of money in the Excel appendix aids understanding of this topic,

100

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

one that is often difficult for students to grasp, by providing repeated exposure throughout the book. NEW fill-in-the-blank questions in the chapter show the progression from question-working out the problem, the final answer, and any implications of the answer. This format is especially helpful for student learning outside of class and for distance learners. Numerical illustrations in the margins add to the many effective learning features used to reinforce the crucial concept of the time value of money. Smaller pieces (modules) help students digest financial concepts more easily and with less intimidation. A Derivatives chapter adds sophistication and breadth to this entry-level text. A Time Value of Money chapter uses three approaches to convey this important topic--interest tables, a financial calculator, and investment analysis calculator software. The text facilitates learning through the use of learning objectives, number problems, cases, illustrations that employ financial calculators, and succinct explanations. Margin Internet references and calculator solutions encourage students to use technology in solving financial problems. CONTENTS

PRINCIPLES OF FINANCE, 5E
Scott Besley, University of South Florida; Eugene F. Brigham, University of Florida

1. An Introduction to Basic Finance. Part I: FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS. 2. The Role of Financial Markets and Financial Intermediaries. 3. Investment Banking. 4. Securities Markets. 5. The Federal Reserve. 6. International Currency Flows. Part II: FINANCIAL TOOLS. 7. The Time Value of Money. 8. Risk and Its Measurement. 9. Analysis of Financial Statements. Part III: CORPORATE FINANCE. 10. Forms of Business and Corporate Taxation. 11. Break-Even Analysis and the Payback Period. 12. Leverage. 13. Cost of Capital. 14. Capital Budgeting. 15. Forecasting. 16. Cash Budgeting. 17. Management of Current Assets. 18. Management of Short-Term Liabilities. 19. Intermediate-Term Debt and Leasing. Part IV: INVESTMENTS. 20. The Features of Stock. 21. Stock Valuation. 22. The Features of Long-Term Debt-Bonds. 23. Bond Pricing and Yields. 24. Preferred Stock. 25. Convertible Securities. 26. Investment Returns. 27. Investment Companies. Part V: DERIVATIVES. 28. Options: Puts and Calls. 29. Futures and Swaps.
2012, 656pp, Paperback, 9781111820640, South-Western College

Give your students a strong foundation in contemporary finance using the latest PRINCIPLES OF FINANCE, 5E by leading finance authors Besley and Brigham. This dynamic survey text addresses todays most relevant financial concepts as students examine current financial markets and institutions, investments, and managerial finance. The books modular format allows you to present concepts in the order that best suits your course. The book begins by discussing principles of financial systems and business organizations, then addresses valuation concepts and corporate decision making and concludes with investment fundamentals. Count on PRINCIPLES OF FINANCE, 5E to offer the diversity of coverage and practical strengths your students need for success. NEW TO THIS EDITION NEW LEARNING OBJECTIVES AND CHAPTER SUMMARIES GUIDE STUDY AND REVIEW. Concise, clear Learning Objectives now at the beginning of each chapter and the end-of-chapter summaries for each chapter highlight the most important concepts that students should learn from the material and connect concepts to the learning objectives to which they apply. NEW DISCUSSIONS REVIEW THE IMPACT OF 20072009 FINANCIAL MARKET MELTDOWNS. Where appropriate throughout this edition, the authors discuss the ongoing ramifications of the 2007-2009 financial markets meltdown. NEW SELF-TEST PROBLEMS ENSURE STUDENT COMPREHENSION AS THEY PROGRESS. Focused Self-Test Problems now appear where appropriate within the body of each chapter to allow students to
101

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

check their progress before moving ahead. REVISED PRESENTATION OF TIME VALUE OF MONEY STRENGTHENS STUDENT UNDERSTANDING OF THIS KEY FINANCIAL CONCEPT. The authors have revised and further clarified the important presentation of Time Value of Money (Ch. 9) to further facilitate and ensure student understanding of this important concept. FEATURES REVISED CHAPTER PRINCIPLES--PERSONAL FINANCE SECTIONS HELP STUDENTS BETTER UNDERSTAND HOW CONCEPTS APPLY TO PERSONAL LIVES. This fresh Chapter PrinciplesPersonal Finance section in each chapter relates the chapters concepts to contemporary personal financial decisions, such as evaluating a car loan. CONTINUED EMPHASIS ON SPREADSHEETS ENHANCES STUDENTS SKILLS. Additional instruction on spreadsheets within each relevant chapter as well as throughout chapter appendices emphasizes how best to use this critical financial tool. MANAGERIAL PERSPECTIVES DEMONSTRATE THE IMPACT OF FINANCE TODAY. Each chapter captures students attention from the first page with an intriguing opening Managerial Perspectives that details actual events related to the chapters content. Clear, engaging prose demonstrates the impact of finance in todays world and in recent news. CONTENTS Part I: GENERAL FINANCE CONCEPTS. 1 An Overview of Finance. 2 Financial Assets (Instruments). 3 Financial Markets and the Investment Banking Process. 4 Financial Intermediaries and the Banking System. 5 The Cost of Money (Interest Rates). Part II: GENERAL BUSINESS CONCEPTS. 6 Business Organizations and the Tax Environment. Appendix 6A: 2011 Tax Rate Schedule. 7 Analysis of Financial Statements. 8 Financial Planning and Control. Appendix 8A: Projected Financial Statements--Including Financing Feedbacks. Part III: FUNDAMENTALS OF VALUation. 9 The Time Value of Money. Appendix 9A: Generating an Amortization Schedule--Financial Calculator Solution and Spreadsheet Solution. 10 Valuation Concepts. 11 Risk and Rates of Return. Part IV:CORPORATE DECISION MAKING. 12 The Cost of Capital. 13 Capital Budgeting. Appendix 13A: Depreciation. Appendix 13B: Using a
102

Spreadsheet to Compute NPV and IRR. 14 Capital Structure and Dividend Policy Decisions. 15 Working Capital Management. Part V: INVESTOR DECISION MAKING. 16 Investment Concepts. 17 Security Valuation and Selection.
2012, 816pp, Hardback, 9781111527365, South-Western College

REAL ESTATE
REAL ESTATE APPRAISAL

BASIC REAL ESTATE APPRAISAL (WITH STUDENT CD-ROM), 8E


Richard M. Betts

This book provides a clear overview of the profession and basic appraisal techniques, providing a thorough outline of fundamental real estate appraisal theory and practice. This edition highlights the new Uniform Appraisal Dataset (UAD) and gives an update on the Appraisal Reports section, USPAP Reporting Standards, and the URAR Form. Each book is accompanied by a CD that includes a student version of ClickFORMS along with important Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac bulletins regarding requirements and standards. NEW TO THIS EDITION Fully updated to reflect changes in the Appraisal Reports section, USPAP Reporting Standards, and the URAR Form. Includes discussion of the new Uniform Appraisal Dataset (UAD) and how to use these fields and responses when completing Appraisal forms. The CD includes a student version of ClickFORMS along with a number of key appraisal reference documents including Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac bulletins regarding appraisal requirements and the

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

new UAD requirements. FEATURES Clear Student Learning Outcomes introduce each chapter to set solid objectives for learning. ClickFORMS exercises provide practical experience using the reporting methods and forms commonly used in everyday appraisal practice. A complete Instructors Manual with chapter outlines, class activities, key examples, review quizzes, chapter tests, two final exams, PowerPoint support, and new WebTutor options are available online to adopters. CONTENTS l. Real Estate Appraisal and You. 2. Legal Considerations in Appraisal. 3. The Formal Appraisal Process. 4. Focus on Neighborhood, Community, and Market. 5. Real Estate Economics and Value. 6. Property Inspection and Analysis: The Site. 7. Property Inspection and Analysis: The Improvements. 8. The Sales Comparison Approach. 9. Analyzing and Adjusting Comparable Sales. 10. Valuing the Site. 11. Introducing the Cost Approach. 12. Estimating Loss in Value: Accrued Depreciation. 13. The Income Approach. 14. Income Capitalization: Rates and Techniques. 15. Reconciling the Value Estimates. 16. Reporting Appraisal Opinions. 17. Appraising Special Ownership and Interests. 18. The Professional Appraiser.
2013, 656pp, Paperback, 9781133495949, South-Western

presents the current economic factors that affect the real estate market and cause real estate values to change. Case & Point features throughout provide thought-provoking application of concepts and help generate discussion. No formal background in economics is required for both salesperson and broker candidates to gain a solid understanding of economic and finance principles that are fundamental to achieving success in the real estate field. FEATURES Interactive online quizzing, flashcards and discussion threads engage learning and provide direct application of key terms and concepts. Case & Point and Special Interest Topic features extend thought-provoking coverage of economic factors to provide added clarity or understanding, as well as stimulate discussion. Chapter Previews and Summaries highlight essential concepts and key economic factors discussed. Reviewing Your Understanding questions at the end of each section and each chapter provide ongoing review and extensive reinforcement. Instructor resource materials and PowerPoint slides are available online for adopters. CONTENTS PART I: Basic Economic Background for Real Estate Analysis. 1. Introduction to Real Estate Economics. 2. Review of the Economic Principles of Capitalism. 3. Governments Role in the Economy. 4. Money, Credit, and Real Estate. 5. Important Economic Features of Real Estate. PART II: Understanding Real Estate Markets. 6. Regional and Community Analysis. 7. Community Growth Patterns. 8. Neighborhoods: Clusters of Land Use and Value. 9. Housing Markets. 10. Commercial and Industrial Markets. 11. Rural and Recreational Real Estate Markets. PART III: Major Influences on Real Estate Development. 12. The Economics of Real Property Taxation. 13. Land-Use Controls. 14. Real Estate Development. 15. Required Government Reports. PART IV: Real Estate Investment: The Economics of the Parcel. 16. Summary of Real Estate Investment Principles. 17. Income Tax Aspects of Investment Real Estate. 18. Applied Real Estate Economics. 19. Anticipating Change.
2011, 576pp, Paperback, 9780538739696, South-Western

REAL ESTATE ECONOMICS

ESSENTIALS OF REAL ESTATE ECONOMICS, 6E


Dennis J. McKenzie, College of the Redwoods; Richard M. Betts; Carol A. Jensen, Cabrillo College, Aptos

Through a direct and practical approach, this text

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

103

REAL ESTATE FINANCE

with reinforcement discussion questions along with additional online resources to extended study Pedagogy of each chapter now includes learning objectives, box features identifying critical changes in laws and practices and to highlight changes and outcomes showing how far weve come and where we are now, along with more end-of-chapter review questions and additional online resources. CONTENTS PART I: PRINCIPLES. History & Background. Money & Interest Rates. Mortgage Lenders. Secondary Mortgage Market. Mortgage Documents. Mortgage Repayment Plans. Federal Government Underwriting Programs. Mortgage Default Insurance, Foreclosure, and Title Insurance. PART II: PRACTICES. Borrow Qualification. Property Analysis. Commercial Loans: Construction & Land Loans. Commercial Building & Farm Loans. Other Financing Practices. Technology Advances in Financing & Investments. Environmental Issues. Settlement Procedures.
2013, 448pp, Paperback, 9780324181425, South-Western

REAL ESTATE FINANCE , 9E


John P. Wiedemer- Houston Community College - Emeritus; J. Keith Baker- North Lake College

REAL ESTATE FINANCE, 9e provides a contemporary review of residential and commercial real estate finance and how these financial markets work. The text has been fully updated reflecting current principles and practices of modern real estate finance resulting from the recent financial crisis and mortgage meltdown. It provides coverage of specialized mortgage lending procedures including sources of mortgage money, constraints on those sources, loan qualifications, and laws and regulations that guide practices today. An easy-to-read narrative format continues to be the hallmark of this long-time popular real estate finance text. Chapters are now structured to include learning objectives, textboxes showing where we are now, and more end-of-chapter material to include multiplechoice questions and additional online resources. NEW TO THIS EDITION Student version of ARGUS software provided on CD now offers real-life experience and computer-based analysis in searching for and negotiating investment opportunities. Numerous and substantial updates throughout each chapter reflect major changes and federal regulations of financing, mortgage, appraisal and property analysis. FEATURES An easy-to-read, conversational format helps individuals learn and apply the fundamental principles of the complex world of real estate finance today. Each chapter includes key terms and concludes
104

REAL ESTATE FINANCE, 6E


THEORY AND PRACTICE, INTERNATIONAL EDITION
Terrence M. Clauretie, University of Nevada, Las Vegas; G. Stacy Sirmans, Florida State University

The core of this text is based on sound economic and finance principles to promote a greater understanding of how real estate financial markets work. The authors blend theory with practice applying the theoretical aspects of financial economics to explain how real estate financial institutions and markets have developed and evolved to their present state, and why they take the forms they do. Dramatic changes in the real estate financial markets and the impact

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

of major federal legislation that applies to real estate finance (especially residential) are addressed. Direct application using ARGUS software makes this book extremely hands on giving students practical, realworld experience in real estate analysis. NEW TO THIS EDITION Online interactive flashcards and an open internal design with larger print help engage and enhance student learning. Complete coverage of sub-prime mortgage crisis of 2008, analysis of the Housing and Economic Recovery Act and discussion of mortgage-backed securities and their inherent risks. FEATURES A free, student trial version of ARGUS software included on CD along with student exercises provides practical experience in real estate investment by solving lease-by-lease investments and valuation problems. CD also provides tables, financial data, and worksheets to aid in understanding financial relationship and solving end-of-chapter exercises. Financial calculator keystrokes applications throughout the book assist students in solving calculations and help introduce an important tool in solving financial investment questions. Study review slides, created by the authors, are provided on the student CD for independent study and reinforcement of key concepts. Appendix reviews and references the time value of money and related concepts. CONTENTS I. FINANCE AND REAL ESTATE. 1. Real Estate Finance: An Overview. 2. Money. Credit. and the Determination of Interest Rates. 3. Finance Theory and Real Estate. II. RESIDENTIAL REAL ESTATE FINANCE. 4. The Early History of Residential Finance and Creation of the Fixed Rate Mortgage. 5. Modern Residential Finance. 6. Alternative Mortgage Instruments. 7. Financing and Property Values. 8. Federal Housing Policies: Part 1. 9. Federal Housing Policies: Part 2. 10. The Secondary Mortgage Market. 11. Valuation of Mortgage Securities. 12. Controlling Default Risk Through Borrower Qualification. Loan Underwriting and Contractual Relationships. 13. Loan Origination. Processing. and Closing. 14. Mortgage Default Insurance, Foreclosure, Title Insurance. III. COMMERCIAL REAL ESTATE

FINANCE. 15. Value, Leverage, and Capital Structure. 16. Federal Taxation and Real Estate Finance. 17. Sources of Funds for Commercial Real Estate Properties. 18. Acquisition. Development. and Construction Financing. 19. Permanent Financing of Commercial Real Estate Properties. 20. Ownership Structures for Financing and Holding Real Estate. IV. SPECIAL TOPICS IN REAL ESTATE FINANCE. 21. Real Estate in a Portfolio Context. 22. Liability. Agency Problems. Fraud. and Ethics in Real Estate Finance.
2010, 584pp, Paperback, 9780324787368, South-Western

RESIDENTIAL MORTGAGE LENDING, 6E


PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES
Thomas J. Pinkowish

This text is designed for both employees of mortgage lenders and individuals studying real estate finance who want to enhance that study with practical residential mortgage lending principles and practices. The author provides a thorough overview of mortgage lending today and outlines the practices of mortgage businesses to compete successfully in this competitive market. Each step of the mortgage process is covered while clearly explaining the fundamentals in an easy-tounderstand manner. No prior knowledge of real estate finance or any part of mortgage lending is required. Students will gain practical knowledge on residential lending business, and mortgage professionals will find this to be a valuable resource. NEW TO THIS EDITION Detailed information concerning changes in the Truth in Lending Act, RESPA, Mortgage Disclosure Improvement Act, the SAFE Act, and much more. Current information on recent mortgage and housing crisis in addition to expanded coverage on government mortgage programs such as FHA, VA, USDA, and RHS.

International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

105

Interactive online flashcards reinforce fundamental concepts and key terms essential to understanding modern residential mortgage lending. FEATURES Completely revised and reorganized around the principles, programs and practices of the residential mortgage lending industry today. Discussion point questions at the end of each chapter provide opportunity for classroom interaction to check student understanding. Instructor support includes an online instructors manual with chapter overviews, chapter objectives, and chapter quizzes along with a final exam and PowerPoint slides. CONTENTS Part I: PRINCIPLES. 1. History. 2. Real Estate Law. 3. Role of Lending. 4. Mortgage Lenders. 5. Secondary Mortgage Market. Part II: PROGRAMS. 6. Conventional Mortgage Lending. 7. Government Lending. 8. Private Mortgage Insurance. 9. Construction Lending. 10. Equity Lending. Part III: PRACTICES. 11. Compliance. 12. Origination and Processing. 13. Underwriting. 14. Appraisals. 15. Closing. 16. Loan Administration. 17. Selling Loans. 18. Lending Strategies.
2012, 592pp, Paperback, 9780324784640, South-Western

to focus on the investment factors and risk analysis that determine the evaluation of commercial and residential property. The authors use a concise and practical hands-on approach to explain the factors involved in making wise real estate investments. Using a free evaluation copy of ARGUS software provided on CD, students now gain real-life experience analyzing investment scenarios. ARGUS software is an industry-leading tool for analyzing commercial transactions, market risks, and leasing strategies and helps in calculating investment value and returns. Sample exercises utilizing this software can be found in the instructors manual. NEW TO THIS EDITION Student version of ARGUS software on CD provides direct application and real-life experience analyzing real estate investment scenarios. Online WebCT and Blackboard learning resources support independent learning and reinforce fundamental concepts using tutorial quizzes and interactive flashcards. Case studies enhance learning and help develop critical-thinking skills needed in todays dynamic real estate finance market. Substantial updates reflect changes in environmental constraints and all financial aspects of real estate investment ranging from property and income taxes to financing options and pitfalls. FEATURES Updated exhibits and examples reflect dramatic changes and recent trends in real estate markets. Discussion questions throughout develop understanding and critical-thinking skills. Analysis of legal documents involved in making investments, with focused attention on the deed, earnest money contract, and commercial lease. CONTENTS 1. Real Estate as an Investment. 2. Land Use Controls. 3. Environmental Constraints. 4. Ownership of Real Property. 5. Legal Documents. 6. Property Taxes and Income Taxes. 7. Special Income Tax Rules Applicable to Real Estate. 8. Single-Family Dwellings and Condominiums. 9. Business Organizations. 10. Financing Real Estate Investments. 11. Tools of Analysis. 12. Comparison Screening. 13. Discount Analysis. 14.

REAL ESTATE INVESTMENT

REAL ESTATE INVESTMENT (WITH CD-ROM), 7E


John P. Wiedemer, Houston Community College - Emeritus; Joseph E. Goeters, Houston Community College; J. Edward Graham, University of North Carolina - Wilmington

While often combined, this well-known text separates the discussion of real estate investment and finance
106

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

Computer-Aided Analysis. 15. Examining Real Property Risk. 16. Marketing Investment Property.
2011, 340pp, Hardback, 9780324784688, South-Western

REAL ESTATE LAW

the efforts being made by the federal and state governments to assist homeowners faced with foreclosure. Comprehensive coverage of technology and how it affects real estate practice and law, including new coverage on the use and etiquette of email correspondence. Helpful Websites has been added to each chapter providing the instructor and students with Internet links to additional information. New profiles of working paralegals provide practical tips on working in the real estate field. FEATURES Extensive inclusion and explanation of forms and documents central to the world of real estate. Details the transactional aspects of the law needed to assist attorneys with closing real estate purchases, sales, and mortgage loans secured by real estate. Includes legal theory, tips, checklists, several relevant forms, and case summaries to assist the student in understanding how legal principles work in a realworld environment. Strong coverage of ethics in each chapter. CONTENTS 1. Introduction to the Law of Real Property. 2. Concurrent Ownership. 3. Surveys and Land Descriptions 4. Encumbrances, Easements, and Licenses 5. Contracts 6. Deeds 7. Legal Aspects of Real Estate Finance 8. Title Examinations 9. Title Insurance 10. Real Estate Closings 11. Real Estate Closing Forms and Examples 12. Condominiums and Cooperatives 13. Leases.
2012, 512pp, Paperback, 9781111309060, Career & Computing

ESSENTIALS OF PRACTICAL REAL ESTATE LAW, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 5E


Daniel F. Hinkel, The National Center for Paralegal Training

ESSENTIALS OF PRACTICAL REAL ESTATE LAW, International Edition is a concise, yet thorough examination of the most critical areas of real estate law. It employs a user-friendly approach to introducing important real property law concepts. The text details the transactional aspects of the law needed to assist attorneys with closing real estate purchases, sales, and mortgage loans secured by real estate. It includes case summaries that allow students to practice their analytical skills and see how concepts are applied in practice. Each chapter includes practical assignments and a self-study examination to help students reinforce their understanding of the material contained in the chapter. The numerous forms and checklists also facilitate understanding of each concept and ensure the student is well prepared to work as a professional in real estate. The legal theory, tips, checklists, relevant forms, case summaries, and assignments assist the student in understanding how to successfully work in a real-world environment. NEW TO THIS EDITION Covers the new RESPA the rules are discussed including instructions on how to complete the new HUD-1 form. Discusses the recent real estate recession including
International Edition

www.cengageasia.com

107

PRACTICAL REAL ESTATE LAW, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 6E


Daniel F. Hinkel, The National Center for Paralegal Training

by-step, helping students better understand the material and acting as an on-the-job reference for professionals. Contains detailed residential and commercial real estate content and forms. Includes illustrative case summaries that introduce students to reading and analyzing a case. An Ethics feature in each chapter takes the student into a hypothetical situation that clearly represents an ethical problem in a real estate law practice. Review questions, case problems, and practical assignments at the end of the chapters provide students with more exercises and opportunities to put modern real-estate concepts into practice. CONTENTS

PRACTICAL REAL ESTATE LAW, International Edition, is an excellent text for educating and training future paralegals about the intricacies of real estate law and transactions. This user-friendly text covers the central areas involved in transactional real estate in detail. These areas include real estate contracts, real estate brokerage relationships, real estate finance, as it specifically relates to residential and commercial processes, surveys, title insurance and federal taxation and how it applies to the ownership and investment in real estate. The text also discusses the many new laws that have been passed to assist homeowners facing foreclosure. Case summaries successfully illustrate how the legal principles operate in the real world and will give your students practice in reading and analyzing case material. NEW TO THIS EDITION Student StudyWare CD provides additional quizzing, case studies, and key terms flashcards to help students master the important concepts in the course. Contains a discussion of the new RESPA, HOEPA and Truth-in-Lending rules, including instructions on how to complete the new HUD-1 form. Material on the recent real estate recession, including the efforts being made by the federal and state governments to assist homeowners faced with foreclosure. New content on the use and etiquette of email correspondence. Helpful Websites in each chapter provide instructors and students with Internet links to additional information. FEATURES Checklists explain real estate transactions step-

1. Introduction to the Law of Real Property. 2. Concurrent Ownership. 3. Surveys and Land Descriptions. 4. Public Regulation and Encumbrances. 5. Easements and Licenses. 6. Contracts. 7. Preparation and Review of a Real Estate Contract. 8. Deeds. 9. Financing Sources in Real Estate Transactions. 10. Legal Aspects of Real Estate Finance. 11. Mortgage Forms and Provisions. 12. Title Examinations. 13. Title Insurance. 14. Real Estate Closings. 15. Government Regulation of Real Estate Closings. 16. Real Estate Closing Forms and Examples. 17. Condominiums and Cooperatives. 18. Leases.
2011, 672pp, Paperback, 9781111125813, Career & Computing

REAL ESTATE LAW, 8E


Robert J. Aalberts, University of Nevada, Las Vegas

Clear and concise, REAL ESTATE LAW, 8th Edition combines practical legal examples with theory and case law to illustrate the concepts for business and real estate majors alike. Rather than a state-specific

108

www.cengageasia.com

International Edition

format, the text covers real estate law generally, with discussions, short case summaries, longer teaching cases, exhibits, and practical applications that help students spot the issues and apply legal principles to realistic situations. Chapters build on each other to give students a comprehensive picture of real estate law and help them recognize when to consult an attorney, while integrating important ethical and public policy issues. NEW TO THIS EDITION Improved Chapter Organization: Deliver the materials more clearly with reworded chapter objectives that better demonstrate key points and highlighted in-text examples that stand out. Stimulating Energy-Related Issues: Delve into the most current energy-related topics, such as oil and natural gas sources, and the Deep Water Horizon and Gulf Oil Spill of 2010, including the effect of the Clean Water Act on cleanups. Students will also respond to discussions about the new statutes on easements, which allow accessibility to solar energy, as well as new information on the Regional Greenhouse Gas Initiative (RGGI) and how it encourages cleaner energy sources. Real-Life Topics: Relate the issues to students own lives with discussions on the federal estate tax reinstatement in 2011, the division of marital property in divorce (common law vs. community property), trust law and estate planning, real estate contracts, real estate dispute resolution, and a discussion on liability with regard to Chinese imported drywall. Also included is the topic of Virtual Office Websites, the Interstate Land Sales Full Disclosure Act, the Housing for Older Persons Act provisions, and several new discussions on title and insurance issues. New Mortgage Crisis Information: Give students the most up-to-date material available on subprime loans as mortgage-backed securities, along with a new case on Mortgage Electronic Registration System (MERS), and a discussion of The Helping Families Save Their Homes Act of 2009. There are also expanded discussions of reverse mortgages, short sales of distressed properties, Friendly Assumptions, mediation to settle mortgage foreclosures, the Community Reinvestment Act, and non-recourse loan instruments and deficiency judgments. Industry-Related Issues: Prepare students for a career in the real estate industry by familiarizing them with
International Edition

the Home Valuation Code of Conduct and how it affects the appraisal industry, as well as the Estray statutes, and less-known topic of judicial takings. They will also benefit from an unexpected new discussion of the poor and formerly homeless inhabiting foreclosed, abandoned homes. Appendices: The appendices are now available on the texts companion website. FEATURES Well-defined Objectives: Help students study more effectively from the text with chapter objectives included at the beginning of each chapter, along with numerous in-text examples, and insightful A Case In Point features, which provide real-life illustrations of legal principles in action. Thoughtful Presentation: Deliver a more complete understanding of the material as students progress through the real estate story delivered in the text. Chapters build on each other to thoroughly illustrate various types of real estate transactions and give students a clear picture of what to expect with each. Ethical Implications: Portray real estate matters as the complex issues they are, complete with real-life, ethical concerns and disputes. The author integrates many into the text, along with Ethical and Public Policy Issues features in each chapter for insightful, in-depth discussions on key issues relating to real estate law. Helpful Lecture Tools: Custom-create lively classroom presentations with ready-to-use PowerPoint slides that tie directly to chapter content. CONTENTS PART I: THE LEGAL SYSTEM AND THE NATURE OF REAL PROPERTY. 1, Introduction to the Legal System. 2. The Nature of Property. 3. The Scope of Real Property. 4. Rights in Land of Others. PART II: THE REAL ESTATE TRANSACTION. 5. Types of Ownership. 6. The Search for Real Estate. 7. The Real Estate Contract. 8. Title and Insurance. 9. Financing the Real Estate Purchase. 10. Closings and Taxation: Other Methods of Acquisition. 11. Landlord and Tenant. PART III: LAND USE AND REGULATION. 12. Rights and Duties of Landowners and Occupants. 13. Legal Planning and Regulation of Land Use. 14. Environmental Law and Regulation.
2012, 672pp, Hardback, 9780840053596, South-Western College

www.cengageasia.com

109

REAL ESTATE PRINCIPLES

the end of text, help students reinforce important concepts. Discussion questions help to facilitate lively classroom discussion and promote real-world application. Practice exam helps prepare students for the real estate license examination. CONTENTS PART ONE: BASIC CONCEPTS OF REAL ESTATE. 1. Real Estate and the Economy. 2. Land: Its Characteristics and Acquisition. 3. Land Descriptions. 4. Land Use Controls. 5. Estates, Interests, Deeds, and Title. PART TWO: THE ORDERLY PROCESS OF A SALE. 6. Contracts and Business Law. 7. Agency Law and Representation. 8. Listing the Property. 9. Marketing and Selling Real Estate. 10. Lending Institutions and Loans. 11. Financing. 12. Closing Statements. PART THREE: OTHER ASPECTS OF REAL ESTATE. 13. Condominiums and Cooperatives. 14. Leases. 15. Property Management. 16. Investment and Tax Aspects of Ownership. 17. The Appraisal Process. 18. Environmental Issues and Real Estate. 19. Fair Housing Law. 20. License Law. 21. Real Estate Math.
2010, 504pp, Paperback, 9780324784558, South-Western

REAL ESTATE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES, 8E


Arlyne Geschwender, Randall School of Real Estate

REAL ESTATE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES is organized around the natural flow and sequence of events in a real estate transaction. Written in a friendly tone and accessible reading style for new real estate professionals, the author takes a more realistic and practical approach making it the text of choice. Uniquely organized into three parts, this book first allows the reader to gain a solid foundation in basic real estate principles to more easily understand the various aspects of real estate practice. The workbook delivers additional reinforcement exercises and practice exam questions for self-paced learning. On-the-go students will also appreciate using the audio CDs to review key terms and essential concepts for each chapter. NEW TO THIS EDITION New environmental issues chapter covers various federal environmental acts as well as many other issues affecting real estate. Useful websites highlighted in the margins allow for further research. Topic coverage of Buyer Agency, Property Listings, the Federal Reserve and License Law has been added. FEATURES Updated to reflect changes in modern real estate law and practice along with new forms and contracts. Engaging learning supplements including a student workbook and audio CDs aid both instructors and students. End-of-chapter review questions, with answers at

REAL ESTATE PRINCIPLES, INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 11E


Charles J. Jacobus

For decades this popular principles book has laid a solid foundation for thousands of new real estate professionals starting a rewarding career in the real estate industry. Known for his clear presentation and engaging style, Charles Jacobus brings together all the pieces of real estate giving students the fundamentals they need for success. This best-selling principles book has been updated to reflect numerous changes in modern real estate practice. Particular attention has
International Edition

110

www.cengageasia.com

been given to new regulations in the mortgage industry while still reinforcing the core concepts that have been the cornerstone of American real estate ownership. NEW TO THIS EDITION Engaging new feature challenges students to apply critical-thinking skills with real-life scenarios putting modern real estate practice into action Updated and expanded coverage of Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and the rapidly changing landscape of the mortgage industry Two-color format engages learning and interactive online flashcards direct application of key terms and concepts Blackboard support facilitates a seamless online learning environment Interactive online flashcards further engage learning and direct application of key terms and concepts. FEATURES Extensive applications including vocabulary review of key terms, additional readings for deeper research, and questions and problems with answers in the appendix for self-paced reinforcement Simplified contracts and title policies written in a straight-forward manner give users a clearer understanding of these essential real estate documents Essential math review and applications are reinforced in the appendix along with detailed construction illustrations and terminology provided for reference the best among principles texts Self-paced exam prep study guide, available separately, helps increase retention and improve confidence by providing exam-style questions covering important material from each chapter CONTENTS 1. Introduction to Real Estate. 2. Nature and Description of Real Estate. 3. Rights and Interests in Land. 4. Forms of Ownership. 5. Transferring Title. 6. Recordation, Abstracts, and Title Insurance. 7. Contract Law. 8. Real Estate Sales Contracts. 9. Mortgage and Note. 10. Deed of Trust. 11. Lending Practices. 12. The Loan and the Consumer. 13. Sources of Financing. 14. Types of Financing. 15. Taxes and Assessments. 16. Title Closing and Escrow. 17. Real Estate Leases. 18. Real Estate Appraisal. 19. Licensing Laws and Professional Affiliation. 20. The

Principal-Broker Relationship: Employment. 21. The Principal-Broker Relationship: Agency. 22. Fair Housing, ADA, Equal Credit, and Community Reinvestment. 23. Condominiums, Cooperatives, PUDs, and Timeshares. 24. Property Insurance. 25. Land-Use Control. 26. Real Estate and the Economy. 27. Investing in Real Estate.
2010, 598pp, Paperback, 9781439045916, South-Western

www.cengageasia.com

111

COMBINED AUTHOR/TITLE INDEX

A
Aalberts, Real Estate Law, 8e, p.108 Ackert/Deaves, Behavioral Finance, International Edition, p.68 An Introduction to Derivatives and Risk Management, International Edition (with Stock-Trak Coupon), 9e, p.91 An Introduction to Institutions, Management & Investments, International Edition, 10e, p.100 Analysis of Investments and Mangement of Portfolios, International Edition (with Thomson ONE - Business School Edition and Stock-Trak Coupon), 10e, p.92 Anderson, Policy Applications and Principles of Public Finance, International Edition (with InfoTrac College Edition 2-Semester and Economic Applications Printed Access Card), 2e, p.62 Arnold, Economics, International Editon (with Videos: Office Hours Printed Access Card), 11e, p.45

Coupon), 9e, p.91 Chung/Quah, Pursuing Green Growth in Asia and the Pacific, p.10 Clauretie/Sirmans, Real Estate Finance: Theory and Practice, International Edition, 6e, p.104 Contemporary Corporate Finance, International Edition (with Thomson ONE Business School Edition), 12e, p.70 Core Concepts of Financial Management, p.71 Corporate Finance: A Focused Approach, 5e, p.72 Corporate Finance: Theory and Practice, 8e, p.74 Corporate Finance: Asia-Pacific edition, p.73 Croushore, M & B (with Economics CourseMate with eBook Printed Access Card), 2e, p.36

D
Dowling/Valenzuela, Economic Development in Asia, 2e, p.4

B
Barro, Intermediate MACRO (with Product Web Site Printed Access Card and Review Cards), p.17 Barro, Macroeconomics, International Edition, p.18 Basic Economics, International Edition, 16e, p.64 Basic Real Estate Appraisal (with Student CD-ROM), 8e, p.102 Baumol/Blinder, Economics: Principles and Policy, International Edition, 12e, p.41 Behavioral Finance, International Edition, p.68 Benti and Changwu, p.7 Besley/Brigham, CFIN 3 (with Finance Coursemate with eBook Printed Access Card), 3e, p.69 Besley/Brigham, Principles of Finance, 5e, p.101 Besley/Brigham/Henry/Watanabe, Corporate Finance: Asia-Pacific edition, p.73 Betts, Basic Real Estate Appraisal (with Student CD-ROM), 8e, p.102 Borland, Microeconomics: Case studies and applications, 2e, p.62 Boyes, Managerial Economics: Markets and the Firm, International Edition, 2e, p.32 Boyes/Melvin, Fundementals of Economics, International Edition, 6e, p.47 Brailsford/Heaney/Bilson, Investments: Concepts & Applications with Student Resource Access 12 Months, 4e, p.95 Brigham/Daves, Intermediate Financial Management (with Thomson ONE - Business School Edition Finance 1-Year 2-Semester Printed Access Card), 11e, p.81 Brigham/Houston/Chiang/Lee/Ariffin, Core Concepts of Financial Management, p.71 Brigham/Houston/Chiang/Lee/Ariffin, Essentials of Financial Management, 2e, p.74 Brue/Grant, The Evolution of Economic Thought, International Edition, 8e, p.15 Brux, Economic Issues and Policy, International Edition (with InfoApps 2-Semester Printed Access Card), 5e, p.5

E
ECON Macro 3 (with Economics CourseMate with eBook Printed Access Card), 3e, p.59 ECON Micro3 (with Economics CourseMate with eBook Printed Access Card), 3e, p.60 Economic Development in Asia, 2e, p.4 Economic Education for Consumers, International Edition, 4e, p.97 Economic Issues and Policy, International Edition (with InfoApps 2-Semester Printed Access Card), 5e, p.5 Economic Policies and Social Welfare in the 21st Century, p.8 Economics and Contemporary Issues (with Economic Applications and InfoTrac 2-Semester Printed Access Card), International Edition, 9e, p.6 Economics for Managers, International Edition, p.30 Economics for Managers, International Edition (with InfoApps), 12e, p.29 Economics for Today: Fourth Asia Pacific Edition with Student Resource Access 12 Months, 4e, p.47 Economics for Today, International Edition, 8e, p.43 Economics: A Contemporary Introduction, International Edition, 10e, p.38 Economics: Principles and Policy, International Edition, 12e, p.41 Economics, 2e, p.42 Economics, International Edition, 7e, p.40 Economics, International Editon (with Videos: Office Hours Printed Access Card), 11e, p.45 Ehrhardt/Brigham, Corporate Finance: A Focused Approach, 5e, p.72 Entrepreneurial Finance, International Edition, 4e, p.84 Environmental Economics and Management, International Edition, 6e, p.9 Essentials of Financial Management, 2e, p.74 Essentials of Practical Real Estate Law, International Edition, 5e, p.107 Essentials of Real Estate Economics, 6e, p.103

C
CFIN 3 (with Finance Coursemate with eBook Printed Access Card), 3e, p.69 Callan/Thomas, Environmental Economics and Management, International Edition, 6e, p.9 Carbaugh, International Economics, International Edition, 14e, p.25 Chance/Brooks, An Introduction to Derivatives and Risk Management, International Edition (with Stock-Trak
112

F
Finance for Executives: Managing for Value Creation, 4e, p.75 Financial Management: Theory and Practice, An Asia Edition p.77 Financial Analysis with Microsoft Excel, International Edition, 6e, p.76 Financial Institutions & Markets with Student Resource Access 12 Months, 6e, p.86 Financial Institutions and Markets, International Edition (with Stock Trak Coupon), 10e, p.87

www.cengageasia.com

COMBINED AUTHOR/TITLE INDEX

Financial Management, International Edition (with Thomson ONE - Business School Edition 6-Month and Smart Finance Printed Access Card), 3e, p.78 Financial Mathematics for Decision Making, p.80 Fundamentals of Labor Economics, International Edition, 2e, p.28 Fundamentals of Managerial Economics, International Edition (with InfoApps 2-Semester), 9e, p.31 Fundementals of Economics, International Edition, 6e, p.47

J
Jacobus, Real Estate Principles, International Edition, 11e, p.110

K
Koh/Ang/Brigham/Ehrhardt, Financial Management: Theory and Practice, An Asia Edition p.77

G
Gans/King/Stonecash/Mankiw, Principles of Economics, 5e, p.50 Geschwender, Real Estate Principles and Practices, 8e, p.110 Gitman/Joehnk/Billingsley, PFIN3 (with Finance CourseMate and eBook Printed Access Card), 3e, p.98 Gitman/Joehnk/Billingsley, Personal Financial Planning, International Edition, 13e, p.99 Gottheil, Principles of Economics, International Edition, 7e, p.51 Gregory/Stuart, The Global Economy and Its Economic Systems, International Edition, p.2

L
Landsburg, Price Theory and Applications, International Edition (with Economic Applications, InfoTrac 2-Semester Printed Access Card), 8e, p.23 Lasher, Practical Financial Management, International Edition, 7e, p.83 Layton/Robinson/Tucker, Economics for Today: Fourth Asia Pacific edition with Student Resource Access 12 Months, 4e, p.47 Leach/Melicher, Entrepreneurial Finance, International Edition, 4e, p.84 Lieberman/Hall, Principles and Applications of Economics, International Edition, 6e, p.48 Lin, Benti and Changwu, p.7 Lumby/Jones, Corporate Finance: Theory and Practice, 8e, p.74

H
Hawawini/Viallet, Finance for Executives: Managing for Value Creation, 4e, p.75 Health Economics and Policy, International Edition, 5e, p.14 Health Economics, International Edition, 6e, p.12 Henderson, Health Economics and Policy, International Edition, 5e, p.14 Hinkel, Essentials of Practical Real Estate Law, International Edition, 5e, p.107 Hinkel, Practical Real Estate Law, International Edition, 6e, p.108 Hirschey, Fundamentals of Managerial Economics, International Edition (with InfoApps 2-Semester), 9e, p.31 Hirschey, Managerial Economics, International Edition (with InfoApps Printed Access Card), 12e, p.33 History of the American Economy, International Edition, 12e, p.16 Hunt/Terry, Financial Institutions & Markets with Student Resource Access 12 Months, 6e, p.86 Hyclak/Johnes/Thornton, Fundamentals of Labor Economics, International Edition, 2e, p.28 Hyman, Public Finance: A Contemporary Application Theory Policy, International Edition, 10e, p.63

M
M & B (with Economics CourseMate with eBook Printed Access Card), 2e, p.36 Macroeconomics, International Edition, p.18 Madura, Financial Institutions and Markets, International Edition (with Stock Trak Coupon), 10e, p.87 Madura, International Corporate Finance, International Edition, 11e, p.89 Managerial Economics: Markets and the Firm, International Edition, 2e, p.32 Managerial Economics, International Edition (with InfoApps Printed Access Card), 12e, p.33 Managing in a Global Economy: Demystifying International Macroeconomics, p.26 Mankiw, Principles of Economics, International Edition, 6e, p.54 Mankiw/Quah/Wilson, Principles of Economics: An Asian Edition, 2e p.56 Mankiw/Taylor, Economics, 2e, p.42 Marthinsen, Managing in a Global Economy: Demystifying International Macroeconomics, p.26 Mastrianna, Basic Economics, International Edition, 16e, p.64 Mayes/Shank, Financial Analysis with Microsoft Excel, International Edition, 6e, p.76 Mayo, An Introduction to Institutions, Management & Investments, International Edition, 10e, p.100 Mayo, Investments: An Introduction, International Edition, 11e, p.93 McEachern, ECON Macro 3 (with Economics CourseMate with eBook Printed Access Card), 3e, p.59 McEachern, ECON Micro3 (with Economics CourseMate with eBook Printed Access Card), 3e, p.60 McEachern, Economics: A Contemporary Introduction, International Edition, 10e, p.38 McGuigan/Moyer/Harris, Economics for Managers, International Edition (with InfoApps), 12e, p.29 McGuigan/Moyer/Rao/Kretlow, Contemporary Corporate Finance, International Edition (with Thomson ONE Business School Edition), 12e, p.70
113

I
Ibbett, Financial Mathematics for Decision Making, p.80 Intermediate Financial Management (with Thomson ONE Business School Edition Finance 1-Year 2-Semester Printed Access Card), 11e, p.81 Intermediate MACRO (with Product Web Site Printed Access Card and Review Cards), p.17 International Corporate Finance, International Edition, 11e, p.89 International Economics, International Edition, 14e, p.25 Introduction to Financial Management, International Edition (with Thomson ONE - Business School Edition 6-Month Printed Access Card and Economic CourseMate with eBook Printed Access Card), 3e, p.82 Introductory Econometrics, International Edition, 5e, p.3 Investments: An Introduction, International Edition, 11e, p.93 Investments: Concepts & Applications with Student Resource Access 12 Months, 4e, p.95 Ismail, Money, Islamic Banks and the Real Economy, p.37

www.cengageasia.com

COMBINED AUTHOR/TITLE INDEX

McKenzie/Betts/Jensen, Essentials of Real Estate Economics, 6e, p.103 McLean/Applegate, Economics and Contemporary Issues (with Economic Applications and InfoTrac 2-Semester Printed Access Card), International Edition, 9e, p.6 Megginson/Smart/Graham, Financial Management, International Edition (with Thomson ONE - Business School Edition 6-Month and Smart Finance Printed Access Card), 3e, p.78 Melvin/Boyes, Principles of Economics, International Edition, 9e, p.52 Michaels, Economics for Managers, International Edition, p.30 Microeconomic Theory: Basic Principles and Extensions, International Edition, 11e, p.19 Microeconomics: A Modern Approach, International Edition, p.21 Microeconomics: An Intuitive Approach, International Edition, p.22 Microeconomics with Calculus, International Edition (with LiveGraphs Printed Access Card), p.20 Microeconomics: Case studies and applications, 2e, p.62 Miller/Stafford, Economic Education for Consumers, International Edition, 4e, p.97 Money, Islamic Banks and the Real Economy, p.37

International Edition, 10e, p.63 Pursuing Green Growth in Asia and the Pacific, p.10

R
Real Estate Finance: Theory and Practice, International Edition, 6e, p.104 Real Estate Investment (with CD-ROM), 7e, p.106 Real Estate Law, 8e, p.108 Real Estate Principles and Practices, 8e, p.110 Real Estate Principles, International Edition, 11e, p.110 Reilly/Brown, Analysis of Investments and Mangement of Portfolios, International Edition (with Thomson ONE Business School Edition and Stock-Trak Coupon), 10e, p.92 Residential Mortgage Lending: Principles and Practices, 6e, p.105

S
Santerre/Neun, Health Economics, International Edition, 6e, p.12 Schotter, Microeconomics: A Modern Approach, International Edition, p.21 Sexton, Survey of ECON (with Printed Access Card), 2e, p.65 Sexton, The Exploration of Economics, International Edition, 6e, p.57 Smart/Graham, Introduction to Financial Management, International Edition (with Thomson ONE - Business School Edition 6-Month Printed Access Card and Economic CourseMate with eBook Printed Access Card), 3e, p.82 Snyder, Microeconomic Theory: Basic Principles and Extensions, International Edition, 11e, p.19 Sobel/Gwartney/Stroup/Macpherson, Understanding Economics, International Edition, 14e, p.58 Strong, Portfolio Construction, Management, and Protection (with Stock-Trak Coupon), International Edition, 5e, p.96 Survey of ECON (with Printed Access Card), 2e, p.65 Survey of Economics, International Edition, 8e, p.66

N
Nechyba, Microeconomics: An Intuitive Approach, International Edition, p.22 Nechyba, Microeconomics with Calculus, International Edition (with LiveGraphs Printed Access Card), p.20 Nicholson/Snyder, Theory and Application of Intermediate Microeconomics, International Edition (with InfoApps 2-Semester Printed Access Card), 11e, p.24

O
Ord/Fildes, Principles of Business Forecasting, International Edition, p.12

P
PFIN3 (with Finance CourseMate and eBook Printed Access Card), 3e, p.98 Personal Financial Planning, International Edition, 13e, p.99 Pinkowish, Residential Mortgage Lending: Principles and Practices, 6e, p.105 Policy Applications and Principles of Public Finance, International Edition (with InfoTrac College Edition 2-Semester and Economic Applications Printed Access Card), 2e, p.62 Portfolio Construction, Management, and Protection (with Stock-Trak Coupon), International Edition, 5e, p.96 Practical Real Estate Law, International Edition, 6e, p.108 Price Theory and Applications, International Edition (with Economic Applications, InfoTrac 2-Semester Printed Access Card), 8e, p.23 Principles and Applications of Economics, International Edition, 6e, p.48 Principles of Business Forecasting, International Edition, p.12 Principles of Economics, 5e, p.50 Principles of Economics, International Edition, 6e, p.54 Principles of Economics, International Edition, 7e, p.51 Principles of Economics, International Edition, 9e, p.52 Principles of Economics: An Asian Edition, 2e, p.56 Principles of Finance, 5e, p.101 Public Finance: A Contemporary Application Theory Policy,

T
Taylor/Weerapana, Economics, International Edition, 7e, p.40 The Evolution of Economic Thought, International Edition, 8e, p.15 The Exploration of Economics, International Edition, 6e, p.57 The Global Economy and Its Economic Systems, International Edition, p.2 Theory and Application of Intermediate Microeconomics, International Edition (with InfoApps 2-Semester Printed Access Card), 11e, p.24 Tucker, Economics for Today, International Edition, 8e, p.43 Tucker, Survey of Economics, International Edition, 8e, p.66

U
Understanding Economics, International Edition, 14e, p.58

W
Walton/Rockoff, History of the American Economy, International Edition, 12e, p.16 Wiedemer/Goeters/Graham, Real Estate Investment (with CD-ROM), 7e, p.106 Wilson, Economic Policies and Social Welfare in the 21st Century, p.8 Wooldridge, Introductory Econometrics, International Edition, 5e, p.3

114

www.cengageasia.com

ORDER FORM / PRICE LIST


QTY A
__ __ __ 2013 2012 2012 9781133190219 9781111820640 9780538482486 Chance Mayo Reilly An Introduction to Derivatives and Risk Management, International Edition (with Stock-Trak Coupon), 9e An Introduction to Institutions, Management & Investments, International Edition, 10e Analysis of Investments and Mangement of Portfolios, International Edition (with Thomson ONE - Business School Edition and Stock-Trak Coupon), 10e p.91 p.100 p.92 333.95 264.95 324.95

YEAR ISBN NO.

AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION

PAGE NO.

PRICE(USD)

B
__ __ __ __ 2013 2013 2010 2012 9781133188452 9781133495949 9780538752862 9789814384216 Mastrianna Betts Ackert Lin Basic Economics, International Edition, 16e Basic Real Estate Appraisal (with Student CD-ROM), 8e Behavioral Finance, International Edition Benti and Changwu p.64 p.102 p.68 p.7 238.95 78.95 199.95 29.95

C
__ __ __ __ __ __ 2013 2012 2011 2014 2011 2013 9781133626404 9780538482899 9789814319423 9781133947530 9781844809462 9780170210362 Besley McGuigan Brigham Ehrhardt Lumby Besley CFIN 3 (with Finance Coursemate with eBook Printed Access Card), 3e Contemporary Corporate Finance, International Edition (with Thomson ONE Business School Edition), 12e Core Concepts of Financial Management Corporate Finance: A Focused Approach, 5e Corporate Finance: Theory and Practice, 8e Corporate Finance: Asia-Pacific edition p.69 p.70 p.71 p.72 p.74 p.73 64.95 299.95 119.95 286.95 85.00 108.00

E
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ 2012 2012 2010 2010 2011 2009 2013 9781111826697 9781111822217 9789814272933 9781439046821 9780538753838 9789814239189 9781133607526 McEachern McEachern Dowling Miller Brux Wilson McLean ECON Macro 3 (with Economics CourseMate with eBook Printed Access Card), 3e ECON Micro3 (with Economics CourseMate with eBook Printed Access Card), 3e Economic Development in Asia, 2e Economic Education for Consumers, International Edition, 4e Economic Issues and Policy, International Edition (with InfoApps 2-Semester Printed Access Card), 5e Economic Policies and Social Welfare in the 21st Century Economics and Contemporary Issues (with Economic Applications and InfoTrac 2-Semester Printed Access Card), International Edition, 9e Economics for Managers, International Edition Economics for Managers, International Edition (with InfoApps), 12e Economics for Today: Fourth Asia Pacific edition with Student Resource Access 12 Months, 4e Economics for Today, International Edition, 8e p.59 p.60 p.4 p.97 p.5 p.8 p.6 59.95 59.95 69.95 91.95 228.95 89.95 204.95

__ __ __ __

2011 2011 2012 2014

9780538466547 9780538470384 9780170190855 9781133582045

Michaels McGuigan Layton Tucker

p.30 p.29 p.47 p.43

210.95 310.95 150.00 323.95

Prices quoted here are correct at time of printing and are subject to change without prior notice

QTY
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

YEAR ISBN NO.


2014 2012 2011 2012 2014 2012 2013 2010 2012 2011 9781133190073 9780538453691 9781844808700 9780538453608 9781133582311 9780538482011 9781133584728 9789814281379 9781111309060 9780538739696

AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION
McEachern Baumol Mankiw Taylor Arnold Leach Callan Brigham Hinkel McKenzie Economics: A Contemporary Introduction, International Edition, 10e Economics: Principles and Policy, International Edition, 12e Economics, 2e Economics, International Edition, 7e Economics, International Editon (with Videos: Office Hours Printed Access Card), 11e Entrepreneurial Finance, International Edition, 4e Environmental Economics and Management, International Edition, 6e Essentials of Financial Management, 2e Essentials of Practical Real Estate Law, International Edition, 5e Essentials of Real Estate Economics, 6e

PAGE NO.
p.38 p.41 p.42 p.40 p.45 p.84 p.9 p.74 p.107 p.103

PRICE(USD)
323.95 296.95 85.00 318.95 323.95 266.95 123.95 139.95 168.95 70.95

F
__ __ __ __ __ __ 2013 2011 2012 2011 2012 2010 9789814369527 9780538751346 9781111989576 9780170188449 9780538482172 9780538745581 Koh Hawawini Mayes Hunt Madura Megginson Financial Management: Theory and Practice, An Asia Edition Finance for Executives: Managing for Value Creation, 4e Financial Analysis with Microsoft Excel, International Edition, 6e Financial Institutions & Markets with Student Resource Access 12 Months, 6e Financial Institutions and Markets, International Edition (with Stock Trak Coupon), 10e Financial Management, International Edition (with Thomson ONE - Business School Edition 6-Month and Smart Finance Printed Access Card), 3e Financial Mathematics for Decision Making Fundamentals of Labor Economics, International Edition, 2e Fundamentals of Managerial Economics, International Edition (with InfoApps 2-Semester), 9e Fundementals of Economics, International Edition, 6e p.77 p.75 p.76 p.86 p.87 p.78 139.90 257.95 111.95 159.50 286.95 268.95

__ __ __ __

2012 2013 2009 2014

9780170215695 9781285094229 9780324588569 9781285176109

Ibbett Hyclak Hirschey Boyes

p.80 p.28 p.31 p.47

54.00 286.95 236.95 218.95

H
__ __ __ 2012 2013 2014 9781111823719 9781133584360 9781133585114 Henderson Santerre Walton Health Economics and Policy, International Edition, 5e Health Economics, International Edition, 6e History of the American Economy, International Edition, 12e p.14 p.12 p.16 308.95 297.95 297.95

I
__ 2013 9781111530266 Brigham Intermediate Financial Management (with Thomson ONE Business School Edition Finance 1-Year 2-Semester Printed Access Card), 11e Intermediate MACRO (with Product Web Site Printed Access Card and Review Cards) International Corporate Finance, International Edition, 11e International Economics, International Edition, 14e p.81 307.95

__ __ __

2010 2012 2013

9781439040096 9780538482974 9781285060316

Barro Madura Carbaugh

p.17 p.89 p.25

64.95 281.95 281.95

Prices quoted here are correct at time of printing and are subject to change without prior notice

QTY
__

YEAR ISBN NO.


2012 9781111532154

AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION
Smart Introduction to Financial Management, International Edition (with Thomson ONE - Business School Edition 6-Month Printed Access Card and Economic CourseMate with eBook Printed Access Card), 3e Introductory Econometrics, International Edition, 5e Investments: An Introduction, International Edition, 11e Investments: Concepts & Applications with Student Resource Access 12 Months, 4e

PAGE NO.
p.82

PRICE(USD)
255.95

__ __ __

2013 2014 2011

9781111534394 9781285175676 9780170188241

Wooldridge Mayo Brailsford

p.3 p.93 p.95

272.95 323.95 165.50

M
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ 2012 2008 2012 2009 2008 2012 2009 2011 2011 2013 2010 9781111823351 9780324545678 9781111533762 9780324588316 9780324395501 9781111525514 9780324588576 9780538750806 9780538750820 9780170225441 9789814253994 Croushore Barro Boyes Hirschey Marthinsen Snyder Schotter Nechyba Nechyba Borland Ismail M & B (with Economics CourseMate with eBook Printed Access Card), 2e Macroeconomics, International Edition Managerial Economics: Markets and the Firm, International Edition, 2e Managerial Economics, International Edition (with InfoApps Printed Access Card), 12e Managing in a Global Economy: Demystifying International Macroeconomics Microeconomic Theory: Basic Principles and Extensions, International Edition, 11e Microeconomics: A Modern Approach, International Edition Microeconomics: An Intuitive Approach, International Edition Microeconomics with Calculus, International Edition (with LiveGraphs Printed Access Card) Microeconomics: Case studies and applications, 2e Money, Islamic Banks and the Real Economy p.36 p.18 p.32 p.33 p.26 p.19 p.21 p.22 p.20 p.62 p.37 69.95 318.95 242.95 261.95 196.95 236.95 245.95 295.95 295.95 48.00 69.95

P
__ __ __ __ 2014 2014 2014 2012 9781133593522 9781111971649 9781285082578 9781111526986 Lasher Gitman Gitman Anderson Practical Financial Mangement 7e International Edition Personal Financial Planning, International Edition, 13e PFIN3 (with Finance CourseMate and eBook Printed Access Card), 3e Policy Applications and Principles of Public Finance, International Edition (with InfoTrac College Edition 2-Semester and Economic Applications Printed Access Card), 2e Portfolio Construction, Management, and Protection (with Stock-Trak Coupon), International Edition, 5e Practical Real Estate Law, International Edition, 6e Price Theory and Applications, International Edition (with Economic Applications, InfoTrac 2-Semester Printed Access Card), 8e Principles and Applications of Economics, International Edition, 6e Principles of Business Forecasting, International Edition Principles of Economics, 5e Principles of Economics, International Edition, 6e p.83 p.99 p.98 p.62 248.95 236.95 69.95 254.95

__ __ __

2009 2011 2011

9780324593891 9781111125813 9780538469487

Strong Hinkel Landsburg

p.96 p.108 p.23

390.95 150.95 318.95

__ __ __ __

2013 2013 2012 2012

9781133188261 9781133584407 9780170191722 9780538453424

Lieberman Ord Gans Mankiw

p.48 p.12 p.50 p.54

323.95 165.95 174.00 323.95

Prices quoted here are correct at time of printing and are subject to change without prior notice

QTY
__ __ __ __ __ __

YEAR ISBN NO.


2014 2013 2008 2012 2011 2010 9781285064710 9781111970437 9789814227872 9781111527365 9780538797696 9789814253925

AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION
Gottheil Melvin Mankiw Besley Hyman Chung Principles of Economics, International Edition, 7e Principles of Economics, International Edition, 9e Principles of Economics: An Asian Edition, 2e Principles of Finance, 5e Public Finance: A Contemporary Application Theory Policy, International Edition, 10e Pursuing Green Growth in Asia and the Pacific

PAGE NO.
p.51 p.52 p.56 p.101 p.63 p.10

PRICE(USD)
262.95 306.95 149.95 245.95 316.95 59.90

R
__ __ __ __ __ __ 2010 2011 2012 2010 2010 2012 9780324787368 9780324784688 9780840053596 9780324784558 9781439045916 9780324784640 Clauretie Wiedemer Aalberts Geschwender Jacobus Pinkowish Real Estate Finance: Theory and Practice, International Edition, 6e Real Estate Investment (with CD-ROM), 7e Real Estate Law, 8e Real Estate Principles and Practices, 8e Real Estate Principles, International Edition, 11e Residential Mortgage Lending: Principles and Practices, 6e p.104 p.106 p.108 p.110 p.110 p.105 181.95 88.95 279.95 62.95 137.95 123.95

S
__ __ 2014 2013 9781285087306 9781111969493 Sexton Tucker Survey of ECON (with Printed Access Card), 2e Survey of Economics, International Edition, 8e p.65 p.66 69.95 210.95

T
__ __ __ __ 2013 2013 2014 2010 9781133434900 9781111970383 9781285167015 9780324599497 Brue Sexton Gregory Nicholson The Evolution of Economic Thought, International Edition, 8e The Exploration of Economics, International Edition, 6e The Global Economy and Its Economic Systems, International Edition Theory and Application of Intermediate Microeconomics, International Edition (with InfoApps 2-Semester Printed Access Card), 11e p.15 p.57 p.2 p.24 240.95 312.95 204.95 318.95

U
__ 2013 9781111971595 Sobel Understanding Economics, International Edition, 14e p.58 323.95

Prices quoted here are correct at time of printing and are subject to change without prior notice

Examination Copy Request Form


Please send me an examination copy of

ISBN

Author

Title

Edition

For adoption consideration as a text


Course Name/Number Enrolment Decision Date

required

reference

per year/semester
(circle one) (day/mth/yr)

Commencement

(day/mth/yr)

The adoption decision is made by: me me as part of a committee Others teaching the same course:

someone else (name)

required
Current Text(s)
(please indicate Author, Title and Publisher)

reference reference

required

Other courses that I teach

Please print clearly to ensure proper delivery:


Prof/Dr/Mr/Mrs/Ms Department/Institution Address

phone

fax

email

Note: Upon adoption of main text(s), free ancillaries will be made available based on existing Cengage Learning sample policy.

Cengage Learning Asia Pte. Ltd.


151 Lorong Chuan #02-08, New Tech Park (Lobby H), Singapore 556741

Tel: (65) 6410 1200 Fax (65) 6410 1208 Website: www.cengageasia.com Email: asia.info@cengage.com

Transforming learning. Transforming lives.

Cengage Learning delivers highly customized learning solutions for colleges, universities, instructors, students, libraries, government agencies, corporations and professionals around the world. These solutions are delivered through specialized content, applications and services that foster academic excellence and professional development, as well as provide measurable learning outcomes to its customers Our Mission Statement Our customers believe in advancement through education. As a trusted partner, Cengage Learning engages faculty, students, and institutions in developing and delivering the results-oriented print and digital materials they need. Visit www.cengageasia.com for more information. Cengage Learning Learning Solutions for diverse education and training needs. With a staff strength of 209 located across Asia and coordinated by a regional ofce in Singapore, Cengage Learning Asia aims to be the premier information provider within the markets we serve.
JAPAN Cengage Learning K. K. 5F, 2nd Funato Building 1-11-11 Kudankita, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0073 Japan Tel (81) 3 3511 4390 Fax (81) 3 3511 4391 e-mail asia.infojapan@cengage.com www.cengage.jp KOREA Cengage Learning Korea Ltd Suite 1801, Seokyo Tower Building, 353-1, 22 Seokyo-Dong Mapo-Gu, Seoul 121-837, Korea Tel (82) 2 322 4926 Fax (82) 2 322 4927 e-mail asia.infokorea@cengage.com MALAYSIA Cengage Learning Asia Pte Ltd (Malaysia Branch) Co. Reg No: 993622K No. 4 Jalan PJS 11/18, Bandar Sunway 46150 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel (60) 3 5636 8351/52 Fax (60) 3 5636 8302 e-mail asia.infomalaysia@cengage.com PHILIPPINES/OCEANIA Cengage Learning Asia Pte Ltd (Philippine Branch) Unit 2105-2106 Raffles Corporate Center, F. Ortigas Jr. Rd., Ortigas Center, Pasig City, Philippines 1605 Tel (63) 2 915 5290 to 93 Fax (63) 2 915 1694 e-mail asia.infophilippines@cengage.com

SINGAPORE - Regional Headquarters Cengage Learning Asia Pte Ltd 151 Lorong Chuan #02-08 New Tech Park Singapore 556741 Tel (65) 6410 1200 Fax (65) 6410 1208 e-mail asia.info@cengage.com www.cengageasia.com CHINA Cengage Learning Asia Pte Ltd (Beijing Representative Office) Room 1201 South Tower C Raycom Info Tech Park No 2 Kexueyuan South Road, Haidian District Beijing P.R. China 100190 Tel (86) 10 8286 2095/2096/2097 Fax (86) 10 8286 2089 e-mail asia.infochina@cengage.com www.cengage.com.cn HONG KONG Cengage Learning Hong Kong Limited Unit 808-810 8/F, Tins Enterprises Centre 777 Lai Chi Kok Road, Cheung Sha Wan, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel (852) 2612 1833 Fax (852) 2408 2498 e-mail asia.infohongkong@cengage.com INDONESIA PT. Cengage Learning Indonesia COSA Building, 2nd Floor Jalan Tomang Raya No. 70 Jakarta Barat, 11430 Indonesia Tel (62) 21 569 58815 Fax (62) 21 569 52371 e-mail asia.infoindonesia@cengage.com

TAIWAN Cengage Learning Asia Pte Ltd (Taiwan Branch) 9F-1 No.87 Cheng Chou Rd Da Tong District 103 Taipei Taiwan Tel (886) 2 2558 0569 Fax (886) 2 2558 0360 e-mail asia.infotaiwan@cengage.com www.cengage.tw THAILAND/INDOCHINA Cengage Learning (Thailand) Limited 408/32 Phaholyothin Place Building 8th Floor, Phaholyothin Avenue, Samseannai, Phayathai Bangkok 10400, Thailand Tel (66) 2 619 0433-5 Fax (66) 2 619 0436 e-mail asia.infothailand@cengage.com VIETNAM Cengage Learning Vietnam Company Limited Suite 1011, Zen Plaza 54-56 Nguyen Trai Street, District 1, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel (848) 3925 7880 Fax (848) 3925 7881 e-mail asia.infovietnam@cengage.com

For territories not listed above, please contact Cengage Learning in Singapore

Beyond the Book


Cengage Learning presents CengageCourse dynamic, interactive ways to teach and learn using relevant, engaging content with an accent on flexibility and reliability

For more details, visit www.cengageasia.com/OnlineProducts or email Digital Solutions User Support, asia.usersupport@cengage.com

For orders/enquiries, please contact

Cengage Learning Asia Pte Ltd 151 Lorong Chuan #02-08, New Tech Park (Lobby H), Singapore 556741 Tel: (65) 6410 1200 Fax: (65) 6410 1208 e-mail: asia.info@cengage.com website: www.cengageasia.com
CLAJan2013
2013 Cengage Learning. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by the copyright herein may be reproduced, transmitted, stored, or used in any form or by any means graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including but not limited to photocopying, recording, scanning, digitizing, taping, web distribution, information networks, or information storage and retrieval systems, except as permitted under Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act, without the prior written permission of the publisher.